Earthquake source asymmetry, structural media and rotation effects

Roman Teisseyre • Minoru Takeo • Eugeniusz Majewski Earthquake Source Asymmetry, Structural Media and Rotation Effects ...

Author: Roman Teisseyre | Minoru Takeo | Eugeniusz Majewski

50 downloads 988 Views 8MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

Roman Teisseyre • Minoru Takeo • Eugeniusz Majewski Earthquake Source Asymmetry, Structural Media and Rotation Effects

Roman Teisseyre Minoru Takeo Eugeniusz Majewski (Eds.)

Earthquake Source Asymmetry, Structural Media and Rotation Effects With 223 Figures

EDITORS: PROFESSOR ROMAN TEISSEYRE ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR EUGENIUSZ MAJEWSKI INSTITUTE OF GEOPHYSICS, POLISH ACADEMY OF SCIENCES UL. KS. JANUSZA 64 01-452 WARSAW POLAND PROFESSOR MINORU TAKEO EARTHQUAKE RESEARCH INSTITUTE UNIVERSITY OF TOKYO 1-1 YAYOI 1-CHOME, BUNKYO-KU TOKYO 113 0032 JAPAN E-mail: [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] ISBN 10 ISBN 13

3-540-31336-2 Springer Berlin Heidelberg New York 978-3-540-31336-6 Springer Berlin Heidelberg New York

Library of Congress Control Number: 2006922187 This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved, whether the whole or part of the material is concerned, specifically the rights of translation, reprinting, reuse of illustrations, recitation, broadcasting, reproduction on microfilm or in any other way, and storage in data banks. Duplication of this publication or parts thereof is permitted only under the provisions of the German Copyright Law of September 9, 1965, in its current version, and permission for use must always be obtained from Springer-Verlag. Violations are liable to prosecution under the German Copyright Law.

Springer is a part of Springer Science+Business Media springeronline.com © Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2006 Printed in The Netherlands The use of general descriptive names, registered names, trademarks, etc. in this publication does not imply, even in the absence of a specific statement, that such names are exempt from the relevant protective laws and regulations and therefore free for general use. Cover design: E. Kirchner, Heidelberg Production: A. Oelschläger Typesetting: Camera-ready by the Editors Printed on acid-free paper 30/2132/AO 543210

Preface When thinking, at the beginning of the new century, on our horizons in seismology, we might return to the old question related to the seismic rotation effects and waves. Seismology, with its spectacular achievements instrumentation, data processing, seismic tomography and source process theories – remains practically confined to linear ideal elasticity (isotropic or anisotropic). Numerous renown seismologists have tried to go beyond this horizon. As concerns rotation waves, such attempts were inspired by numerous macroscopic observations pointing out the rotation effects, often observed on the ground surface. However, this problem has been apparently closed by Mallet in 1862, who gave the following explanation: rotations of a body on the surface are due to a sequence of impacts of different seismic phases emerging under different angles. Later on, in 1937, Imamura underlined an influence of different inertia moments of an inflicted body. Thus, the surface rotation effects – rotation of some objects on the ground surface – were explained as being caused by the consecutive inclinations and recovery of these objects to the vertical, when hit by the incident seismic body or surface waves. The final position of the object could become slightly twisted in comparison to its former place; the differences between the inertia tensor moments of the object and/or its attachment (as related to friction resistance of binding) to the ground surface play an important role. At that time, seismic observations were not accurate enough to detect any rotation waves; moreover, from the point of view of ideal elasticity – such waves shall not be observed at all, because rotation motion, even if generated in a seismic source, shall be immediately attenuated. Of course, there remains the displacement rotation component, which differs from zero for shear motion, but in an ideal isotropic elastic body this component attains very small values. Perhaps some new, but rather isolated, attempts to record the rotation waves were undertaken again in relation to these theoretical predictions. However, most of them failed again because the instrumental tools were not powerful enough. In the second half of last century, we have observed a spectacular development of mechanics of continua including defects, granular structure and other deviations from the ideal linear elasticity. Special interests were

VI

concentrated on the micropolar and micromorphic continua. In such elastic continua, the real rotations can be accompanied by another kind of axial motion – the twist-bend motion. We must stress that seismologists share different opinions on the nature of rotation waves. Perhaps, still the majority believes that such rotation motions are not related to inner rotations but are directly related to rotation of displacement field which may reach much higher magnitudes in materials with an internal structure than in homogeneous layers; considering damages in the high buildings, there are many examples indicating enormous increase of rotation effects caused by consecutive impacts of seismic body and surface waves. The rotation and twist motions are parts of the microdisplacement motion as related to the tensor of microstrain which appears in the generalized continua. In ideal elasticity, any rotation motion is reduced to the displacement vector rotation components, while the twist motion is related to the non-diagonal strain components. In our Monograph, both approaches are discussed. In the last years, new types of the very sensitive rotation seismographs and the laser/fiber ring interferometers (ring laser gyroscopes and fiber optic gyros), based on the Sagnac principle, opened new abilities of recording techniques. Real media deviate from the ideal elasticity mainly due to defect content and granular structure; such media will be further called the structured continua. At the same time, some theoretical papers have recently appeared pointing out that the values of the displacement rotation components may be much higher than those predicted by the ideal elastic theory. In both cases, anisotropy shall be also included. However, apart of the rotation of displacements, in the structured media there may also appear true rotation motions, as independent deformation features. These rotation motions are part of the deformation and rotation tensors, which includes rotation, twist and compression/dilatation motions; together with the displacement vector, these motions form a complete deformation pattern. The theory of structured continua enhanced our interest in the microdisplacement motions. The microdisplacement fields are produced by the asymmetric pattern of the faulting and friction motions. The slip friction process causes rotation of adjacent grains and any deviations from symmetry lead to a non-zero net rotation motion. Here, we point out the major feature of earthquakes revealed in faulting along the main fault plane. This is the main asymmetry feature of earthquake processes. We may admit that generation of real rotation and twist motions in a source zone is a real fact. However, there remains an open question whether such fields can propa-

VII

gate far from a source or are quickly attenuated when reaching a more consolidated elastic zone. Probably we should confine our considerations to the near-field effects only. However, we shall again take into account the fact that body and surface seismic waves, when entering a near-surface region, which is characterized by the more complex structure features, may give rise to conjugated microdisplacement motions; hence, rotation and twist waves may again appear due to interaction of the incident seismic waves with the complex features of a near-surface zone. The theories of micropolar and micromorphic media predict some relation between the displacement derivatives and the microdisplacements. Such considerations inspired us to write a comprehension monograph which may open a new insight into seismological observations and studies. We decided that a subject of such a monograph shall be broad, covering many aspects, beginning from the historical observations, through modern sensors detecting different types of seismic motions, to the advanced theories and models giving us a better insight into the complexity pattern of earthquake source processes. Among other things, further studies on soliton solutions for the events generated in a confined source zone may improve the fracture band models, as introduced by some authors participating in the present task. Also, more attention shall be paid to the anisotropy pattern related to the earthquake source zone. At last, we shall turn to questions related to the earthquake engineering problems which may arise even due to small rotation motions; the whole problem started because in many cases some twist deformations have been observed on ground surface. And now we shall also examine whether the true rotation or twist motions, however small, can influence some structures senstive to moment of momentum impact. The book covers, thus, many subjects, enlightened from different points of view, as presented by the individual authors; we tried to collect the individual contributions in such a way as to create a possibly complete coverage of the discussed subjects. At the end of these considerations, it seems suitable to give a very brief outline of the content of the present Monograph. It is divided into the following six parts: Part I. MACROSEISMIC ROTATION EFFECTS AND MICROMOTIONS. We discuss the possible causes of the rotation motions and effects in the Earth’s interior and on its surface; also we recall some descriptions of the rotation-like damages caused by the historical earthquakes. Part II. THEORY OF CONTINUA AND FIELDS OF DEFECTS. We present the asymmetric theory of continuous media with defects and anti-

VIII

symmetric strains and stresses (as equivalent to the stress moments and related conservation law for moment of momentum); the included introduction to the soliton physics has a particular meaning for the fracturing processes. Part III. ROTATION MOTIONS, SEISMIC SOURCE MODELS, AND ASYMMETRY OF FRACTURE. We discuss a rotation counterpart in the fracturing process and the related energy release, we approach the problems of complex fracturing and flow phenomena and we face the problems of analysis of the complex seismic motions; further, we present different approaches to fracturing processes and the associated rotation motions in the seismic active regions. Part IV. EFFECTS RELATED TO MEDIUM STRUCTURES AND COMPLEXITY OF WAVE PROPAGATION. We present some new approaches to the complexity of deformations in the structured and micromorphic media; the non-Riemannian description of deformations is included. Part V. SEISMIC ROTATIONAL MOTIONS: RECORDING TECHNIQUES AND DATA ANALYSIS. Starting with a historical note, we include the descriptions of some modern measuring systems for rotation, twist and tilt motions, we discuss the gained observations and recordings and we give their tentative analysis. Part VI. ROTATIONS AND ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY. We end our Monograph with the problems of the earthquake engineering and strong motions which include the rotation and tilt impacts on high buildings. Acknowledgement. I would like to express my great thankfulness to the editors of the camera-ready PDF form of manuscripts, Mrs Anna Dziembowska, Mrs Maria Wernik and their staff, for their devoted and laborious work.

Roman Teisseyre

IX

Contents PART I MACROSEISMIC ROTATION EFFECTS AND MICROMOTIONS.................................................................................... 1 1 Development of Earthquake Rotational Effect Study Jan T. Kozák ............................................................................................ 3 2 Sources of Rotation and Twist Motions Roman Teisseyre, Jan T. Kozák ............................................................. 11 2.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 11 2.2 Elements of the Basic Theory.................................................... 15 2.3 Recording the Rotation and Twist Motions............................... 18 3 Some Examples of Rotation Effects: the Tulbagh Earthquake, South Africa Gerhard Graham, Andrzej Kijko ........................................................... 25 PART II THEORY OF CONTINUA AND FIELDS OF DEFECTS 29 4 Deviations from Symmetry and Elasticity: Asymmetric Continuum Mechanics Roman Teisseyre, Wojciech BoratyĔski................................................. 31 4.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 31 4.2 Symmetric Stresses: Motion Equations ..................................... 33 4.3 Thermal Deformations............................................................... 34 4.4 The Maxwell and Voigt–Kelvin Bodies: Equivalence Theorems ................................................................................... 35 4.5 Asymmetric Fields..................................................................... 36 5 Degenerated Asymmetric Continuum Theory Roman Teisseyre, Mariusz Biaáecki, Marek Górski............................... 43 5.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 43 5.2 Transition to Symmetric Tensor of Potentials ........................... 49 5.3 Special Case............................................................................... 52 5.4 Conclusions ............................................................................... 53

X

6 Continuum with Rotation Nuclei and Defects: Dislocation and Disclination Densities Wojciech BoratyĔski, Roman Teisseyre................................................. 57 6.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 57 6.2 Defect Density Fields ................................................................ 60 6.3 Dislocation–Stress Relations ..................................................... 63 6.4 Equations of Motion .................................................................. 64 6.5 Discussion.................................................................................. 65 7 Towards a Discrete Theory of Defects Mariusz Biaáecki .................................................................................... 67 7.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 67 7.2 Towards a Discrete Description ................................................ 69 7.3 Discrete Weingarten Theorem................................................... 71 7.4 Prospects.................................................................................... 74 Appendix: Discrete Integration by Parts .......................................... 75 8 Fault Dynamics and Related Radiation Wojciech BoratyĔski, Roman Teisseyre................................................. 77 8.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 77 8.2 Fault and Related Stresses ......................................................... 78 8.3 Evolution Equations for Dislocations and Disclinations ........... 78 8.4 Motion Equations: Fault and Radiation Parts............................ 79 8.5 Discussion.................................................................................. 88 9 A Review on Friction Panayiotis Varotsos, Mary Lazaridou ................................................... 91 9.1 Introduction ............................................................................... 91 9.2 Stick-Slip Friction of a Granular System. Hysteresis and Precursors ........................................................................... 93 9.3 Rock Friction ............................................................................. 97 9.4 Laboratory Experiments at High Rates of Slip. The Energy Budget for Tectonic Faulting................................................... 102 9.5 Modern Views on Friction. Theoretical Studies...................... 104 9.6 Constitutive Friction Law for the Antisymmetric Stresses...... 107 9.7 Open Questions ....................................................................... 108 10 Soliton Physics Eugeniusz Majewski........................................................................... 113 10.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 113 10.2 The Discovery of Solitary Waves.......................................... 115 10.3 The Korteweg–de Vries Equation ......................................... 115

XI

10.4 The Modified Korteweg–de Vries Equation.......................... 117 10.5 The Kadomtsev–Petviashvili Equation.................................. 117 10.6 The Boussinesq Equations..................................................... 118 10.7 The Doubly Dispersive Equations ......................................... 119 10.8 The Nonlinear Schrödinger Equation .................................... 119 10.9 The Nonlinear Klein–Gordon Equation................................. 120 10.10 The Sine-Gordon Equation.................................................. 121 10.11 The Inverse Scattering Transform ....................................... 121 10.12 Rotating Solitons ................................................................. 122 10.13 Discrete Soliton Systems ..................................................... 124 10.14 Conclusions ......................................................................... 126 PART III ROTATION MOTIONS, SEISMIC SOURCE MODELS, AND ASYMMETRY OF FRACTURE .......................... 129 11 Rotational Motions Excited by Earthquakes Minoru Takeo..................................................................................... 131 11.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 131 11.2 Geometrical Theory of Defects ............................................. 132 11.3 Formulation of Rotational and Translational Motions Due to Earthquakes................................................................ 145 11.4 Possibility of Estimating a Rotational Strain Tensor Due to an Earthquake ............................................................ 149 11.5 Conclusions ........................................................................... 154 12 Ground Rotational Motions Recorded in Near-Source Region of Earthquakes Minoru Takeo..................................................................................... 157 12.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 157 12.2 Observational System ............................................................ 158 12.3 Near-Source Ground Rotational Motions.............................. 158 12.4 Discussion.............................................................................. 161 13 Fracture-Band Geometry and Rotation Energy Release Roman Teisseyre, Marek Górski, Krzysztof P. Teisseyre .................. 169 13.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 169 13.2 Earthquake Dislocation Theory ............................................. 169 13.3 Earthquake Thermodynamics and Fracture Band Model ...... 171 13.4 Elastic Rotation Energy ......................................................... 173 13.5 Cross-Band Fracturing Model and Rotation Processes ......... 175 13.6 Conclusions ........................................................................... 182

XII

14 Rotation Motions: Recording and Analysis Krzysztof P. Teisseyre, Jerzy Suchcicki ............................................. 185 14.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 185 14.2 Examples of Records and Their Preliminary Analysis.......... 186 14.3 Discussion.............................................................................. 196 15 Glacier Motion: Seismic Events and Rotation/Tilt Phenomena, Marek Górski, Krzysztof P. Teisseyre................................................ 199 15.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 199 15.2 Icequakes ............................................................................... 199 15.3 Ice Vibrations ........................................................................ 201 15.4 Discussion.............................................................................. 214 16 Rotational Energy and Angular Momentum of Earthquakes Eugeniusz Majewski........................................................................... 217 16.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 217 16.2 Modelling the Rotational Motions Excited in Earthquake Sources as Rolling Motions................................................... 217 16.3 Rolling in the Earthquake Source as Translation and Rotation Combined ......................................................... 218 16.4 The Kinetic Energy of Rolling in the Earthquake Source ..... 219 16.5 Modelling Purely Rotational Motions in the Earthquake Source .................................................................................... 221 16.6 The Torque and Angular Momentum of the Earthquake Source .................................................................................... 222 16.7 Modelling Rotational Motions in the Earthquake Source as a Turbulence of Grains and Blocks Between Moving Tectonic Plates....................................................................... 223 16.8 Conclusions ........................................................................... 225 17 Bend-Rotation Wave as a Mechanism of Macroseismic Effects Vladimir Aksenov............................................................................... 227 17.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 227 17.2 Experimental Data ................................................................. 229 17.3 Field Observations................................................................. 236 17.4 Conclusions ........................................................................... 238 18 Solitary Waves in Crustal Faults and their Application to Earthquakes Victor G. Bykov................................................................................... 241 18.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 241 18.2 Observational Evidence......................................................... 242

XIII

18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7 18.8

Mathematical Model of Deformation Process ....................... 243 Solitary Wave of Fault Activation......................................... 245 Evolution of Waves of Fault Activation................................ 246 Effect of Periodical Change of Friction in the Fault.............. 247 Effect of Periodical Change of External Load....................... 248 Conclusions ........................................................................... 251

19 Seismic Rotation Waves: Spin and Twist Solitons Eugeniusz Majewski........................................................................... 255 19.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 255 19.2 Modelling the Rotational Motions Excited in Earthquake Sources .................................................................................. 256 19.3 Seismic Rotation Waves: PR and SR Waves......................... 257 19.4 The Slow Tectonic Rotation Waves ...................................... 258 19.5 Hamilton’s Principle.............................................................. 259 19.6 A Rock Medium Modelled as a Nonlinear Micropolar Elastic Continuum ................................................................. 259 19.7 The Nonlinear Field Equations.............................................. 261 19.8 The Linear Seismic Rotation Waves ..................................... 261 19.9 The Nonlinear Seismic Rotation Waves................................ 263 19.10 Dispersion Curves and Rotation Solitons ............................ 266 19.11 The Seismic Rotation Solitons in the Degenerated Continuum ........................................................................... 267 19.12 Conclusions ......................................................................... 270 20 Earth Rotation, Elasticity and Geodynamics: Earthquake Wave Rotary Model Alexander V. Vikulin ......................................................................... 273 20.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 273 20.2 Hypothesis ............................................................................. 274 20.3 Stress Field Related to Rotation of Hard Bodies ................... 275 20.4 Interaction Between Seismofocal Blocks .............................. 279 20.5 Chain of Blocks: Application to Pacific Margin Seismic Belt ........................................................................................ 280 20.6 Friction and Irregularities of Block Rotation: Rotation Mechanics of Earthquake Foci .............................................. 282 20.7 Some Consequences .............................................................. 284 20.8 Conclusions ........................................................................... 286

XIV

PART IV EFFECTS RELATED TO MEDIUM STRUCTURES AND COMPLEXITY OF WAVE PROPAGATION ......................... 291 21 Seismic Rotation Waves in the Continuum with Nonlinear Microstructure Eugeniusz Majewski............................................................................ 293 21.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 293 21.2 Additivity of Elastic and Self-Parts of Stresses, Microstresses, and Interaction Microforces........................... 294 21.3 The Macroscopic and Microscopic Balance Equations......... 294 21.4 The Nonlinear Microstructure ............................................... 298 21.5 Conclusions ........................................................................... 299 22 Tectonic Solitons Propagating Along the Fault Eugeniusz Majewski........................................................................... 301 22.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 301 22.2 Seismic Waves in the Continuum with Dislocations............. 301 22.3 Seismic P waves .................................................................... 304 22.4 Splitting the Elastic Distortion Soliton Equation into Seismic and Fault-Related Soliton Equations........................ 305 22.5 Seismic S Waves ................................................................... 306 22.6 Conclusions ........................................................................... 308 23 Complexity of Rotation Soliton Propagation Eugeniusz Majewski........................................................................... 311 23.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 311 23.2 Preliminary Assumptions ...................................................... 311 23.3 Seismic Rotation Solitons...................................................... 312 23.4 Conclusions ........................................................................... 314 24 Micromorphic Continuum with Defects and Taylor–Bishop–Hill Theory for Polycrystals: Anisotropic Propagation of Seismic Waves and the Golebiewska Gauge Jun Muto, Yusuke Kawada, Hiroyuki Nagahama.............................. 317 24.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 317 24.2 Micromorphic Continuum with Defects................................ 318 24.3 Taylor–Bishop–Hill Model.................................................... 320 24.4 Quartz c-axis Preferred Orientation in Quartz Schist ............ 321 24.5 Seismic Anisotropy due to LPO in Deformed Rocks............ 323 24.6 Discussion.............................................................................. 324 24.7 Conclusion............................................................................. 326

XV

25 Seismic Ray Theory for Structural Medium based on Kawaguchi and Finsler Geometry Takahiro Yajima, Hiroyuki Nagahama ............................................ 329 25.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 329 25.2 Finsler Geometry and Seismic Ray ....................................... 330 25.3 Seismic Finsler Metric and Kawaguchi Space ...................... 331 25.4 Discussion.............................................................................. 333 26 From Non-Local to Asymmetric Deformation Field Hiroyuki Nagahama, Roman Teisseyre ............................................. 337 26.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 337 26.2 High-Order Spaces and Non-Locality of Deformation.......... 338 26.3 An Interaction Field Between Microscopic and Macroscopic Deformation Fields ................................................................ 339 26.4 Asymmetry and Anholonomity of Deformation.................... 341 26.5 Discussion.............................................................................. 342 27 Earthquake Hazard in the Valley of Mexico: Entropy, Structure, Complexity Cinna Lomnitz, Heriberta Castaños .................................................. 347 27.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 347 27.2 Seismology: a Science in Trouble?........................................ 348 27.3 Disasters in General, and Mexico City in Particular ............. 349 27.4 A Higher Level of Description .............................................. 351 27.5 Nonlinearity and Non-Equilibrium Thermodynamics........... 354 27.6 A Theory of Disasters as Unexpected Events........................ 358 27.7 Disasters and Society............................................................. 361 PART V SEISMIC ROTATIONAL MOTIONS: RECORDING TECHNIQUES AND DATA ANALYSIS........................................... 365 28 Note on the Historical Rotation Seismographs Graziano Ferrari ............................................................................... 367 28.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 367 28.2 Electrical Seismograph with Sliding Smoked Paper ............. 371 28.3 Electrical Seismograph with Sliding Smoked Paper – Second Model ..................................................................... 374 29 Ring Laser Gyroscopes as Rotation Sensors for Seismic Wave Studies K. Ulrich Schreiber, Geoffrey E. Stedman, Heiner Igel, Asher Flaws 377 29.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 377

XVI

29.2 Properties of Ring Lasers ...................................................... 379 29.3 Detection of Seismic Signals................................................. 385 29.4 GEOsensor............................................................................. 387 30 Rotational Motions in Seismology: Theory, Observation, Simulation Alain Cochard, H. Igel, B. Schuberth, W. Suryanto, A. Velikoseltsev, U. Schreiber, J. Wassermann, F. Scherbaum, D. Vollmer ................. 391 30.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 391 30.2 Fundamental Theory.............................................................. 394 30.3 Rotational Measurements ...................................................... 399 30.4 Observations and Simulations of Rotational Motions ........... 401 30.5 Discussion and Conclusions .................................................. 407 31 Absolute Rotation Measurement Based on the Sagnac Effect Leszek R. Jaroszewicz, Zbigniew Krajewski, Lech Solarz ................. 413 31.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 413 31.2 Sagnac Effect......................................................................... 413 31.3 Optical Gyroscopes as Systems Utilizing the Sagnac Effect. 416 31.4 Fundamental Measurement Limits ........................................ 419 31.5 Fiber-Optic Rotational Seismometer (FORS) ....................... 420 31.6 Investigation of the SRE Propagation Velocity..................... 433 31.7 Conclusions ........................................................................... 435 32 Design of Rotation Seismometer and Non-Linear Behaviour of Rotation Components of Earthquakes Takeo Moriya, Roman Teisseyre ........................................................ 439 32.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 439 32.2 Design of the Rotation Seismometer ..................................... 440 32.3 Absolute Rotation Component Amplitudes for Earthquakes Observed at Sites of Different Surface Geological Conditions.............................................................................. 444 32.4 Results and Future Scope ...................................................... 449 33 Rotation and Twist Motion Recording – Couple Pendulum and Rigid Seismometers System Jan Wiszniowski................................................................................. 451 33.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 451 33.2 Behaviour of a Pendulum Seismometer During Measurement of Rotations – Static Approach ....................... 452 33.3 Measurement of Rotations by a Pair of Seismometers – Influence of Seismic Waves on Signal ............................... 454

XVII

33.4 Influence of Small Differences in Channel Responses on Rotation Measurement – Dynamic Approach .................. 460 33.5 The Pendulum Seismometer for Measurement of Rotations Alone ..................................................................................... 465 33.6 Conclusions ........................................................................... 469 34 Equation of Pendulum Motion Including Rotations and its Implications to the Strong-Ground Motion Vladimir M. Graizer .......................................................................... 471 34.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 471 34.2 Theory of the Pendulum ........................................................ 473 34.3 Residual Displacements and what can be Done in Absence of Recorded Rotations (Tilts) ................................................ 476 34.4 Numerical Tests of the Effects of Tilt on Computations of Displacement...................................................................... 479 34.5 Conclusions ........................................................................... 482 35 Strong Motion Rotation Sensor JiĜí Buben, Vladimír Rudajev ............................................................ 487 35.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 487 35.2 Experimental Setup................................................................ 487 35.3 Experimental Records........................................................... 489 35.4 Conclusions ........................................................................... 491 36 High-Resolution Wide-Range Tiltmeter: Observations of Earth Free Oscillations Excited by the 26 December 2004 Sumatra -Andaman Earthquake Marek Kaczorowski ........................................................................... 493 36.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 493 36.2 Natural Conditions in the Low Silesian Geophysical Observatory ........................................................................... 494 36.3 Principle of Operation of the Long Water-Tube Tiltmeter.... 495 36.4 The Hydrodynamic System of the Long Water-Tube Tiltmeter ................................................................................ 498 36.5 The Optic Module of Interference Gauge of the Water Level Variations Measurements ...................................................... 498 36.6 Determination of the Function of Plumb Line Variations ..... 504 36.7 Determination of tidal wave coefficients on the basis of the long water-tube measurements .................................... 512 36.8 Observations of anomalous plumb line variations associated with Earth free oscillations on 26 December 2004................ 513 36.9 Conclusions ........................................................................... 516

XVIII

37 Fiber Optic Sensors for Seismic Monitoring William B. Spillman Jr., Dryver R. Huston, Junru Wu ...................... 521 37.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 521 37.2 Seismic Monitoring ............................................................... 521 37.3 Sensor/Ground Coupling ....................................................... 523 37.4 Fiber Optic Sensing ............................................................... 523 37.5 Matched Filtering/Antenna Gain ........................................... 531 37.6 Physical Simulation Results Using STM............................... 538 37.7 Discussion and Summary ...................................................... 542 PART VI ROTATIONS AND ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY .. 547 38 Deriving Seismic Surface Rotations for Engineering Purposes Zbigniew Zembaty.............................................................................. 549 38.1 Introduction and Formulation of the Problem ....................... 549 38.2 Spectral Decomposition of Translational Components of Seismic Ground Motion .................................................... 552 38.3 Rocking from Body Waves Decomposition .......................... 553 38.4 Rocking from Surface Waves................................................ 559 38.5 Rocking from Spatial Field of Ground Motion ..................... 560 38.6 Code Proposals and Approximate Formulae ......................... 563 38.7 Application Example: A Slender Tower Under HorizontalRocking Excitations............................................................... 564 38.8 Summary and Conclusions .................................................... 566 39 Effects of Torsional and Rocking Excitations on the Response of Structures Mihailo D. Trifunac ............................................................................ 569 39.1 Introduction ........................................................................... 569 39.2 Rotational Strong Ground Motion......................................... 571 39.3 Recording Rotational Strong Motion .................................... 572 39.4 Generation of Synthetic Rotational Motions ......................... 573 39.5 Response of Structures .......................................................... 576

XIX

Contributors Vladimir AKSENOV Institute of Physics of the Earth, Russian Academy of Sciences Bolshaya Gruzinskaya str., 10, Moscow, Russia. Mariusz BIAàECKI Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland. Wojciech BORATYēSKI Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland and Faculty of Mathematics and Information Science, Warsaw University of Technology Plac Politechniki 1, 00-661 Warszawa, Poland. JiĜi BUBEN Institute of Rock Structure and Mechanics Academy of Sciences of the Czech Republic V Holešoviþkách 41, 182 09 Praha 8, Czech Republic. Victor G. BYKOV Institute of Tectonics and Geophysics Far East Branch of the Russian Academy of Sciences 65 Kim-Yu-Chen St., 680 000 Khabarovsk, Russia. Heriberta CASTAÑOS National University of Mexico UNAM, 04510 Mexico, DF, Mexico. Alain COCHARD Department of Earth and Environmental Sciences Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität Theresienstr. 41, 80333 München, Germany. Asher FLAWS Department für Geo- und Umweltwissenschaften, Sektion Geophysik

XX

Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München Theresienstr. 41, 80333 München, Germany. Graziano FERRARI SGA Storia Geofisica Ambiente Via del Battiferro 10b 40129 Bologna, Italy. Marek GÓRSKI Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland. Gerhard GRAHAM Council for Geoscience Pretoria 0001, South Africa. Vladimir M. GRAIZER California Geological Survey 801 K Street, MS 12-32, Sacramento, CA, USA. Dryver R. HUSTON Mechanical Engineering, University of Vermont Burlington, VT, USA. Heiner IGEL Department für Geo- und Umweltwissenschaften, Sektion Geophysik Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität München Theresienstr. 41, 80333 München, Germany. Leszek R. JAROSZEWICZ Institute of Applied Physics, Military University of Technology ul. Kaliskiego 2, 00-908 Warszawa, Poland. Marek KACZOROWSKI Space Research Centre, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. Bartycka 18A, 00-716 Warszawa, Poland. Yusuke KAWADA Department of Geoenvironmental Sciences Graduate School of Sciences, Tohoku University Aoba-ku, Sendai 980-8578, Japan. Andrzej KIJKO Council for Geoscience Pretoria 0001, South Africa.

XXI

Jan T. KOZÁK Geophysical Institute, Academy of Sciences of the Czech Republic 14131 Prague 4 – Sporilov, Boþni, Czech Republic. Zbigniew KRAJEWSKI Institute of Applied Physics, Military University of Technology ul. Kaliskiego 2, 00-908 Warszawa, Poland. Mary LAZARIDOU Solid Earth Physics Institute, Department of Physics, University of Athens Panepistimiopolis, Zografos 157 84, Athens, Greece. Cinna LOMNITZ National University of Mexico, UNAM 04510 Mexico, DF, Mexico. Eugeniusz MAJEWSKI Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland. Takeo MORIYA Graduates School of Science, Hokkaido University. Jun MUTO Department of Geoenvironmental Sciences Graduate School of Sciences, Tohoku University Aoba-ku, Sendai 980-8578, Japan. Hiroyuki NAGAHAMA Department of Geoenvironmental Sciences Graduate School of Sciences, Tohoku University Aoba-ku, Sendai 980-8578, Japan. Vladimir RUDAJEV Institute of Rock Structure and Mechanics Academy of Sciences of the Czech Republic V Holešoviþkách 41, 182 09 Praha 8, Czech Republic. F. SCHERBAUM Institut für Geowissenschaften, Universität Potsdam Karl-Liebknecht-Str. 24/25, 14476 Golm, Germany. K. Ulrich SCHREIBER Forschungseinrichtung Satellitengeodäsie der TU- München Arcisstr. 21, 80333 München, Germany.

XXII

B. SCHUBERTH Department of Earth and Environmental Sciences Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität Theresienstr. 41, 80333 München, Germany. Lech SOLARZ Institute of Applied Physics, Military University of Technology ul. Kaliskiego 2, 00-908 Warszawa, Poland. William B. SPILLMAN Jr. Physics Department, University of Vermont Burlington, VT, USA. Geoffrey E. STEDMAN Department of Physics and Astronomy, University of Canterbury Private Bag 4800, New Zealand. Jerzy SUCHCICKI Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland. W. SURYANTO Department of Earth and Environmental Sciences Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität Theresienstr. 41, 80333 München, Germany. Minoru TAKEO Earthquake Research Institute, University of Tokyo Zip. 113-0032 1-1-1, Yayoi, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo, Japan. Krzysztof P. TEISSEYRE Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland. Roman TEISSEYRE Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland. Mihailo D. TRIFUNAC Department of Civil Engineering, University of Southern California Los Angeles, CA 90089-2531, USA.

XXIII

Panayiotis VAROTSOS Solid Earth Physics Institute, Department of Physics, University of Athens Panepistimiopolis, Zografos 157 84, Athens, Greece. A. VELIKOSELTSEV Forschungseinrichtung Satellitengeodäsie Technical University of Munich, Fundamentalstation Wettzell Sackenriederstr. 25, D-93444 Kötzting, Germany. Alexander V. VIKULIN Institute of Volcanology and Seismology Far East Department of Russian Academy of Sciences Piip Ave. 9, Petropavlovsk-Kamchatsky, 683006, Russia. D. VOLLMER Institut für Geowissenschaften, Universität Potsdam Karl-Liebknecht-Str. 24/25, 14476 Golm, Germany. J. WASSERMANN Department of Earth and Environmental Sciences Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität Theresienstr. 41, 80333 München, Germany. Jan WISZNIOWSKI Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland. Junru WU Physics Department, University of Vermont Burlington, VT, USA. Takahiro YAJIMA Department of Geoenvironmental Sciences, Graduate School of Science Tohoku University, Aoba-ku, Sendai 980-8578, Japan. Zbigniew ZEMBATY Faculty of Civil Engineering, Technical University of Opole ul. Mikoáajczyka 5, 45-233 Opole, Poland.

PART I MACROSEISMIC ROTATION EFFECTS AND MICROMOTIONS

1 Development of Earthquake Rotational Effect Study Jan T. Kozák Geophysical Institute, Academy of Sciences of the Czech Republic 14131 Prague 4 – Sporilov, Boþni, Czech Republic e-mail: [email protected]

Rotational earthquake effects were observed and mentioned by numerous geo-savants in the course of the 19th century. However, it has been often believed that scientific fundaments of this phenomenon were not laid until the end of this century. Indeed, in the latter period many specialized monographs, books and textbooks on geology appeared, in which examples of rotational earthquake displacements were shown, discussed and more or less correctly explained. However, a closer look into this field reveals that the fundaments of advanced seismological and seismic observations of various earthquake effects, among them rotational ones, had been established much earlier, already in the first half of the 19th century. It was, e.g. Leopold von Buch (1774-1853) who conducted comprehensive observations on the 1799 Silesian earthquake with the aim to determine the shape and size of the earthquake epicenter zone on the base of civic reports. The pioneer results by von Buch were published in a local journal with limited regional and scientific impact and therefore they soon sunk below the common horizon (Buch 1801 and 1867-1885). Substantial progress in macroseismic observations, analysis and results’ interpretation was reached by (today practically unknown) German mathematician P.N.C. Egen (1793-1844) who made and published an excellent macroseismic analysis of the 1828 North-Rhine earthquake. He, according Günther (1901), is the author of the first “actual macroseismic” map of an earthquake (see Egen 1828). Further progress in the field was reached by G.H.O. Volger (1822-1897) who presented a thorough and voluminous study on the 1855 Visp, Switzerland, earthquake complemented by an excellent and advanced macroseismic isoseismal map of the event (Volger 1856 and 1857-1858).

4

J.T. Kozák

In the mid-nineteenth century, the largest move forward in the observation, analysis and explanation of seismic effects – including the rotational ones – must be ascribed to Robert Mallet (1810-1881), author of the famous analytical work on the 1857 Great Neapolitan Earthquake entitled “The First Principles of Observational Seismology” (Mallet 1862). Let us pay a closer attention to his concept. Modern theoretical and observational seismologists – armed with the last tools of modern theoretical approaches such as nonlinear physics, theory of micromorphic medium, etc. – know that there are more mechanisms or models to explain the observed rotational earthquake effects (see, e.g. Teisseyre and Kozák 2003). Mallet, however, who derived and published his explanation of rotational effects some 150 years earlier, had at his disposal only simple relations of classical mechanics and had to work with the subjects such as, for instance, earthquake shock (= seismic wave impact), emergence angle (= azimuth and vertical angles of seismic wave arrival), rotated body mass, gravity, centre of gravity, friction or adherence, centre of adherence, main wave (= P wave), subordinate or second semiphase wave (= such as S wave, surface waves, etc., and also reflected wave phases). Nevertheless, even with these simple tools Mallet succeeded to formulate two fundamental mechanisms of the rotational seismic effects; let us denote them Rot1 and Rot2. Let us cite the author for the first of them: Where the body is projected from a base or support with which it has friction or adherence, and the line of the wave transit through its centre of gravity does not also pass through the centre of adherence (that is, the point of the base, and between it and supports, in which all the resting forces, or adherence, etc., may be supposed concentrated), then, besides projection, a movement round a centre of spontaneous rotation within the body will also be impressed (cit. Mallet 1862). In such a way the author described a fundamental rotational mechanism, Rot1, of the body subjected to seismic impact turning around the “centre of adherence” (conf. Teisseyre and Kozák 2003). As concerns rotation of a body in vertical plane, Mallet proposed another mechanism, which consisted in mutual configuration of horizontal component of seismic wave impact and gravity in special situations (see Mallet 1862, fasc edn 1987, vol 1., p 45). In page 78 of the same work Mallet writes: .....twisting of objects upon their bases such as vases, chimneys, obelisks, etc., of which we shall record many examples.....[were] first explained by myself several years since (Mallet 1848). As for the second fundamental mechanism of seismic rotational effects, Rot2, Mallet suggested its explanation by means of “subordinate waves”

1

Development of Earthquake Rotational Effect Study

5

consequently emerging under different emergence angles (in comparison with the direct wave) eventually rotating the inflicted body. By subordinate waves a modern reader would substitute wave phases reflected on inner Earth’s boundaries. Let us give a room to the author (cit.): If the observer look due to south at a square pyramid, for example, whose sides stay cardinal and it be tilted by the first semiphase of a shock from east to west, the pyramid will tilt or rise upon the eastern edge of its base; and if, before it has had time to fall back, it be acted on by another shock from north to south, the pyramid will rotate, upon the bisection or some other point, of the edge on which it momentarily rested, and will hence to come to repose, after having twisted from left to right, or with the hands of a watch (cit. from Mallet 1862, fasc edn 1987, vol 1, p 376-77). In principle the second Mallet’s mechanism, Rot2, is identical with the one denoted as (b) in the paper by Teisseyre and Kozák (2003). It should be noted that Mallet, far before the type analysis of individual phases of seismic waves was done and accepted, and with a little knowledge on reflecting and refracting boundaries inside the earth, still succeeded to assess the importance of the subordinate or second semiphase waves for proper explanation of the observed rotational effects of Rot2 type. In the decades which followed the publication of Mallet’s analysis, rotational effects in question gradually appeared in numerous European monographs, geo-encyclopedias and textbooks on geology and geography as a fashion element: more or less detailed explanation of this phenomenon was entirely founded on the concept by Mallet. In most of these writings, individual authors often copied each other in presenting the same examples of rotational effects and even the same illustrations. One of widely presented manifestations of rotational effects – splitting of stone blocks of the obelisks at the St. Bruno monastery (Italy) and their mutual rotation – can be found, e.g., in Charles Lyell’s “Lehrbuch der Geologie”. However, Lyell (1833) used this displacement to demonstrate exclusively the obelisks structure disintegration (splitting), not the effects of stone blocks rotation. Disintegrated blocks of the obelisk at the San Bruno monastery were also commented by Alexander von Humboldt. In his “Kosmos”, Humboldt argued against the proposals by Mallet (cit.): Apparent circular (rotatorische) quakes such as these, .....Mallet tried to convert into linear displacement (see Mallet 1848 and Humboldt 1845-1862). In the 1870s and 1880s, rotational effects were frequently reported in the papers on individual earthquakes of the time. In his report on the 1872 Central-German earthquake, Karl von Seebach described interaction of seismic waves with two pyramids composed of rectangular wooden blocks of small dimensions located on the writing desk in a building of small fac-

6

J.T. Kozák

tory in Chomutov town (on Czech/Saxony border, ca 2o from the epicenter): After passage of seismic waves, the individual wooden blocks were found to be mutually rotated, see Fig. 1.1. However, the author did not analyze in greater detail the technical parameters of the situation, such as path of seismic waves through the factory edifice towards to the writing desk, friction conditions of the block surfaces, etc. (Seebach 1873, and Gutdeutsch et al. 1992).

Fig. 1.1 Rotation of the two small pyramids of wooden blocks after the 1872 Central German earthquake (Seebach, 1873)

An experienced Austrian geologist Franz Suess observed and discussed rotational effects when analyzing the 1895 Laibach (Ljubljana) earthquake in Slovenia. He wrote (cit.): Similarly as for all large earthquakes, also during the Ljubljana quake shifting of block/plate fundaments of columns and tombstones was observed. It is surprising how many different explanations and interpretations of these movements were proposed. Except of Humboldt’s [model of] rotational earthquakes (rotatorischen Erdbeben), also a displacement of a torsion type was suggested, resulting from contemporary effects [interference] of direct and reflected waves, or from an elliptic displacement of the Earth particles due to possible interference of secondary transversal waves with the tremors of other type. Seismology has not proceeded enough to allow to decide to which of the above expla-

1


7

nations the truth should be ascribed. However, I myself do not believe that the discussed displacement should be initiated by a single pulse [Stoss]. More probably, the rotational effects should result from two shocks, following one-shortly-after-the-other, coming from different directions (Suess 1896, p. 485). Siegmund Günther in his “Handbuch der Geophysik” writes about undulatory or rotational character of seismic waves and illustrates it by a classical example – splitting and rotation of the obelisks at the St. Bruno monastery. Günther’s interpretation is conform to the one by Mallet (Günther 1897). Famous obelisk at the St. Bruno monastery was mentioned and its displacements explained also by M. Neumayr in his “Erdgeschichte”. The author presents this example together with the other evident rotational earthquake displacements of the time. In this context he writes about earthquake vibration behaviour without more detailed explanation (Neumayr 1897). In Russia, Ivan S. Mushketov, an eminent Russian seismologist of the turn of the 19th century discussed the rotational effects of earthquakes in his voluminous textbook “Fizicheskaya geologia” (“Physical Geology”). He presented classical examples (such as San Bruno obelisks) together with other examples of this phenomenon observed during recent European and Russian events: author’s explanation is also based upon the analysis by Mallet, see Mushketov (1899). After 1900 – since the type analysis of seismic waves and fundamental principles of their propagation were still not satisfactorily defined and accepted – also common explanation of earthquake rotational effects has not overcome the limits given by simple mechanical approach presented by Mallet. In the series of fundamental books prepared on the new discipline in geo-research, i.e., on seismology, still the old examples of rotational effects (observed during the 1783 Calabria, 1873 Belluno, 1878 West-German, 1895 Ljubljana, 1896 Guatemala, Schönai, Japan, and other famous earthquakes) were presented to illustrate this phenomenon. Out of a long series of publications let us cite at least Sieberg (1904), Jeništa (1906-1907), Lawson et al. (1908), PurkynČ (1908), Kafka (1909), Supan (1911). It is worth to note that the observational seismology in this single point appeared a bit behind rapid seismic instrumental progress at that time (e.g. Plešinger and Kozák 2003). Rotational secondary effects (as seismologists in later decades of the 20th century often named rotational effects) were regarded as marginal phenomena accompanying main seismogenic displacements in numerous works of this period (see, e.g. Janda 1940, and – as a historical reminiscence – Musson 1991 who discussed the early report by Milne 1842).

8

J.T. Kozák

As concerns both classical mechanical rotation models, Rot1 and Rot2, called sometimes also technical or false models, they remained to serve for physical explanation of rotational phenomena throughout most of the 20th century. One of the reasons of decreasing interest of seismologists in rotational effects in this period lay in common opinion that they have little to do with the modern theory of seismic wave propagation, being more-orless derived from technical conditions, such as friction, wave interference, etc. Another mechanism – let us name it Rot3 – relates directly to rotation of displacement field both in an inner source near-zone and in the layers beneath a recording station. The effects related to such a mechanism can much differ in the amplitudes and nature depending on source mechanism and medium structure properties. In the last decades of the 20th century – taking advantage of the advanced continuum mechanics and ray theory and other theoretical achievements on the seismic wave origin and source mechanisms – new models related to this mechanism have been proposed. Many of them are founded on mutual interference of individual wave phases – not yet mutually separated – in the inner seismic source zone. In this situation, the surface Love waves and their horizontal component may, under special conditions, prescribing the properties of the surface zone, contribute to rotational effects in the near-source zone (see, e.g. Takeo and Ito 1997). Mechanism of the Rot3 type will be discussed in detail in several chapters of this monograph. All three mechanisms, Rot1, Rot2 and Rot3, are derived from mechanical principles of elastic (seismic) wave propagation. Another mechanism (let us denote it Rot4), on the other hand, is linked with the real rotational deformations and the properties of the medium through which the seismic wave propagates. Modern theory of such a medium, usually called as a micromorphic medium, was investigated theoretically and also under laboratory conditions, first of all by Polish and Japanese seismologists. It will be demonstrated in other chapters that the advanced theory of micromorphic medium enables to detect rotational component of seismic waves due to wave interaction with the propagation medium treated by the terms of micromorphic description (Moriya and Teisseyre 1999, and Teisseyre et al. 2003). Mechanism Rot5, recently proposed by Teisseyre (2004), relates to rotation and twist motions; this mechanism is based on additional constitutional bonds between the antisymmetric part of stresses and density of the self-rotation nuclei as being related to an internal friction in a homogenous elastic medium. The antisymmetric stresses correspond to stress moments. The models Rot3 – Rot5 are derived within the terms of linear physics and elastic wave propagation in an elastic or quasi-elastic medium.

1


9

Laboratory and observational research in the last two decades in the field of non-linear medium and non-linear physics based on propagation of nonlinear deformational wave, which was performed in cooperation of Russian and Czech seismologists, seems to reveal the existence of a next mechanism, model Rot6, as related to the coherent (self-organized) translation fracture wave. Its physical principles are given in a separate chapter (see Aksenov et al. 1993, and Aksenov 2006). In our retrospection we can state that after a brilliant analysis of simple mechanics of seismic rotational effects presented by Robert Mallet as early as in 1850s, seismologists had to wait much over hundred years for more sophisticated, more “physical” and more complex explanation of the phenomenon in question, as the relatively recent mechanisms Rot3, Rot 4, Rot5 and especially Rot6 demonstrate. Do these recent models mean the last word in our understanding of the physics of seismic rotational effects?

References Aksenov V (2006) Rotation wave as rupture mechanism, transfer of rock mass and generation of long period vibrations in fault zone. In: Teisseyre R, Takeo M, Majewski E (eds) Earthquake source asymmetry, structural media and rotation effects. Springer, Berlin (this book) Aksenov V, Kozák J, Lokajíþek T (1993) Nonlinear processes in earthquake foci. Pure and Appl Geophys 140: 29-47 Buch L von (1801) Nachrichten über das Erdbeben in Schlesien 1799. Der Gesellschaft Natur-forschender Freunde zu Berlin, Neuere Schriften, vol III, pp 271 Buch L von (1867-85) Gesammelte Schriften, 4 vols. Publ J Ewald, J Roth und H Eck, Berlin Egen PNC (1828) Über das Erdbeben in der Rhein- und Niederlanden vom 23. Februar 1828 (Poggendorffs) Annalen der Physik und Chemie 13, Band 89, pp 153 Gutdeutsch R, Grünthal G, Musson RMW (eds) (1992) Historical earthquakes in Central Europe, vol 1. Abh Geol Bundesanst in Wien Günther S (1897) Handbuch der Geophysik, 2 Bnd. Verlag von Ferdinand Enke, Stuttgart Günther S (1901) Die ersten Anfänge seismisch-kartograpischer Darstellung. Die Erdbebenwarte, Jahrg I, No 3, Laibach Humboldt A von (1845-62) Kosmos. Entwurf einer physikalischen Weltbeschreibung, 5 vols. J.G. Cotta, Stuttgart und Tübingen, vol 1, p 212 Janda J (ed) (1940) Large illustrated textbook of natural history, vol VII: Geology (in Czech), Prague Jeništa J (1906-1907) On seismometers (in Czech). vol III: 1, 10-11 Kafka J. (1909) Earthquake (in Czech). F Šimáþek, Prague

10 J.T. Kozák Lawson et al. (1908) The California earthquake of April 18, 1906. Report of the state earthquake investigation commission, 2 vols and Atlas. Carnegie Institution of Washington, Washington D.C. Lyell Ch (1833) Lehrbuch der Geologie (transl. from English by K Hartmann), Quedlingburg und Leipzig Mallet R (1848) [no title]. Trans Roy Irish Acad, vol XXI, p 1 Mallet R (1849-50) On worticose shocks and cases of twisting. Meeting Brit Assoc pp 33 and 49. In: Admirality Manual p 213 Mallet R (1862) Great Neapolitan earthquake of 1857. The first principles of observational seismology, vols I-II. Chapman and Hall, London (fasc edn, SGA, Italy 1987) Milne D (1842) Notices of earthquake-shocks felt in Great Britain and especially in Scotland, with interferences suggested by these notices as to the cause of such shocks. Edinburgh New Phil Journ 32: 106-127 Moriya T, Teisseyre R (1999) Discussion on the recording of seismic rotation waves, Acta Geophys Pol 47: 4, 351-362 Mushketov IV (1899) Physical Geology (in Russian). IN Ehrlich, St Petersburg Musson RMW (1991) Pictorial representations of damage in historical British earthquakes. In: Kozák J (ed) Proc. historical earthquakes in Europe, Prague 1989. Geoph Inst Czech Acad Sci, Prague, pp 161-174 Neumayr M (1897) Erdgeschichte, Leipzig und Wien Plešinger A, Kozák J (2003) Beginnings of regular seismic service and research in the Austro-Hungarian Monarchy, Part II. Studia Geoph et Geod. 47: 757-791 PurkynČ C (1908) Earthquake in Czech. In: Otto J (ed) Common Dictionary, 27 vols. Prague, vol XXVII: 565-571 Seebach K von (1873) Das mitteldeutsche Erdbeben vom 6. Marz 1872. H Haessel, Leipzig Sieberg A (1904) Handbuch der Erdbebenkunde. F Vieweg u Sohn, Braunschweig Suess F (1896) Das Erdbeben von Laibach am 14. April 1895. In: Jahrbuch der kaiserlichköniglichen Geologischen Reichsanstalt, 46: 411-890, Wien Supan A (1911) Grundzüge der Physischen Erdkunde. Veit and Comp, Leipzig Takeo M, Ito HM (1997) What can be learned from rotational motions excited by earthquakes? Geophys J Int 129: 319-329 Teisseyre R (2004) Spin and twist motions in a homogeneous elastic continuum and cross-band geometry of fracturing. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 173-184 Teisseyre R, Kozák J (2003) Considerations on the seismic rotation effects. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 243-256 Teisseyre R, Suchcicki J, Teisseyre KP (2003) Recording the seismic rotation waves: reliability analysis. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 37-50 Volger GHO (1856) Untersuchungen über das jüngste grosse Erdbeben in CentralEuropa. Petermann’s Mittheilungen. Justus Perthes, Gotha, année 1856: pp 85-102 Volger GHO (1857-1858) Untersuchungen über das Phänomen der Erdbeben in der Schweiz, Trois partes. Justus Perthes, Gotha

2 Sources of Rotation and Twist Motions Roman Teisseyre1, Jan T. Kozák2 1

Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland; e-mail: [email protected]

2

Geophysical Institute, Academy of Sciences of the Czech Republic 14131 Prague 4 – Sporilov, Boþni, Czech Republic e-mail: [email protected]

2.1 Introduction In Chapter 1, some data have been presented on the observed surface rotation effects and related damage caused by strong earthquakes; the rotation effects associated with earthquakes have been described and discussed already in the first theoretical attempts to analyse the seismic wave propagation (see Mallet 1862, Hobbs 1907, Gutenberg 1926, Davison 1927). Mallet (1862) explained the rotation effects as being due to the incidence of a sequence of seismic phases consecutively emerging under different emergence angles and rotating the inflicted body. Imamura (1937) proposed to explain the rotation effects by an impact of body waves at the ground surface on objects having different inertia axes; to this explanation, we can add the effects related to possible different adjustments of various parts of the object to its basement or even different friction properties between them. We can take into account the four main categories of causes leading to the observed/recorded rotation effects: x Generation of rotation motions in an earthquake source, e.g., due to internal friction processes at the microfracturing and at the macrofault where the nonlinear effects are evidently present; this concerns, in particular, the formation of a coherent fracture translation wave (self -organization) preceding the slip displacement. x Generation of coupled rotation waves in an underground space beneath the recording station; in a medium with grains or with any kind of

12 R. Teisseyre, J.T. Kozák

internal structure, as for example that described by the micromorphic or micropolar theories, there may appear the rotation waves coupled to the seismic body waves. x Effect of counterpart of rotation of the displacement velocities, both in the linear and nonlinear ranges. x Appearance of the apparent rotation effects caused by a sequence of seismic body or surface waves and the resulting impacts on the objects situated on ground surface (we can call this category a false rotation). The slip and fracture processes in a seismic source may cause the rotation of grains adjacent to the internal slip planes (Fig. 2.1a). A fracture process is entirely asymmetric, both in the micro- and macroscales. The main fracture may be accompanied by auxiliary perpendicular fracturings frequently appearing later as aftershocks (Fig. 2.1b). Twiss and Gefel (1990) have considered the brittle fault zones composed of rigid grains; the progressive processes in such zones may lead to macrorotations becoming the sources of microspin motions. In the further paper (Twiss et al. 1993), the authors estimated the effect of block rotation in a source on the seismic moment tensor. The instantaneous process remains asymmetric and can be treated as a source of rotations, which may contain both a proper rotation and a twist motion. The twist motion, similar to shear deformation, represents different rotation shifts for perpendicular directions. At fracturing, the rotations adjacent to the perpendicular microfaults have opposite orientations; hence, when a length of microfault along one direction is greater than that

Fig. 2.1 Slip faults and rotation of adjacent grains – scheme of source pattern: (a) symmetric case, (b) asymmetric case

2 Sources of Rotation and Twist Motions

13

along the other direction, there appears rotation (Fig. 2.2). The rotations are related to internal friction processes. A microstructure and defect content in a medium (Teisseyre 1973) can be another source of rotations. There are numerous papers on this subject; here, we shall point out the works by Takeo and Ito (1997), and by Teisseyre (2002), which give direct seismological applications. We are entitled to believe that the observations carried out at extremely short distances from seismic sources can reveal such rotation and twist motions. A question whether the rotation motions at a seismic source can propagate in a form of waves through geological layers from such a seismic source to a distant recording station seems still open. Recent theoretical studies (Teisseyre 2004, BoratyĔski and Teisseyre 2004) and some observational results bring a positive answer to this question. In practice, however, the conditions related to geological structures and to the region near the recording station can be either more or less favourable for detection of rotation waves. The secondary rotation waves are related to coupling between a microstructure and defect content in a medium; in other words, the seismic body and surface waves can give rise, due to interaction with the medium structure, to coupled rotation waves. The effect of displacement velocity rotation ( rot u ) can be roughly estimated using the magnitudes of the observed displacement velocities; when deriving, with the use of the plane wave theory for ideal elastic medium, the rotation by means of time derivative of recorded data we can roughly estimate the effect. Some comparisons between the observed rotation motions and the effect so derived lead to the conclusion that the effect of rotation of displacement motions is small. However, Takeo and

Fig. 2.2 Complex asymmetric pattern: rotation and twist motion


Ito (1997) proved theoretically that an influence of defects, expressed in the framework of the non-Riemannian geometry by torsion and curvature tensors, is such that at short distances the rotation of displacement velocity may be of importance (the near-field rotation effects). Finally, the incident seismic waves exert direct influence on the objects situated on the Earth’s surface; a sequence of incident waves and also the shape and structure of the objects (as expressed by inertia moment tensor) and the properties of the junction with the ground (friction and binding strength) determine the resulting effects. Many, but probably not all historical observations are related to this category. The rotation and spin motions (related to real rotational deformations) can propagate in a medium with internal defects (dislocation and disclination densities) or even in a homogeneous medium in which, except of the classical constitutive relation between the symmetric strains and stresses, there are additional constitutive relations for the antisymmetric part of stresses and the spin and twist nuclei, as related to rotation of grains and internal friction. Finally, strong rotational seismic effects (both horizontal and vertical) have been observed right in the epicenter of some shallow earthquakes. An explanation for these effects by the coherent translation wave at a seismic source arising in a self-organization process has recently been proposed (for details see Chapter 17 by V. Aksenov). It follows from the above classification that individual sources of rotational seismic effects are not equally effective along the whole recording interval from the epicenter to the far-field distances. However, we do not have suitable tools in our hands enabling us to estimate these effects and to make their reliable quantitative comparison. Many questions related to the rotation waves remain still open: up to now, we have no reliable data on propagation properties (velocity and attenuation) of such waves through geological media and on the influence of distance from source to the recording station; we have no laboratory data on the bonds between the particles or grains related to their mutual rotations and hence on the related elastic constant. We shall note that the observed macrorotation effects due to large earthquakes may be not entirely caused by the microrotation motions related to seismic waves; we cannot prove, up to now, any unambiguous relation between the macrorotation effects and the microrotation motions observed with very sensitive recording systems. A better insight into the theories related to rotation and twist micromotions is needed, as outlined further on in this chapter.

15


2.2 Elements of the Basic Theory Teisseyre (1973, 1974) attributed the appearence of rotation effects to the seismic wave coupling with micromorphic response of a medium having an internal/granular structure. We shall, however, account now for different approaches to the continuum description of real bodies: the media with internal structure could be described by micropolar (rotation of grains) or micromorphic (rotation and deformation of grains) theories; the linear, nonelastic media could be described by adequately modified constitutive relations (for example, for thermoelastic bodies or those with plastic relation between stresses and deformation rates). According to Kröner’s idea (see Kröner 1981, 1982) we can combine both approaches by introducing the self fields or, in other words, by introducing a distribution of the self-stress or selfstrain nuclei. At the same time, we preserve the ideal stress-strain relation. We will follow Kröner’s approach which accounts both for the medium structure influence and for the content of defects and nuclei of stresses or deformations. We introduce the total strains, rotations and distortions related to the displacements and, thus, automatically fulfil the compatibility conditions:

ET

u , Z T > u @ , E T

u ,

(2.1)

where symbols ( ) and [ ] mean the symmetrized and antisymmetrized products of the elements contained inside them. We demand that the total fields present the sums of the elastic and self fields: ET

E ES ,

ZT

Z ZS ,

ET

E ES .

(2.2)

The elastic fields are the observables, the self fields represent distortions related to medium deviations from ideal elasticity and to an influence of other fields (thermal, electric and also that of rotation and friction nature); a sum of elastic and self fields shall result in the field called total, so defined due to obeying the constitutive relation for ideal elasticity. The stresses (strictly speaking, the symmetric part of stresses, see the text below) remain related to strains by the ideal elastic form of the constitutive relations; in our presentation, such an ideal relation is valid for the total stress and strain fields, so we can write ST

O I tr E T 2 P E T ,

ST

S SS ,

(2.3)


while for real media the elastic fields are given as differences between the total and the self-fields, e.g., E E T E S , S S T S S . The self-fields introduce deviations from ideal elasticity (Kröner 1982): defect content, interacting fields and internal nuclei (e.g., dislocation and disclination densities, thermal field, rotation nuclei). The strain and stress elastic fields can be no longer symmetric, and the elastic rotation may become asymmetric too; the constitutive relation for the elastic stresses and strains, as corresponding to that in Eq. (2.3), shall be supplemented by the constitutive relation for the antisymmetric part of strain and stresses. This approach includes also continua with structure, e.g., micropolar or micromorphic continua with internal bonds (the constitutive relations). We will return to these problems in Chapter 4. After Shimbo (1975, 1995) we can introduce the bonds for the point rotations by assuming that the internal friction along the microslip planes produces the rotation of grains due to the appearance of an antisymmetric part of stresses along such microplanes (Fig. 2.2):

Z>..@

1

S>..@ ,

2P *

(2.4)

where the material constant P is a new constant different from the shear modulus, and symbol [..] means the antisymmetric part of a tensor. Another kind of the constitutive relation and the related bonds can be introduced between the stress and rotation moments; under some conditions such an approach can be equivalent to that presented above with antisymmetric stresses and rotations. The constitutive relation between the rotation field and the antisymmetric stress field can be supplemented with the assumption (Teisseyre 2002) that the elastic rotation relates to the antisymmetric strain and we shall note that the antisymmetric strains and stresses relate directly to the antisymmetric self-strains and self-stresses:

Z>..@

E>..@ and E>..@

E>S..@ , S>..@

S>S..@ .

(2.5)

While for the twist motion, as given by the symmetric part of the asymmetric rotation tensor, we have to assume that it is equal to the symmetric self-rotation field, and, further, we can assume that the latter is equal to symmetric self-strain field:

Z..

ZS.. ,

where

ZS..

ES.. ,

where symbol (..) means the symmetric part of a tensor.

(2.6)


17

The antisymmetric part of elastic strain and the antisymmetric part of elastic rotation are related to the so-called microdisplacement motions introduced in micromorphic theories by Eringen (1999, and Eringen and Suhubi 1964). The constitutive relations for the symmetric parts of elastic stresses and strains E E T ES.. become, according to Eq. (2.3):

S

O I tr E T O * I tr ZS.. 2 P E T 2 P *ZS.. ,

(2.7)

where the constants O * and P relates to the respective moduli for the microdisplacement motions. S Trace tr Z(..) presents an influence of diagonal self-strains related to compression/extension of micrograins, which are usually neglected; in such a case we will have S

S O I tr E T 2 P E T 2 P *Z(..) .

(2.7ǯ)

Rotation motions can be explained by theories for media with structures (see: micropolar and micromorphic media; e.g., Eringen and Suhubi 1964, Teisseyre 1973, 1995) or containing defects (see: theories related to the dislocation and disclination densities in continua, e.g., Teisseyre 1995, 2002). In a near-fracturing state, we can consider, using the theory of elastic beams, the torques acting on bonds in a crystal lattice (Roux 1990, De Arcangelis 1990), as shown in Fig. 2.3. Such torques are conjugated to rotations around nodes; near a percolation threshold the related processes can lead to rotation of some internal rigid microstructures.

Fig. 2.3 Bending of bonds around the lattice nodes – modified after De Arcangelis (1990)


The sources of rotation motion in a focal source zone can be attributed, as well, to friction processes and grain rotations or to the stress couples connected with the small structural elements (microfaults) permeating such a zone (Teisseyre 1973).

2.3 Recording the Rotation and Twist Motions Mechanical deformation may contain two independent fields: displacements and rotations; the latter appear when there exist a suitable excitation source and the internal bonds joining rotation motion with a stress moment or with a nonsymmetric part of stresses, like that given by Eq. (2.4). The system used can detect the rotation velocities. Using the azimuthal array of seismographs, Droste and Teisseyre (1976) derived the first rotation seismograms at the recording site very close (1-3 km) to mine event hypocentres (Droste and Teisseyre 1976; reproduced in Teisseyre 1995, p 625). Figure 2.4 explains the measuring system suitable for estimating the azimuth towards the epicenter: it was a 6-channel azimuth system of horizontal seismographs used to record very close seismic events (at distances ca. 5 km) in a mine in Silesia, Poland. The azimuths as a function of time were determined by two numerical procedures estimating the errors of azimuth determinations in respect to the known position of the epicenter: in the first procedure we assumed that there is no rotation effect, while in the other that the rotation of seismo-

Fig. 2.4 System of the azimuth station. The asterisk denotes the epicenter position; the continuous line indicates the azimuth towards epicenter while the dashed lines mark the range of azimuth variations


19

Fig. 2.5 The rotation seismogram derived from the azimuth variations – only for the time moments when their estimations were reliable

graph platform may take place. The method used enabled us to estimate the amplitudes of rotation motion for the moments when the errors for azimuth estimation were smaller than the errors for a fixed position of the platform; the respective time moments coincide with times when amplitudes of the recorded seismic wave were near the maxima. This was probably the first rotation seismogram achieved. Contemporary systems designated to record the rotation velocities are based either on the very sensitive instruments measuring rotation, like the laser ring interferometers (see Takeo and Ito 1997) or on the rotation seismometer system. The latter consists of the pairs of antiparallel seismographs situated very close to each other (Moriya and Marumo 1998, Moriya and Teisseyre 1999) or suspended on a common axis (see Teisseyre 2002); such systems require a very close identity of the seismograph


responses and enable to record not only the rotation motion but also the twist type motion. A pair consisting of two pendulum seismometers, aligned antiparallel (e.g., along the y-axis, to measure the x-component of displacement motion) and having identical responses, permits to measure two velocity fields containing the displacement and rotation velocities:

§ wu · u c u l ¨ Z xyS ¸ , © wy ¹

§ wu · u cc u l ¨ Z xyS ¸ , © wy ¹

(2.9)

where l is the reduced length of seismometer pendulum. A sum of these fields yields displacement velocity, while for the difference of records we arrive at the definition of the microdisplacement tensor (here, the component xy): u

1 u c u cc , 2

U xy

u c u cc 2l

wu Z xyS . wy

(2.10)

The microdisplacements are defined here in relation to the observable values; rotation and twist become defined as 1 U xy U yx 2

1 § wu wX · 1 S S ¨ ¸ Z xy Z yx , 2 © wy wx ¹ 2

1 U xy U yx 2

1 § wu wX · 1 S S ¨ ¸ Z xy Z yx . 2 © wy wx ¹ 2

(2.11)

Any measuring system detecting rotation motions measures together the velocity displacement and the corresponding component of rotation. We can only estimate the respective influences of these fields by computing the magnitudes of rotation displacement velocities from the records of u and X and comparing these magnitudes with the recorded ones related to the observed rotation and twist motions. The observable quantities U relate to the displacement motions and rotations (in Eq. (2.6) we have put Z S E S )

U ( sym ) U [ antsym ]

E ( sym )

E T E (Ssym )

E T Z (Ssym ) ,

Z[ antsym ] Z T Z[Santsym ] Z T Z[Santsym ] .

(2.12)

According to these relations, we can state that the observables relate to elastic stresses or to rotations.

21


Estimating the order of magnitude of wu wy and wX wy by means of the plane wave approximation and comparing it with the recorded microdisplacement field U , we have shown that in most cases analyzed so far the space derivatives of displacement motions E T in these relations (Eqs. 2.10–2.12) can be neglected; the observed fields U would be comparable, by orders of magnitude, with the estimated orders of wu wy and wX wy only for very small wave velocities. However, in some cases this approximation can be not true. Finally, we shall return to the question of reliability of recording of the microdisplacement fields U . In reality, the responses of the two antiparallel sensors, Rc, Rcc, are slightly different; instead of relation (2.9) we shall write u c

§ wu * · R c u Rc l ¨ J xy ¸ , © wy ¹

u cc

§ wu * · R cc u R cc l ¨ J xy ¸ , © wy ¹

(2.13)

where these convolutions contain now the ground displacement motion, u , and ground rotations J Z S . For the difference of records we obtain

§ wu * · 'u c 'R u 2 R l ¨ J xy ¸ . © wy ¹

(2.14)

Thus, the seismograph systems record both the microdisplacement motion (hereabove, the second term) and the errors due to differences in responses (the first term). Both terms shall be evaluated and only in the case when the first term is smaller than the second one we can be sure that our records are reliable. Similarly, we shall reconsider relation (2.8) for the second rotation system. Teisseyre et al. (2003), and NowoĪyĔski and Teisseyre KP (2003) proposed a special computation procedure to eliminate such errors related to differences in the responses. Theoretically, the laser ring interferometers should record only the rotation component, but due to finite dimension of the recording platform there enter the derivatives of displacement motion and an influence of rotation of the velocity displacement will appear. In the next chapters, several examples of recording of rotation and twist fields are presented. However, as we already mentioned, we shall still keep in mind that no unambiguous relation has been found – up to now – between these microrotation motions (true rotation) and the observed macrorotation effects (true and/or false rotations).


In the last decades, though, some progress in this respect has certainly been achieved. New fundamental ideas have been put forward and basic results of advanced theoretical approach have been obtained in the field of interaction of incident seismic waves with micromorphism and defect content. Some experiments providing observational confirmation and verification of the studied phenomena have also been made; their first results corroborate the theoretical conclusions and indicate the usefulness of the observational systems.

References BoratyĔski W, Teisseyre R (2004) Generalized continuum with defects and asymmetric stresses. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 185-195 Davison Ch (1927) The founders of seismology. Cambridge Univ Press, Cambridge De Arcangelis L (1990) Randomness in breaking thresholds (229-260). In: Herrmann HJ and Roux S (eds) Statistical models for the fracture of disordered media. North-Holland, Amsterdam New York Droste Z, Teisseyre R (1976) Rotational and displacemental components of ground motion as deduced from data of the azimuth system of seismograph. Publs Inst Geophys Pol Acad Sc 97: 157-167 Eringen AC (1999) Microcontinuum field theories. Vol. I Foundations and Solids. Springer Verlag, New York Eringen AC, Suhubi ES (1964) Nonlinear theory of simple microelastic solids – I. Int J Eng Sci 2: 189-203 Gutenberg B (1926) Grundlagen der Erdbebenkunde. Univ. Frankfurt a/M, Frankfurt Hobbs WH (1907) Earthquakes. Appleton and Co., New York Imamura A (1937) Theoretical and applied seismology. Maruzen Co., Tokyo Kröner E (1981) Continuum theory of defects. In: Balian R, Kléman M, Poirier J-P (eds) Les Houches, Session XXXV, 1980, Physique des defauts / Physics of defects. North-Holland Publ Comp, Dordrecht Kröner E (1982) Continuum theory defects. North-Holland Publ Comp, Dordrecht Mallet R (1862) Great Neapolitan earthquake of 1857. The first principles of observational seismology, vols I-II. Chapman and Hall, London (Fasc edn, SGA, Italy 1987) Moriya T, Marumo R (1998) Design for rotation seismometers and their calibration. Geophys Bull Hokkaido Univ 61: 99-106 Moriya T, Teisseyre R (1999) Discussion on the recording of seismic rotation waves. Acta Geophys Pol 47: 351-362 NowoĪyĔski K, Teisseyre KP (2003) Time-domain filtering of seismic rotation waves. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 51-61


23

Roux S (1990) Continuum and discrete description of elasticity. In: Herrmann HJ, Roux S (eds) Statistical models for the fracture of disordered media, NorthHolland, Amsterdam, pp 87-114 Shimbo M (1975) A geometrical formulation of asymmetric features in plasticity. Bull Fac Eng Hokkaido Univ 77: 155-159 Shimbo M (1995) Non-Riemannian geometrical approach to deformation and friction. In: Teisseyre R (ed) Theory of earthquake premonitory and fracture processes. PWN, Warszawa, pp 520-528 Takeo M, Ito HM (1997) What can be learned from rotational motions excited by earthquakes? Geophys J Int 129: 319-329 Teisseyre R (1973) Earthquake processes in a micromorphic continuum. Pure appl Geophys 102: 15-28 Teisseyre R (1974) Symmetric micromorphic continuum: wave propagation, point source solutions and some applications to earthquake processes. In: ThoftChristensen P (ed.) Continuum mechanics aspects of geodynamics and rock fracture mechanics, D Riedel Publ, Dordrecht-Holland, pp 201-244 Teisseyre R (ed) (1995) Theory of earthquake premonitory and fracture processes. PWN, Warszawa Teisseyre R (2002) Continuum with defect and self-rotation fields. Acta Geophys Pol 50: 51-68 Teisseyre R (2004) Spin and twist motions in a homogeneous elastic continuum and cross-band geometry of fracturing. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 173-183 Teisseyre R, Teisseyre KP, Moriya T, Palangio P (2003) Seismic rotation waves related to volcanic mining and seismic events: nearfield and micromorphic motions. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 409-431 Twiss RJ, Gefel MJ (1990) Curved slicken fibers: a new brittle shear sense indicator with application to a sheared serpentinite. J Struct Geol 12: 471-481 Twiss RJ, Souter BJ, Unruh JR (1993) The effect of block rotations on the global seismic moment tensor and the patterns of seismic P and T axes. J Geophys Res 98: B1, 645-674

3 Some Examples of Rotation Effects: the Tulbagh Earthquake, South Africa Gerhard Graham, Andrzej Kijko Council for Geoscience, Pretoria 0001, South Africa e-mail: [email protected]

The Southwestern Cape is considered to be one of the regions with the highest level of seismic activity of tectonic origin in South Africa. In this respect, the Tulbagh-Ceres area is of prime interest, as pointed out by the destructive Tulbagh earthquake of 29 September 1969. This earthquake caused severe damages, including rotation of tombstones and memorials in cemeteries in the earthquake-affected towns. According to Theron (1974), earth tremors have been recorded in the Southwestern Cape as early as 1620. The number of earthquakes recorded in his catalogue for the period 1620-1971 is 73, with at least 7 of them considered to have had local magnitudes ML between 5.1 and 6.5. The first 300 years of this catalogue contains approximately 23 tremors, against about 53 tremors during its last 50 years. This fact is not considered to indicate increased seismicity in the area, but is rather the result of incomplete recording prior to 1920 and the limited history of observed earthquakes. The catalogue was incorporated into a more complete catalogue by Fernández and Guzmán (1979), covering all events recorded in Southern Africa for the period 1620-1970. It is evident from the Fernández and Guzmán catalogue that the number of recorded events in the Southwestern Cape since 1920 is almost double of that reported by Theron (1974). A large portion of the Southwestern Cape events in the Fernández and Guzmán (1979) catalogue resulted from the seismicity recorded in the Tulbagh area, especially in the time directly following the large Tulbagh earthquake on 29 September 1969. This earthquake, having a local magnitude ML of 6.3, was the most destructive earthquake in South African history and was followed by a long sequence of aftershocks, the most severe of which, on 14 April 1970, had ML of 5.7. A comprehensive report regarding the 1969 earthquake (van Wyk and Kent, 1974) covers aspects such as the geology of the Tulbagh-Ceres area, the seismic history of the Southwestern Cape, macroseismic observations in the meizoseismal areas of the 1969 earthquake, hydrological phenomena associated with the earthquake,

26 G. Graham, A. Kijko

aftershocks of the earthquake, the focal mechanism of the earthquake, geophysical implications of the whole earthquake sequence during 1969-1971, some elements of seismic risk assessment and earthquake-resistant building recommendations. The worst damage resulting from the Tulbagh earthquake of 29 September 1969 occurred in the northern part of the Tulbagh Valley which is situated close to the epicentre (Keyser, 1974). Severe damage occurred to buildings in the towns of Tulbagh, Wolsely, Ceres and Prince Alfred Hamlet. Damage also occurred in the villages of Saron, Gouda and Hermon as well as in the towns of Worcester and Porterville. Slight damage was observed, in particular, in towns as far away as Stellenbosch which is about 80 km from the epicentre. The maximum seismic intensity (in modified Mercalli scale) of VIII was observed during the earthquake in the Tulbagh region. This corresponds to a ground movement of 0.13 g PGA < 0.26 g according to the intensity–PGA (Peak Ground Acceleration) relation of Trifunac and Brady (1975), where the lower and upper limits of PGA were

Fig. 3.1 The memorial at the cemetery northeast of Tulbagh, some 15-20 km from the 29 September 1969 Tulbagh earthquake epicenter (33.28° S, 19.14° E). The marble pillars supporting the roof with ornaments were rotated by about 10° (Archives of the Council for Geoscience, Pretoria, South Africa)

3 Some Examples of Rotation Effects: the Tulbagh Earthquake, South Africa

27

obtained by substituting the intensity in the intensity-PGA relation by VII½ and VIII½, respectively. The seismic hazard and risk assessment for the Tulbagh area is presented by Kijko et al. (2002, 2003). Severe damage was observed in many cemeteries in the earthquake -affected towns. In Wolseley, about 20 km from the epicentre, more than 50% of the tombstones were toppled over, mostly in westerly direction. A cemetery north-east of Tulbagh experienced less damage. However, a memorial, consisting of a few marble pillars supporting an ornamental roof rotated through about 10°. The roof shifted in south-westerly direction (Keyser, 1974). A photo of this memorial after destruction is shown in Fig. 3.1. In Ceres cemetery, about 20 km from the epicentre, more than 70% of the tombstones collapsed. The majority fell over to the west. Only one fell to the east. Three tombstones rotated anticlockwise through 45° (Keyser, 1974). A spectacular photo of one of the anticlockwise rotated tombstones in the Ceres cemetery is shown in Fig. 3.2.

Fig. 3.2 Tombstone in the Ceres cemetery showing anticlockwise rotation through 45 degrees. Source: “Die Aardbewing van 29 September 1969 in die Suidwestelike Kaapprovinsie, Suid-Afrika” Geological Survey, Republic of South Africa, Department of Mines, Seismologiese Reeks 4, 1974, 48 pp”

28 G. Graham, A. Kijko

References Fernández LM, Guzmán JA (1979) Seismic history of Southern Africa. Geological Survey of South Africa, Seismologic Series 9: 1-38 Keyser AW (1974) The earthquake of 29 September 1969 in the Southwestern Cape Province, South Africa. Geological Survey of South Africa, Seismologic Series 4: 16-22 Kijko A., Retief SJP, Graham G (2002) Seismic hazard and risk assessment for the Tulbagh area, Part I. Assessment of seismic hazard. Natural Hazards 26: 175201 Kijko A, Retief SJP, Graham G (2003) Seismic hazard and risk assessment for the Tulbagh area, Part II. Assessment of seismic risk. Natural Hazards 30: 25-41 Theron JH (1974) The earthquake of 29 September 1969 in the southwestern Cape Province, South Africa. Geological Survey of South Africa, Seismologic Series 4: 12-18 Trifunac MD, Brady AG (1975) On the correlation of seismic intensity scales with the peaks of recorded ground motion. Bull Seism Soc Am 65: 139-162 van Wyk WL, Kent LE (1974) The Earthquake of 29 September 1969 in the Southwestern Cape Province, South Africa. Geological Survey of South Africa, Seismologic Series 4: 53 pp

PART II THEORY OF CONTINUA AND FIELDS OF DEFECTS

4 Deviations from Symmetry and Elasticity: Asymmetric Continuum Mechanics 1 1,2 Roman Teisseyre , Wojciech BoratyĔski 1

Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland e-mail: [email protected]

2

Faculty of Mathematics and Information Science Warsaw University of Technology Plac Politechniki 1, 00-661 Warszawa, Poland e-mail: [email protected]

4.1 Introduction The deviations from classical elasticity can be related to the defect distribution (dislocation and disclination densities), thermal excitation, some features of internal structure and different types of nuclei (e.g. electric nuclei, rotation nuclei); other deviations lead to an elasto-plastic behaviour. The Kröner approach to continua with a distribution of self-field sources is applied to a wide class of deviations from the classical ideal elasticity; the same approach is applied to the theory of continua with asymmetric fields; the related equations of motion are derived. Such an approach replaces other methods based on the constitutive relations specific for each type of the medium considered. In this approach, the reference constitutive relation remains the same, but deviations from the classical ideal elasticity are attributed to different sources, nuclei and defects introduced into continuum theory. Our considerations extend on deviations from the stress symmetry. The elastic deformation fields, strain, rotation and distortion, represent real observables; the Kröner continuum with defect distribution of different kinds is based on definitions of the elastic, total and self-fields. We use this approach (see Kröner 1958, 1981) to the elastic theory of continuum deviating from the ideal elasticity and from the stress and strain symmetry; the total stresses and strains remain symmetric while the total rotation remains antisymmetric.

32

R. Teisseyre and W. BoratyĔski

The total fields ET and ȦT are defined as the fields which can be expressed by means of the displacement field:

EklT

1 § wul 2 ¨© wxk

wuk wxl

· ¸ ¹

ZklT

1 § wul 2 ¨© wxk

wuk wxl

· ¸ ¹

E klT

wul , wxk

(4.1)

while the self-fields represent distribution of internal sources (nuclei) causing the disturbances in the strain and rotation fields. The elastic fields E and Ȧ deviate from total fields due to an influence of the self-fields (Kröner 1958, 1981):

Z Z T Z S,

T S E E ,

E

E

E TE S .

(4.2)

Total fields ET and ȦT fulfil the compatibility conditions:

H ikmH jtn

T w 2 Emn wxk wxt

0,

H ikmH jtn

T w 2Zmn wxk wxt

0.

The compatibility conditions for the elastic fields help us to define the incompatibility tensors for elastic and self-fields: I ij

H ikmH jtn

w 2 Emn wxk wxt

H ikmH jtn

S w 2 Emn , wxk wxt

(4.3) 2

J ij

H ikmH jtn

w Zmn wxk wxt

2

H ikmH jtn

S mn

wZ . wxk wxt

These two tensors can be separated into the symmetric and antisymmetric parts (Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2003, BoratyĔski and Teisseyre 2004). Elastic stresses and strains shall obey some reference constitutive relation; for symmetric fields we assume that such a relation is that of the ideal elasticity:

OG lk Ess 2 P Elk .

Slk

(4.4)

The elastic and self strains and stresses can be, in general, asymmetric; hence, their anti-symmetric parts shall be mutually compensated to preserve symmetry: E>ik @ E>Sik @

0,

S>ik @ S>Sik @

0.

(4.5)

Similarly, the elastic and self rotations are asymmetric and hence their symmetric parts shall be mutually compensated:

Zik ZSik

0.

(4.6)

4

Deviations from Symmetry and Elasticity

33

We shall note that the balance law for the antisymmetric stresses and rotations replaces the balance between stress moments and angular momentum.

4.2 Symmetric Stresses: Motion Equations First, we recall the classic case of symmetric stresses in a continuum with defects (dislocations and disclinations; see Teisseyre 2001); for elastic fields we write the equation of motion expressing divergence of symmetric elastic stresses: w Slk wxk

U

w Xl wt

w T w S Xl X l , wt wt

w2 w U 2 ul U XlS , wt wt

w Slk wxk

or

w Xl wt

(4.7)

where X S is the plastic velocity. From this relation we obtain, after differentiation and symmetrization: §

· w w ¸ Slk S sk ¸¸ ¸ wxk wxl 2 wxk wxs ¹

1¨ ¨ ¨¨ ©

§ ¨ ¨ ¨¨ ©

U

§ w2 T 1 w¨ w S w S ·¸ ¨ E U X Xs ¸ , ls l wt 2 wxl ¸¸¹ 2 wt ¨¨© wxs

· w ¸ Slk ¸¸ ¸ wxk wxs ¹ ( ls )

U

w2 T w Els U J sl E Ssl , wt 2 wt

(4.7c)

(4.8)

where for the dislocation current J sl we put (Teisseyre 2002) J sl

1§ w S w S w S· Esl ¨ Xl Xs ¸ . wt wxl ¹ 2 © wxs

(4.8c)

Finally, using relations (4.2) and (4.4) we get § ¨ ¨ ¨¨ ©

· w ¸ Slk ¸¸ ¸ wxk wxs ¹ ( ls )

U w2 U O w2 w G S S U J sl . (4.8s) ls 2 ls 2 nn wt 2P wt 2 P (3O 2 P ) wt

This equation of motion contains on the right-hand side the propagation and diffusion terms.


34

4.3 Thermal Deformations Before going into more general considerations we take the case of thermal distortion; the Duhamel–Neuman relation determines the following constitutive law and the motion equation: w Slk wxk

w 0 w Slk (u ) (3O 2P )D ther T wxk wxl

U

w 2ul , wt 2

Sls0 (u ) G ls (3O 2P )D therT ,

Sls

(4.9) (4.10)

where Slk0 represent stresses for the isothermal case. Differentiation and symmetrization brings the next relation: § ¨ ¨ ¨¨ ©

· w ¸ Slk0 (u ) ¸¸ ¸ wxk wxs ¹ ( ls )

U

w2 T w Els (3O 2P )D ther T. 2 wt wxl wxs

(4.11)

Thermal distortions can be described by the dislocation fields (Muskhelishvili 1953, Teisseyre 1986); hence, starting with the constitutive law (4.4) and using relation (4.8) we obtain the equivalent relation: § ¨ ¨ ¨¨ ©

· w ¸ Slk ¸¸ ¸ wxk wxs ¹ ( ls )

§ ¨ ¨ ¨¨ ©

U

· § · w w ¸ ¨ ¸ SlkT (u ) ¸¸ ¨¨ SlkS ¸¸ ¸ ¨ wx wx ¸ wxk wxs k s ¹ ( ls ) © ¹ ( ls )

w2 T w w S Els U J sl U E sl . 2 wt wt wt

Comparing these two relations for S 0 (u ) sion for the thermal self-strain and current: ElsS

G lsD therT ,

SlsS

(4.12)

S T (u ) we obtain the expres-

G ls (3O 2P )D therT , J ls

G lsD ther T .

(4.13)

In this manner we arrive also at the total stress field: the Kröner continuum SlsT

Sls SlsS

G ls O Enn 2 P Els G ls (3O 2 P ) E Snn .

(4.14)

Comparing (4.13) with the definition of the dislocation current tensor and plastic flow (4.8ǯ) (Teisseyre 2002), we obtain the vanishing of the thermal flow X kS 0 . In a similar way we can define the plastic flow velocities and currents for other sources of distortions, like piezoelectric, anomalous piezoelectric (Teisseyre 2001) and magnetic (Nagahama 2001).

4


35

4.4 The Maxwell and Voigt–Kelvin Bodies: Equivalence Theorems A linear generalized constitutive stress-strain relation for the total fields is as follows:

SikT W SikT

OG ik EssT 2P EikT 2v E ikT .

(4.15)

Such a relation can be written for a sum of the elastic and self-fields (approach of Kröner 1981): Sik SikS W Sik W SikS

OG ik ESS 2P Eik 2P EikS 2vE ik 2vE ikS . (4.16)

We will search for the definitions of the self-fields which would preserve the ideal elastic relation for the elastic field; we assume here that the trace of self-fields vanishes, Ess EssT . Hence, separating these tensors into 1 the axial Sik and deviatoric Sik parts, Sik G ik S ss and Sik Sik Sik , we 3

can write for the deviatoric fields Sik SikS W S ik W SikS

2 P E ik 2P E ikS 2v E ik 2v E ikS .

(4.16´)

For the Maxwell body, in particular, we have: SikT and

Sik SikSM

2P E ikT 2vE ikT

2P E ik 2P E ikSM 2v E ik 2v E ikSM .

(4.17)

When the self-stresses and strains are defined as SikSM 2P E ikSM 2vE ikSM

2vE ik ,

(4.18)

we preserve the ideal elastic relation for the elastic fields. Similarly, for the Voigt–Kelvin body we have: SikT W SikT

OG ik EssT 2P EikT ,

Sik SikSV W Sik W SikSV

2 P E ik 2 P E ikSV .

(4.19) (4.19´)

When defining the self-fields as SikSV W SikSV 2P E ikSV

W Sik ,

(4.20)

36


we obtain again the ideal elastic relation for the elastic fields. We can combine these results obtaining the complete equivalence between the Kröner approach and the various constitutive relation approach: SikS W SikS 2 P E ikS 2vE ikS

2vE ik W Sik .

(4.21)

We will now compare the equations of motion for the two abovementioned approaches describing the distortions from ideal elasticity. The equation of motion is given by relation (4.7) and the related selfstrain, current and plastic velocity join relation (4.8´).

4.5 Asymmetric Fields The antisymmetric part of self-strains may be related to internal microfrictions (stress moment resistance), while the symmetric part of self-rotations may represent some axial motion, called further on the bend-twist motion. Already in the micromorphic continuum (Eringen and Suhubi 1964, Eringen and Claus 1970, Eringen and Kafadar 1976), the microstrain can contain its antisymmetric part while the gyration tensor can contain its symmetric part; these peculiarities extend, moreover, on the stresses and stress moments and on the inertia spin tensor (in the latter, some additional asymmetric properties may result from the microinertia tensor). In this chapter we recall some of our former results for the continuum with defect distribution and we present a uniform continuum with rotation motions – of spin and twist-bend types (Teisseyre 2002, 2004, Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2002, 2003, BoratyĔski and Teisseyre 2004); in our approach we supplement the ideal elasticity constitutive law, the strain-stress relation, by an additional relation joining the rotation tensor and the asymmetric stresses. The asymmetry of fields follows from the antisymmetric stresses introduced by Shimbo (1975, 1995) and Shimbo and Kawaguchi (1976) as related to the friction processes and rotations of grains. Fracture processes develop usually along the main fault plane, giving rise to the initial asymmetry of the fracture pattern; the same concerns the micro-fracturing and internal friction processes. Due to friction, the rotation of grains adjacent to the micro-slip planes causes an appearance of the antisymmetric part of stresses. Owing to the additional constitutive law between the antisymmetric parts of stresses and strains, we can evade an influence of the Hook law, which, when used as a unique law in the ideal elasticity, rules out an existence of rotation waves. Thus, it comes out that the rotation vibrations can, in such an ideal elastic continuum, propagate and be not attenuated.

4


37

Already in the micromorphic continuum (Eringen and Suhubi 1964, Eringen and Claus 1970, Eringen and Kafadar 1976, Eringen 1999), the microstrain can contain its anti-symmetric part while the gyration tensor can contain its symmetric part; these peculiarities extend, moreover, on the stresses and stress moments and on the inertia spin tensor (in the latter, additional asymmetric properties may result from the microinertia tensor). The relations for the microstrain and microstress moments can be expressed with the use of notion of the self fields including their symmetric and antisymmetric parts. The motion equations shall be supplemented with that including a balance for stress moments and angular momentum. Some features of the micromorphic continuum can also be described in the frame of our approach with the properly defined self-fields. Here, we will also show that even in a uniform continuum, when the rotation of individual particles and the related bond distortions generate antisymmetric stresses, the rotation waves propagate and are not attenuated, similarly as the displacement motion in ideal elasticity. An alternative way of introducing the rotation motions is to consider a continuum with defect densities (dislocations and disclinations) and/or rotation nuclei (Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2003, BoratyĔski and Teisseyre 2004); see the next chapters. In our approach, the asymmetry of fields follows from the relation between the antisymmetric stresses and is related to the friction processes and rotation of grains, as introduced by Shimbo (1975, 1995). Fracture processes usually develop along the main fault plane; hence, there appears the initial asymmetry of the fracture pattern (Teisseyre and Kozak 2003); due to friction, the rotation of grains adjacent to the main slip plane gives rise to the antisymmetric part of stresses and the twist-bend tensor. Thus, as we have proposed in our earlier paper, we introduce after Shimbo (1975 and 1995) the bonds for rotation motion as the constitutive relation between the antisymmetric strains; cf. Eqs. (4.5) and (4.6):

Z[Slk ]

1 2P

*

S[Slk ]

E[Slk ] ,

(4.22)

where the constant µ* represents the rotation rigidity of bonds and is related to the inner friction. We also have to include a counterpart to spin motion – the axial symmetric motion called the bend-twist motion and representing vibrations of the rotation nuclei; we assume that the related strain and rotation self-fields follow the similar relation as given in (4.22). Thus, we can write 1 S 1 S Z(Slk ) S E(Slk ) and ZlkS ElkS Slk . (4.23) * ( lk ) 2P 2P *


38

Equations of motion for asymmetric fields

In the equation of motion for the continuum with asymmetric fields (Eq. 4.8) the elastic stresses split into the total and self fields with the condition that traces of these tensors remain equal to each other S(ik )

SikT S(Sik ) , S( nn )

T S nn , E( nn )

T Enn .

(4.24)

The symmetric parts of the elastic stresses relate to elastic strains according to the constitutive law (4.4) and to self-rotations according to (4.23); we obtain: § ¨ ¨ ¨¨ ©

· w ¸ ( S(Tlk ) 2P *Z(Slk ) ) ¸¸ ¸ wxk wxs ¹ ( ls )

U

w2 ( ElsT ZlsS ) wt 2

§ (O P ) w 3u k 2 P *w 2Z(Slk ) P w 3ul w U J ls ¨ wt ¨© wxl wxs wxk wxk wxk wxs wxk wxs

· ¸¸ ¹( sl )

§ wul · S (4.25) ¸ U Z( sl ) U J( sl ) . x w © s ¹( sl ) For a homogeneous elastic continuum (vanishing of currents) we obtain

U¨

* 2 S § (O P ) w 3uk P w 3ul 2 P w Z(lk ) ¨¨ wxk wxk wxs wxk wxs © wxl wxs wxk

· ¸¸ ¹( sl )

§ wul · S (4.26) ¸ U Z( sl ) . © wxs ¹( sl ) For the antisymmetric part of elastic stresses we shall take into account the fact that the stress moments and antisymmetric stresses shall enter into the equilibrium conditions; in the homogeneous continuum theory we assume that strain moments relate to the antisymmetric part of strains and, thus, the respective equations reduce to relation between the antisymmetric stresses and antisymmetric strains and rotations (Teisseyre 2002, Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2003). Antisymmetric stresses relate to an internal rotation motion; these stresses become important in zones with higher dislocation densities and their evolution (zones under high stresses) or in zones where microfractures nucleate; in such zones we can expect the presence of rotation nuclei. Considering a slip/fracture process along the tectonic plane, we can try to split our equations of motion into two parts: one describing the dynamic process in which the interaction of defects is confined to the very close vicinity of this plane, and the other relating to radiation in the surrounding

U¨

4


39

elastic space. This method has been introduced by Teisseyre and Yamashita (1999). For the antisymmetric stress S[in] we apply the balance law, expressing, on the one hand, the rotation of force wS[ in ] wxn acting on a body element due to the antisymmetric stresses (rotational moment of forces per infinitesimal arm length corresponding to stress moments), and, on the other hand, the balancing term, the acceleration related to angular momentum:

lki

w S[ ni ] wxk wxn

U

1 w2 lki Z[ ki ] . 2 wt 2

(4.27)

Equivalently, using the constitutive law (4.22) we obtain: § § wu · · ¨ ¨ i ¸ Z [Ski ] ¸ . (4.28) ¨ wx ¸ © © k ¹[ ki ] ¹ In this equations there appears the dislocation current which can be alternatively expressed by the dislocation density and its motion velocity, where the latter can be expressed by a difference of stress and stress resistance (Mataga et al. 1987, Teisseyre 2001, Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2003). Stress resistance is related to rotational deformations of grains (inner friction), but let us note that also other geometrical objects, the in-plane and out-of-plane deformations of dislocation lines; kinks and jogs (Kocks et al. 1975) hamper a motion of dislocations influencing only a coefficient at stress resistance (as the density of the objects increases with increasing dislocation density and its velocity field).

2 P lki

w Z [Sni ] wxk wxn

U

1 w2 lki 2 wt 2

Correspondence to the micropolar theory

In the micropolar theory the motion equation for a stress moment becomes mis , s isl S[ sl ] isl U L[ sl ]

U N Z(Si ) ,

(4.29)

where the isotropic inertia tensor is proportional to a square of the characteristic length; mis,s are the microstress moments. When passing to a continuum with the vanishing characteristic length and mis,s = 0, this relation becomes only stating that antisymmetric stresses depend on the body couples, e.g., on an internal rotation moments in an earthquake focus: isl S[ sl ] isl U L[ sl ] 0 , (4.30) while the acceleration of an angular motion Z(Si ) becomes related to a higher order moments as presented in the previous sections.

40


Degenerated mechanics

When the displacement motions vanish, we obtain, respectively, from relations (4.26) and (4.27): § wZ(Slk ) ¨¨ © wxk wxs

· ¸¸ ¹( ls )

1 w2 S Z( sl ) , VT2 wt 2

lki

w Z[Sni ] wxk wxn

1 w2 S Z[l ] , VR2 wt 2

(4.31)

where VT2 VR2 2 P U and the velocities for spin and twist waves are equal. For the spin motion Ȧ[s] and the bend-twist motion Ȧ(s) we can write the following conservation laws (Teisseyre 2004): w S Z[ k ] wxk and

Z

0 S (s),s

or

smn

kmn

w S Z[ mn ] wxk

w S Z( mn ) wxs

0 (4.32)

4ʌ * ,

where the symbol smn with the bold indexes means that this antisymmetric tensor is applied without permutation over these indexes. The conservation law for the bend-twist motion provides a new quantity Ƚ, which may be related to some source object, called the bending charge; its meaning will be considered in a next chapter. Relations (4.31) represent the pure bend-twist and spin transverse waves with elastic bonds; there is no attenuation under the usual assumptions as used for ideal elastic body. This case presents a kind of degenerated mechanics; usually, we consider continuum mechanics in terms of the theory with displacement field and without spin motion, but here we have a reverse situation: we have spin and bend-twist motion and no displacement field.

References BoratyĔski W, Teisseyre R (2004) Generalized continuum with defects and asymmetric stresses. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 2, 185-195 Eringen AC (1999) Microcontinuum field theories. Springer, Berlin Eringen AC, Claus WD Jr. (1970) A micromorphic approach to dislocation theory and its relation to several existing theories, fundamental aspects of dislocation theory. Nat Bur Stand (US), Spec Publ 317: II, 1023-1040 Eringen AC, Kafadar CB (1976) Polar field theories. In: Eringen AC (ed) Continuum physics, vol 4. Academic Press, New York

4


41

Eringen AC, Suhubi ES (1964) Non-linear theory of simple micro-elastic solids – I. Int J Engng Sci 2: 189-203 Kocks UF, Argon AS, Ashby MF (1975) Thermodynamics and kinetics of slip. Pergamon Press, Oxford–New York, 288 pp Kossecka E, DeWitt R (1977) Disclination kinematic. Arch Mech 29: 633-651 Kröner E (1958) Kontinuums Theories der Versetzungen und Eigenspannungen. Ergeb Angew Math, Berlin Kröner E (1981) Continuum Theory of defects. In: Balian et al (eds) Les Houches, Session XXXV, 1980, Physique des Defauts/Physics of Defects, North Holland Publ Com, Dordrecht Mataga PA, Freund LB, Hutchison JW (1987) Crack tip plasticity in dynamic fracture. J Phys Chem Solid 48: 985-1005 Muskhelishvili NI (1953) Some basic problems of the mathematical theory of elasticity. P Noordhoff Ltd, Gröningen. Nagahama H (2001) Gauge theory of dislocational electromagnetic field in earthquake preparation zone. Acta Geophys Pol 49: 4, 437-448 Shimbo M (1975) A geometrical formulation of asymmetric features in plasticity. Bull Fac Eng, Hokkaido Univ 77: 155-159 Shimbo M (1995) Non-Riemannian geometrical approach to deformation and friction. In: R Teisseyre (ed) Theory of earthquake premonitory and fracture processes, PWN, Warszawa, pp 520-528 Shimbo M, Kawaguchi M (1976) A note on the asymmetric fields. Bull Fac Eng, Hokkaido Univ 80: 75-79 (in Japanese) Teisseyre R (1986) Thermal stresses. In: Teisseyre R (ed) Continuum theories in solid earth physics, PWN, Warszawa – Elsevier, Amsterdam, pp 322-352 Teisseyre R (1997) Dislocation-stress relations and evolution of dislocation fields. Acta Geophys Pol 45: 3, 205-214 Teisseyre R (2001) Evolution, propagation and diffusion of dislocation fields. In: Teisseyre R, Majewski E (eds) Earthquake thermodynamics and phase transformations in the earth’s interior (vol. 76 of International Geophysical Series), Academic Press, San Diego, pp 167-198 Teisseyre R (2002) Continuum with defect and self-rotation nuclei. Acta Geophys Pol 50: 1, 51-68 Teisseyre R (2004) Spin and twist motions in a homogeneous elastic continuum and cross-band geometry of fracturing. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 2, 173-183 Teisseyre R, BoratyĔski W (2002) Continua with self-rotation nuclei: evolution of defect fields and equations of motion. Acta Geophys Pol 50: 2, 223-229 Teisseyre R, BoratyĔski W (2003) Continua with self-rotation nuclei: evolution of asymmetric fields. Mech Res Com 30: 235-240 Teisseyre R, Kozák J (2003) Considerations on the seismic rotation effects. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 3, 243-256 Teisseyre R, Yamashita T (1999) Splitting stress motion equation into seismic wave and fault-related fields. Acta Geophys Pol 47: 1, 135-147

5 Degenerated Asymmetric Continuum Theory Roman Teisseyre, Mariusz Biaáecki, Marek Górski Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland e-mails: [email protected]; [email protected]

5.1 Introduction We define the degenerated mechanics as that in which the displacement motions are neglected and only the spin and bend-twist motions can exist as the only independent elastic fields (Teisseyre 2005, Teisseyre et al. 2005). We consider the spin and twist motions in a homogeneous continuum. This case is opposite to that of the classic ideal elasticity. The appropriate constitutive laws support the existence of an elastic response due to the rotational deformations of bonds in a lattice network. We introduce a system of potentials which would help us to understand the waves and geometrical features of degenerated mechanics and its Riemannian geometry. Figure 5.1 presents the bond deformations related to rotation of grains for a spin motion and for shears. A geometrical description of the other type

Fig. 5.1 Deformation of the bond caused by rotation of grains for a spin motion (left) and for shear strains (right)

44 R. Teisseyre, M. Biaáecki, M. Górski

of axial deformation, the bend-twist (Teisseyre 2004, 2005), will be given at the end of this chapter. The bonds related to rotational deformations can be considered to be weaker than those related to elastic rigidity moduli. As explained in the former chapter the total rotation is equal to the sum of elastic rotation and self-rotation fields. However, when displacements vanish, the total rotation, as represented by the antisymmetric tensor, vanishes too:

ZkiT

Zki ZkiS

0,

ZkiS .

Zki

(5.1)

The antisymmetric part of the self-rotation field, Z[Ski ] Z[ ki ] , gives rise to a proper rotation motion (spin), while its symmetric part, Z (Ski ) Z ( ki ) , relates to the symmetric axial motion called the bend-twist motion. The self-fields related to rotation nuclei Z kiS present the possible sources of rotation processes and bring us to a world of asymmetric continuum. The antisymmetric stresses correspond to stress moments (see Teisseyre 2005). The bend-twist deformations present the grain deformations caused by elastic strain; however, when considering the grains as the “rigid” points of continuum, such bend-twist deformation converts to a kind of a 3D space curvature, see further on. In a degenerated continuum, the asymmetric self-rotation is exactly opposite to an asymmetric elastic rotation, ȦS = –Ȧ. Vector representations of the spin and bend-twist tensors are as follows:

Z[ s ]

1 2

smn Z[ mn ]

smn Z[mn ] ,

Z( s)

smn Z (mn ) ,

(5.2)

where we introduced a convention for the bold indexes in the skewtensor smn which means that a permutation over these indexes is excluded (no sum over the bold indexes in smn Z ( mn ) , so such a product of the antisymmetric and symmetric tensors does not vanish). The conservation laws for the spin and twist-bend fields can be written as follows:

Z[ s ], s

0

and

Z ( s ), s

4ʌ *

(5.3)

Scalar field ī is defined as a divergence of the bend-twist vector and becomes related to a possible space curvature; such a curvature can represent a matter or its density field.

5

Degenerated Asymmetric Continuum Theory

Considering now the complex field Z s nuity law

³³

kps

(Z[ s ], p iZ ( s ), p ) dsk

§ w

³³ ¨© iV wt (Z

[k ]

45

Z[ s ] iZ ( k ) , we have the conti· iZ ( k ) ) 4ʌI k ¸ dsk , ¹

(5.4)

where the current Ik is introduced as related to the scalar field ī. From this relation we get:

kps

w 1 Z[ s ] Z ( k ) wx p V

4ʌI k ,

kps

w 1 Z( s ) Z[ k ] wx p V

0.

(5.5)

The introduced velocity V is related to the rotation rigidity modulus µ* as follows: V 2 = 2µ*/ȡ In these equations, when considering the moving frames, we may assume the relativistic way for a sum of velocities and, therefore, when velocity V will approach c, we obtain a complete similarity between the degenerated mechanics with the formalism of EM theory (Ȧ[s] = Bs, Ȧ(s) = Es, Ik = Jk, q = ȡ, V = c). However, further on we will consider some special cases of the degenerated mechanics being distinctly different. From relations (5.5) we get the wave equations:

w2 1 w2 Z [ k ] 2 2 Z[ k ] V wt wxn wxn w2 1 w2 Z(k ) 2 2 Z(k ) V wt wxn wxn

4ʌ w kps Is , V wx p

(5.6)

4ʌ w I 4ʌ * 2 k V wxk

(5.7)

However, Eq. (5.7) differs from that derived by Teisseyre (2005) from the motion equations for the symmetric and asymmetric stresses with the displacement and rotation motions existing together; when reducing the above-mentioned motion equations to the case with the vanishing displacement field u = 0 (see Eqs. (35) and (37) in Teisseyre 2005) we would obtain the equation different from Eq. (5.7). The explanation of these facts is the following: the former equations, supplemented additionally with some body angular moments :[l ] and :( k ) , had the following form: w 1 w2 Z [ l ] 2 2 Z[ l ] V wt wxn wxn

:[ l ] ,

(5.8)


§ wZ( lk ) · 1 w2 Z( sl ) ¨ ¸ 2 2 © wxk wxs ¹( sl ) V wt

lsk :( k )

(5.9)

(lsk: no permutation for ls) . Equations (5.8) and (5.9) were derived under the assumption of additional constitutive laws for rotation motion and related stresses, which for the case when the displacement field is neglected reduce to the following:

S[Sik ]

2 P Z[Sik ]

2P Z[ ik ] ,

(5.10)

S(Sts )

2 P Z (Sts )

2 P Z ( ts ) .

(5.11)

The first of these represents the Shimbo (1975, 1995) law for the antisymmetric stresses and internal friction related to rotation of grains, while the second relates to a strain caused by the grain deformation (the deformable grains constituting the continuum, similar to that of the micromorphic type). The spin motion (5.8) coincides with (5.6) when putting

:[ l ]

4ʌ w lps Is . c wx p

We have mentioned that the second relation for the bend-twist motion (Eq. 5.9) remains different in an essential way from that derived in the present paper (Eq. 5.7). The only reason is the choice of the constitutive law for bend-twist deformation and self-stress (5.11), having the same form as for the spin field (5.10), as proposed in the former paper (see Eq. 26 in Teisseyre 2005). However, when constructing a consistent theory for the degenerated motion, including the continuity law (5.3), we are forced to introduce, instead of (5.11), the new constitutive law for the symmetric part of rotation tensor and self-stresses: § w S · S( tn ) ¸ ¨ © wxs ¹( ts ) or

G

si

S(Stn )

( ts )

§ wZ( ts ) · 2P ¨ ¸ © wxn ¹

2 P G niZ ( ts )

2 P G niZ (Sts ) .

(5.12)

(5.12a)

Such a relation permits to describe properly the space curvature for a medium with non-deformable volume elements (point rigid-grains forming a continuum).

5


47

With the new constitutive relation (5.12) we obtain a new form of motion equation wZ ( k ) wxn wxn which for : ( k )

1 w2 Z(k ) V 2 wt 2

:(k ) ,

(5.13)

4ʌ I k 4ʌ * , k coincides exactly with (5.7). c2

Antisymmetric potentials for rotation motions

We define a set of 3D vector potentials A s and Aˆ s , and the current potentials \s and M in the following way (Teisseyre et al. 2005): Z[ k ]

kbs A s ,b ,

4ʌ Ik V

Z( k ) M,k

kbs Aˆ s ,b ,

1 1 M, k kbs \ s ,b , V V

A s , s

M ,kk

Aˆ s , s

0,

4ʌ* ,

0,

(5.14) (5.15)

where we can define the vector current potentials \s and M acccording to the relation 4ʌ ndk I k ,d

ndkkbs \ ,bd

\ n , ss ,

\ s,s

0.

(5.16)

The potentials A s and Aˆ s may be related to the axial motions in the 6D space geometry see further on. According to the spin and bend-twist motion equations (5.5) and (5.3), we shall put for the potentials defined by Eq. (5.14): 1 w kbs A s ,b Ak

1 \k , V

Aˆb ,b

0,

(5.17)

1 w ˆ kbs Aˆ s ,b Ak

0,

Ab ,b

0.

(5.18)

V wt

V wt

As we know, the tensor of the EM field can be constructed from the EM vector fields, Bs and Es. In a similar manner we can proceed with the 4D tensor fields ZPQ ; according to definitions (5.2) and (5.5), we can write such tensors in the moving frame xP = {xm , iVt} as follows:


Z PQ

Z [ PQ ] iZ ( PQ ) ,

(5.19)

Z ( z ) Z ( y ) iZ[ x ] º ª 0 Z[ z ] Z[ y ] iZ ( x ) º ª 0 « Z » « Z ( x ) iZ[ y ] »» 0 « [ z ] 0 Z[ x ] iZ ( y ) » i « Z ( z ) . « Z[ y ] Z[ x ] 0 iZ ( z ) » « Z ( y ) Z ( x ) 0 iZ[ z ] » « » « » 0 ¼» «¬ iZ[ x ] iZ[ y ] iZ[ z ] 0 ¼» ¬« iZ ( x ) iZ ( y ) iZ ( z )

Z PQ

Now we may construct the complex antisymmetric tensor for potentials ADE : ADE

ADE iAˆDE ,

(5.20)

ª 0 A3 A 2 iAˆ1 º ª 0 Aˆ3 Aˆ 2 « » « « A3 0 A1 iAˆ 2 » 0 Aˆ1 « Aˆ i« 3 « » « A2 A1 0 iAˆ3 » « Aˆ 2 Aˆ1 0 « ˆ » « iA iA iA ˆ ˆ 2 3 ¬ 1 ¬ iA1 iA2 iA3 0 ¼

ADE

iA1 º » iA 2 » » iA3 » 0 »¼

or ª 0 A3 A2 A1 º « » « A3 0 A1 A2 » , « A2 A1 0 A3 » « » «¬ A1 A2 A3 0 »¼

ADE

Ak

A k iAˆ k .

(5.21)

According to (5.17) and (5.18), the tensor ADE fulfils the conditions: ADE , E

1 \D , V

\D

{\ k , 0}

(5.22)

leading to the wave equations:

, An

Jn ,

A s , s

0,

, Aˆn

Jˆn ,

Aˆ s , s

0,

(5.23)

where Jn

1 ndk \ k ,d , V

When defining the tensor JDE

Jˆk

1 w \k . V 2 wt

(5.24)

5


ª 0 J 3 J 2 J1 º « » « J 3 0 J1 J 2 » , « J 2 J1 0 J 3 » « » ¬« J1 J 2 J 3 0 »¼

JDE

Jn

49

Jn i Jˆn

(5.25)

we arrive at the relation

, ADE

JDE .

(5.26)

Applying the operator sbn w wxb we obtain Eqs. (5.6) and (5.7).

5.2 Transition to Symmetric Tensor of Potentials We will present now a way how to arrive at the symmetric tensor of potentials in order to combine it with the 4D metric tensor gDE. We introduce the new potentials N s N s iNˆ s fulfilling the additional conditions:

Ns

skn ȍn , k ,

:1 4,1 ,

:2 4,2 ,

(5.27)

which reduce these potentials to the 2D form: NS with S = {1, 2}, as N3 = 0. It also follows from (5.27) that

N S ,S

N1,1 N 2,2

(5.28)

0

and we postulate the following bridge relations to the formerly defined potentials:

kbs A s ,b ,

kbs N s ,b

kbs Nˆ s ,b

kbs Aˆ s ,b .

(5.29)

With these conditions, we introduce the natural symmetric tensor of potentials in the 4D form:

N DE iNˆ DE ,

NDE

,NDE

ª 0 « 0 , «« N2 « ¬ N1

0 0 N1

N2 N1

N2

0

0

N1 º N 2 »» 0 » » 0 ¼

YN

YN iYˆN ,

Y DE

ª 0 « 0 « « Y2 « ¬ Y1

(5.30) 0 0 Y1

Y2 Y1

Y2

0

0

Y1 º Y2 »» . (5.31) 0 » » 0 ¼


Similarly, we shall define the 2D vector of current potentials KK which shall fulfil the following bridge relation to the previously defined current potentials \s (Eq. 5.22):

K 1,3

2bs \ s ,b , K 2,3

1bs \ s ,b , K 1,2 K 2,1

3dk \ k ,d

(5.32)

and, instead of relations (5.24) for currents JN and JˆN , we have introduced the new definitions: 1 K 1,3 c

Y2 ,

1 K 2,3 V

Y1 ,

1 w KN V wt

YˆN .

(5.33)

Having these bridge relations we obtain, similarly to (5.22)–(5.24), the following equations for the 4D symmetric potentials for spin and bend-twist motions, Zs = Z[s] + iZ(k) , and the related current potentials KD = {KK, 0, 0}:

, N N

YN

1 NdK KK , d , V 1 NDE , E KD , V

, Nˆ N , NDE

YˆN

1 w KN , V 2 wt

(5.34)

YDE .

We will show, further on, that all these symmetric matrices are the tensors related to the J -Dirac tensors. Space curvature and complex metric tensor

The tensor of potentials (5.31) can be written as follows:

NDE

ª0 «0 N 1 « «0 « ¬ 1

0 0 1º ª0 » 0 1 0 » «« 0 N2 « 1 1 0 0» » « 0 0 0¼ ¬0

0 1 0 º 0 0 1»» 0 0 0» » 1 0 0 ¼ (5.35)

ª0 «0 Nˆ 1 « «0 « ¬ i

0 0 i º ª0 » 0 i 0 » ˆ «« 0 N2 « i i 0 0» » « 0 0 0¼ ¬0

0 i 0 º 0 0 i »» 0 0 0» » i 0 0 ¼

5


51

or NDE

N 1 1 N 2 2 iNˆ 1 1 iNˆ 2 2

N1 1 N 2 2 .

(5.36)

The complimentary tensors are:

3

ª0 0 0 iº « 0 0 i 0» « », « 0 i 0 0 » « » ¬ i 0 0 0 ¼

ªi º «0 i 0 0 » « ». « 0 0 i 0 » « » ¬ 0 0 0 i ¼

4

(5.37)

The matrices Q fulfil the conditions for the J-Dirac matrices for the Minkovski-like space: xP

^ xm , iVt` ,

dS 2

D E E D

dxk dxk V 2 dt dt ,

(5.38)

2KDE .

(5.39)

However, when disturbing these matrices in the way indicated below

J 1 (1 N1 ) 1 ,

J2

(1 N 2 ) 2 , J 3

3 , J 4

4

(5.40)

we obtain the known relation for the Dirac matrices:

J DJ E J E J D

2 g DE .

(5.41)

Thus, we have the complex disturbances N1 and N2 as the first order disturbances to the metric tensor:

g DE

0 ª1 2 N1 « 0 1 2N2 | « « 0 0 « 0 ¬ 0

0 0º 0 0 »» . 1 0» » 0 1¼

(5.42)

Note that the tensor YDE can be also built with the help of the Dirac tensors: YDE

Y1 1 Y2 2 iYˆ1 1 iYˆ2 2

(5.43)

and we might be able to consider the Einstein-like relations for our degenerated mechanics, but we prefer to avoid such considerations as being, too abstract (see Teisseyre 2005, Teisseyre et al. 2005). We shall only note that, instead of the 4D presentation, it was also possible to present our relations in the 2D forms with the tensor


ª N2 «N ¬ 1

N AB

N1 º N 2 »¼

and with the help of the 2D Pauli tensors

V1

ª 0 i º «i 0 » , V3 ¬ ¼

ª0 1 º «1 0 » , V 2 ¬ ¼

ª1 0 º «0 1» . ¬ ¼

5.3 Special Case As we already metioned, our considerations relate the moving frame xP = {xm , iVt}. Let us consider a very special case with vanishing of the currents; according to (5.15) this assumption requires to put

M,k

\s

0,

0,

KS

0.

(5.44)

For such a case, our equations become w2 1 w2 Z[ k ] 2 2 Z[ k ] wxn wxn V wt

w2 1 w2 Z(k ) 2 2 Z(k ) wxn wxn V wt

0,

4ʌ

w *. wxk

(5.45)

For the antisymmetric potentials, we shall change Eqs. (5.14) and (5.15) for rotation motions as follows:

Z[ k ] M, k

kbs A s ,b , 0,

M ,kk

Z ( k ) M,k

kbs Aˆ s ,b ,

4ʌ * .

(5.46)

The potential M corresponds to the classic gravity-like potential; the field * when related to a space curvature can be assumed to be positive-definite. When introducing the natural symmetric tensor of potentials as before (Eq. 5.31) and the related conditions (5.27)–(5.29), we obtain, instead of (5.34), the following equations: NS E ,E

0,

, NDE

0

(5.47)

and, as mentioned above, the complex disturbances N1 and N2 which fit the Dirac-type presentation can be combined with the disturbances to metric tensor gDE (Eq. 5.42); for the scalar of curvature tensor (3D Riemannian geometry) we obtain for this special case

5


R

h QD

Q D

h QQ

D D

2, N1 2, N 2

53

0.

(5.48)

5.4 Conclusions The conservation and balance laws for spin and twist fields and the stressrelated equations of motion for symmetric and antisymmetric parts of stresses can be treated as source functions describing the spin and twist processes accompanying the fracture processes. For the related rotation waves, of spin and twist type, there is no attenuation as for the ideal elastic waves; these motions are accompanied by the related rotational vibration of the points of continuum. The degenerated continuum mechanics leads to deformations of the Euclidean space into a Riemannian one and can be described by the complex equations similar, in the form, to that for the EM fields and may, when assuming the special case of the theory, describe also the classic gravity. With a new constitutive law joining the self-rotations with asymmetric stresses, we can evade an influence of the Hook law, which in the ideal elasticity rules out an existence of the rotation waves, even in a homogeneous elastic continuum. Thus, it is not true that in a homogeneous elastic continuum the rotation vibrations are automatically attenuated and ruled out. An alternative way to introduce the rotation motions, based on a concept of the asymmetric continuum with dislocation and disclination densities and rotation nuclei, was presented in our former papers (Teisseyre 2001, 2002, Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2003); here, we show that even in a uniform continuum such rotational vibrations and waves exist and are not attenuated in contrast to displacement motion in the ideal elasticity. The other important conclusion is that the influence of rotational processes in earthquake sources outside the fracture is theoretically not attenuated in a homogeneous continuum, unlike in the case of classical ideal elasticity, and the related waves can propagate to distant sites. Figure 5.2 presents the bending of a flat circuit surface related to a bend-twist deformation as limited to the 2D space but with curvature into the third direction; this is a simplified illustration for the bend-twist deformation of a sphere becoming affected with a Riemannian curvature and a continuum of such points obeys the constitutive law (5.12). An illustration of the considered bending for a 2D continuum is presented in Fig. 5.3. This figure relates to the 2D surface with the axial convexities/concavities


Fig. 5.2 The bending of a flat circuit surface into the perpendicular direction: simplified illustration for the deformation of a sphere affected by a Riemannian curvature

oriented along the perpendicular axis; in a reality we shall apply such a scheme to the 3D space obtaining the bending deformation forming the Riemannian curvature. Such a curvature vanishes for Yk = 0 and * = 0. In 3D, similar bending-type deformations might be considered for a lattice with two different types of the alternating nodes representing the opposite ions. A bending deformation caused by an electric field will appear on a surface as the alternating knob-convexities and socket-concavities. A slightly different effect will appear when considering an elastic deformation in a lattice with two different types of the alternating nodes characterized by the bonds of different elastic moduli; the respective bendings will appear on a surface with the knobs/sockets (convexities/concavities) of different intensities in an alternating way. Our relations present a new approach for obtaining the Riemannian description of geometrical deformations related to the bend-twist motions.

Fig. 5.3 A continuum subject to deformations with axial convexities/concavities as presented in Fig. 5.2; deformation such a 2D surface is a simplified illustration of deformation of the 3D space

5


55

References Kröner E (1981) Continuum theory of defects. In: Balian R, Kléman M, Poirer JP (eds) Physics of defects, (Proc Les Houches XXXV). North Holland Publ Comp, Amsterdam Shimbo M (1975) A geometrical formulation of asymmetric features in plasticity. Bull Fac Eng Hokkaido Univ 77: 155-159 Shimbo M (1995) Non-Riemannian geometrical approach to deformation and friction. In: Teisseyre R (ed) Theory of earthquake premonitory and fracture processes. Polish Scientific Publishers PWN, Warszawa, pp 520-528 Teisseyre R (2001) Evolution, propagation and diffusion of dislocation fields. In: Teisseyre R, Majewski E (eds) Earthquake thermodynamics and phase transformations in the earth’s interior (vol. 76 of International Geophysical Series). Academic Press, San Diego, pp 167-198 Teisseyre R (2002) Continuum with defect and self-rotation nuclei. Acta Geophys Pol 50: 1, 51-68 Teisseyre R (2004) Spin and twist motions in a homogeneous elastic continuum and cross-band geometry of fracturing. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 2, 173-183 Teisseyre R (2005) Asymmetric continuum mechanics: deviations from elasticity and symmetry. Acta Geophys Pol 53: 2, 115-126. Teisseyre R, Biaáecki M (2005) Complex relativity: gravity and electromagnetic fields. arXiv:physics/0506033 Teisseyre R, BoratyĔski W (2003) Continua with self-rotation nuclei: evolution of asymmetric fields. Mech Res Commun 30: 235-240 Teisseyre R, Biaáecki M, Górski M (2005) Degenerated mechanics in a homogeneous continuum potentials. Acta Geophys Pol 53: 3, 219-230

6 Continuum with Rotation Nuclei and Defects: Dislocation and Disclination Densities 1,2 1 Wojciech BoratyĔski , Roman Teisseyre 1


2


6.1 Introduction In Chapter 4 we have considered rotation motions related to dynamical processes in a homogeneous continuum, and here we will study deformations of rotational type related to a structure of defects in the elastic continuum. A defect distribution may include, among others, the dislocation and disclination densities and rotation nuclei. We take into account two kinds of rotation nuclei as related to the two approaches to the definition of the twist-bend tensor. In this theory, the elastic and self-fields of stresses and strains become asymmetric, while the total fields remain related to displacement field as required by the compatibility conditions. However, the tensor of incompatibility becomes asymmetric. The antisymmetric stresses play a role of stress moments. We derive the dislocation stress relations and the equations of motion for the symmetric and antisymmetric parts of stresses. Special attention is paid to spin and bend-twist motions. After Chapter 4 we repeat that according to the Kröner method (Kröner 1981), the elastic strains, rotations and distortions in a continuum with defects can be expressed as a difference between the total and self-fields:

E E T ES ,

Z ZT ZS ,

(6.1)

58 W. BoratyĔski, R. Teisseyre

E E T ES ,

S S T SS .

The elastic strains, rotations and stresses become asymmetric and the respective deviations are mutually compensated:

E[ ] E[S ]

0,

Z( ) ZS( )

S[ ] S[S ]

0,

0.

(6.1a)

In our approach, the asymmetry of fields follows from the notion of antisymmetric stresses introduced by Shimbo (1975, 1995) and Shimbo and Kawaguchi (1976) and related to the friction processes and rotation of grains. Fracture processes develop usually along the main fault plane; hence, there appears the initial asymmetry of the fracture pattern (Teisseyre and Kozak 2003); due to friction, the rotation of grains adjacent to the main slip plane gives rise to the antisymmetric part of stresses and the bend-twist deformations. We define the self-rotation tensor Ȗ by deviations from the total rotation:

J sn

ZsnS ,

ZsnT

Zsn ZsnS

Zsn J sn .

(6.2)

In our former papers (Teisseyre 2001, Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2002) we introduced the following definition of the twist-bend tensor: T F mq

ksq

T wZmk , wxs

(6.3)

where again the total field splits into the elastic and self parts T F mq

S . F mq F mq

(6.4)

The above definition differs from that introduced earlier by Kossecka and DeWitt (1977) and related to gradient of the rotation vector T F mq

wZqT

1

wxm

2

nsq

wZnsT . wxm

(6.5)

Their definition led, in direct calculations, to vanishing of both the Frank vector (Kossecka and DeWitt 1977) and the disclination density. These two definitions, (6.3) and (6.5), may describe two different types of rotation nuclei; Kossecka and DeWitt’s definition directly leads to the pure rotation nuclei only, while Teisseyre’s definition describes nuclei which can undergo the rotation and bend-twist vibrations and includes the non-vanishing Frank vector and disclination density. The total fields related to these two definitions coincide (apart of the sign):

5

Continuum with Rotation Nuclei and Defects: Dislocation and Disclination 59

T F mq

T F mq

(6.6)

hence, we can combine these two kinds of rotation nuclei, putting a b 1. We obtain

F

T mq

aF

T mq

b F

T mq

a

wZqT wxm

b ksq

T wZmk wxs

(6.7)

or T F mq

T T a F mq b F mq

S S a F mq b F mq a F mq bF mq ,

(6.8)

where for the material parameters a and b we have a 1, 0 ! , b 0,1 ! ; for b = 0 and a = –1 we get Kossecka and DeWitt’s continuum (Kossecka and DeWitt 1977), while for a = 0 and b = 1 we have Teisseyre’s continuum (Teisseyre 2001). The incompatibility tensor splits into symmetric and antisymmetric parts; for the symmetric part we write the classical forms (Kossecka and DeWitt 1977):

I ( ij )

ikm jtn

w 2 E( mn )

ikm jtn

wxk wxt

S w 2 E(mn)

wxk wxt

,

(6.9)

wD qk wD pk · 1§ (6.10) ¨ pmk T pq qmk T qp ¸ , wxm wxm 2© ¹ where Į and ș are the dislocation and disclination densities, as introduced in the next section. In the elastic continuum with rotations nuclei we introduce the bonds for point rotations by assuming after Shimbo (1975 and 1995) the antisymmetric stresses related to the friction processes, 1 S 1 J [lk ] Z [Slk ] E [Slk ] S S[ lk ] , (6.11) * [ lk ] 2P 2P *

I ( pq )

where P * is a rotation rigidity modulus. Similarly, we assume for symmetric parts (cf. Eq. 5.12):

G ni J (ts )

G ni Z(ts )

1 2P *

G

si

S(Stn )

( ts )

,

(6.12)

Hence, combining (6.12) with (6.11) we obtain: S J mn Zmn

S Emn .

(6.13)


In analogy to relation (6.9), we put for the antisymmetric part of the incompatibility tensor:

ikm jtn

I[ ij ]

S w 2 E[mn]

wxk wxt

ikm jtn

w 2J [ mn ] wxk wxt

.

(6.14)

Our considerations, related to the defect distribution, dislocations, disclinations and rotation nuclei, contain some partial results presented by Kossecka and DeWitt (1977), Teisseyre (2002), Teisseyre and BoratyĔski (2002, 2003), but some modifications and corrections have been necessary. When deriving the equations of motion, we follow the approach of Teisseyre and Yamashita (1999) and Teisseyre (2001); the equations of motion split into the symmetric and antisymmetric parts, the latter prevailing on the fracture plane.

6.2 Defect Density Fields Following Kossecka and De Witt (1977), we define the total disclosure and twist along a closed circuit (the Burgers vector and the Frank vector) as related to the symmetric part of plastic/self strain and self twist-bend tensors: Bl

v³ ª¬ E(Skl ) lqr F kqS xr º¼ dlk ,

v³ F kqS d lk .

:q

(6.15)

From (15), the dislocation and disclination densities become

D pl Bl

T pq

§ wE(Skl ) · S pmk ¨ klq F mq ¸¸ , ¨ wx m © ¹ ³³ D pl lqr T pq xr d s p , pmk

wF kqS w xm

,

:q

³³ T

pq

ds p .

(6.16)

(6.17)

Further, we obtain

D pl

pmk

wE(Skl ) w xm

G pl F qqS F lpS .

(6.18)

From the definitions of the twist-bend tensor (6.6) and (6.7) it follows that:

5


– for the elastic part 1

a F mq bF mq

F mq

2

a nsq

wZns wZmk , b ksq wxm wxs

(6.19)

wJ ns wJ b nsq mn . wxm wxs

(6.20)

– for the self-part S F mq

1

S S a F mq b F mq

2

a nsq

From these relations and with the help of (6.12) and (6.13) we obtain the following formulae for dislocation and disclination densities:

D pl

a pmk pmk b

T pq

b pmkqns

wJ [ kl ] wxm

G plqmk b

wJ qk wxm

wJ wJ lk pmk ( kl ) , wxm wxm

w 2J ks , wxm wxn

wD pl wx p

wF qqS wxl

(6.21)

wF lpS wx p

0,

(6.22)

with the conditions

wD pl wx p

lpq T pq

0

and

wT pq wx p

0.

(6.23)

We shall note that, as we have mentioned above, in Kossecka and DeWitt’s continuum the direct computation leads to vanishing of disclination velocity; hence, Kossecka and DeWitt (1977) have further assumed . that spin velocity w differs from the time derivative of rotation: w z Z S This approach and the assumption that the self twist-bend tensor F mq is not equal to wZqS wxm , leads to another definition of disclination density rate T ; however, further on, we follow our simple approach in which . w=Z Returning to the expressions for the incompatibility tensors, the symmetric (6.10) and antisymmetric (6.14), we can now write I pq

§ ª w (D qk F kqS ) · wF kqS º ¨ pmk « pmk ¸ » . ¨ ¸ wxm wxm ¼»[ pq ] © ¹( pq ) ¬«

(6.24)


From the compatibilities for the total fields (see: Kossecka and DeWitt 1977, and Teisseyre 2001) we arrive at deviations for the self-fields which help us to define the related currents; we obtain – for the dislocation current J kl

wXlS E (Skl ) bJ( kl ) akls Js wxk

wXlS (1 b)J( kl ) aJ[ kl ] , wxk

(6.25)

where, according to (6.13), E (Skl ) is related to the introduced bend-twist motion; – for the disclination current Ykq

bnsq

wJ( sk ) wJkn bqns wxs wxn

bnsq

wJ[ ks ] wxn

.

(6.26)

The self-twist motions are the sources of disclinations and contribute to the formation of dislocation fields. From these relations, there follow the conservation laws:

D pl pmk

T pq pmk

wJ kl pmk klq Ymq wxm

wYkq wxm

b pmk qns

0,

w 2J( ks )

(6.27)

0.

wxm wxn

(6.28)

The continuity relations are very similar to those obtained by Kossecka and DeWitt (1977), except of the last term in Eq. (6.28). As to the dislocation current, we may also estimate it independently; according to Teodosiu (1970) and Teisseyre (2001) we obtain J pk

cqmk D qp Vm ,

(6.29)

where V is the dislocation flow velocity. Several attempts have been made to estimate such a velocity. Using the expression derived by Mataga et al. (1987), we obtain the following equation for the dislocation density flow: Vm

qmk

D kl D kl

S ql Rql ( S R)2 R 2

,

(6.30)

5


where S is the stress field; R is the resistance stress, cB = bR (B is the drag coefficient, b is the Burgers vector of dislocation), ȣm and Vm = ȣm/c are, respectively, the dislocation velocity and relative dislocation velocity with respect to the shear wave velocity.

6.3 Dislocation–Stress Relations For incompatibility tensor we have two equivalent expressions: the one given by Eq. (6.24) and the other obtained from the stress-strain relations (the classical relation for symmetric stresses and Eq. (6.15) for the antisymmetric stresses with the Poisson ratio Q):

pmk

I pq

w qnl wxm

§ · P v w ¨ S( kl ) * S[ kl ] G kl Sii ¸ P 1 v © ¹ . wxn

(6.31)

Comparing this expression with (6.24) for the state of equilibrium we can derive from the dislocation-stress relations (cf. Teisseyre 2001; in the paper by Teisseyre 2002, a similar derivation procedure is presented separately for the screw and edge dislocations; however, in the formula for screw dislocations the term S(kl) has been erroneously omitted): 1 2

1 snl 2P

D sk D tt G sk

§ · P v w ¨ S( kl ) * S[ kl ] G kl Sii ¸ P 1 v © ¹ , wxn

(6.32)

– for screw dislocations

D sk

1

P

snl

§ · P w ¨ S( kl ) * S[ kl ] ¸ P © ¹ , sok wxn

(6.32a)

– for edge dislocations

D sk

1 snl 2P

§ · P v w ¨ S( kl ) * S[ kl ] G kl Sii ¸ P 1 v © ¹ , szk. wxn

(6.32b)


6.4 Equations of Motion 6.4.1 Symmetric stresses

The right-hand side of the equation of motion in a continuum with defects can be expressed by a difference between the total and self accelerations (Kossecka and DeWitt 1977): w Slk wxk

U

w Xl , wt

w Xl wt

w T w Xl XlS , wt wt

(6.33)

where stresses are understood as the symmetric ones. Plastic velocity ȣS is related to the dislocation velocity, but its symmetrized space derivatives may differ from the rate of plastic strains. Taking the space derivative of this relation and symmetrizing the result we can arrive at

§ w · S( lk ) ¸ ¨ © wxk wxs ¹( ls )

U

w2 T w§ w S· E( ls ) ¨ Xl ¸ 2 wt wt © wxs ¹( ls )

and with the help of (6.1) and (6.25) we get

§ w · S( lk ) ¸ ¨ © wxk wxs ¹( ls )

U

w2 w E( sl ) U J ( sl ) bJ( sl ) , 2 wt wt

(6.34)

where the right-hand side contains the propagation and diffusion terms; the dislocation current can be estimated from relations (6.29) and (6.30) while the dislocation density from (6.32). These equations can be expressed by displacement motion and self rotations; from § w · ( S(Tlk ) S(Slk ) ) ¸ ¨ © wxk wxs ¹( ls )

U

w2 T w E( ls ) U J ( sl ) (1 b) J( sl ) 2 wt wt

we obtain wJ ( sl ) · § w wuk w wul P 2P * ¨ (O P ) ¸ wxl wxs wxk wxk wxk wxs wxk wxk ¹ ©

U

wus · w 2 § wul w 0S ¸ U J ( sl ) E ( sl ) (1 b)J( sl ) 2 ¨ wt © 2wxs wt 2wxl ¹

(6.35)

5


and for vanishing of displacement motion and other self-fields we obtain for the bend-twist waves (cf. Chap. 4): 2P *

wJ ( sl ) wxk wxk

U (1 b)

w2 J ( sl ) , wt 2

2P * . U (1 b)

VT2

(6.36)

These equations lead further to a classical displacement-type equation with additional source function. The waves presented have no attenuation under the assumptions used for the ideal elastic bodies. 6.4.2 Antisymmetric stresses

For antisymmetric stresses we shall apply the balance law expressing an equality of the change of rotation of force acting on a body element equal to the acceleration of rotation

lki

w S[ in ] wxk wxn

U

w2 lki Z[ik ] . wt 2

(6.37)

Another form of this equation determines the relation of the total rotations with field Ȗ[ki]

4P *

w J [ ik ] wxn wxn

U

· wu w 2 § wui k 2J [ ik ] ¸ . 2 ¨ wt © wxk wxi ¹

(6.38)

For vanishing displacement motion we obtain for the spin waves the formula, presented already in the former chapter: 2P *

w J [ik ] wxn wxn

U

w2 J [ik ] , VR2 wt 2

2P *

U

.

(6.39)

6.5 Discussion We have shown that a defect continuum with dislocations and disclinations may lead to structural deformations of rotation type; in a dynamical case these deformations contribute to formation of spin and bend-twist waves. When assuming that self-rotation fields are the only sources of distortions, it seems possible to estimate the counterparts a and b in the twistbend tensor. However, this is not exactly true taking into account an arbitrary definition of the bend-twist modulus as equal to the rotation rigidity


modulus in Eq. (6.12). Nevertheless, studying differences of the bend-twist wave velocities (see: Eq. 6.36) for different samples – in the sense of different deformation history, and consequently different defect content – we may relate such velocity differences to the different b-values.

References Kossecka E, DeWitt R (1977) Disclination kinematics. Arch Mech 29: 633-651 Kröner E (1981) Continuum theory of defects. In: Balian R, Kléman M, Poirer JP (eds) Les Houches, Session XXXV, 1980, Physics of defects, North Holland Publ Comp, Amsterdam. Mataga PA, Freund LB, Hutchison JW (1987) Crack tip plasticity in dynamic fracture. J Phys Chem Solid 48: 985-1005 Shimbo M (1975) A geometrical formulation of asymmetric features in plasticity. Bull Fac Eng, Hokkaido Univ 77: 155-159 (in Japanese) Shimbo M (1995) Non-Riemannian geometrical approach to deformation and friction. In: Teisseyre R (ed) Theory of earthquake premonitory and fracture processes, pp 520-528, PWN, Warszawa Shimbo M, Kawaguchi M (1976) A note on the asymmetric fields. Bull Fac Eng, Hokkaido Univ 80: 75-79 (in Japanese) Teisseyre R (2001) Evolution, propagation and diffusion of dislocation fields. In: Teisseyre R, Majewski E (eds) Earthquake thermodynamics and phase transformations in the earth’s interior (vol 76 of Intern Geophys Series), pp 167198, Academic Press, San Diego Teisseyre R (2002) Continuum with defect and self-rotation nuclei. Acta Geophys Pol 50: 51-68 Teisseyre R, BoratyĔski W (2002) Continua with self-rotation nuclei: evolution of defect fields and equations of motion. Acta Geophys Pol 50: 223-229 Teisseyre R, BoratyĔski W (2003) Continua with self-rotation nuclei: evolution of asymmetric fields. Mech Res Com 30: 235-240 Teisseyre R, Kozak J (2003) Considerations on the seismic rotation waves. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 244-256 Teisseyre R, Yamashita T (1999) Splitting stress motion equation into seismic wave and fault-related fields. Acta Geophys Pol 47: 135-147 Teodosiu C (1970) A dynamic theory of dislocations and its applications to the theory of the elastic-plastic continuum. In: Simmons JA, DeWitt R and Bullough R (eds) Fundamental aspect of dislocation theory, 837-876, Nat Bur Stand US), Sp Publ 317, II.

7 Towards a Discrete Theory of Defects Mariusz Biaáecki Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland e-mail: [email protected]

7.1 Introduction We outline some fundamental principles of description of defects in crystal-like media in terms of a discrete approach instead of widely used continuous one. There are at least two sorts of general arguments supporting the discrete version of the theory of defects. One is connected with physical nature of crystals, which is evidently discrete. Continuum-medium crystal model is a very useful theoretical construction, but it is a kind of idealization. This fact has to be reflected in mathematical structure of the theory. Second, more practical reason, comes from recent significant growth of interest in discrete mathematics and its application in different areas of mathematical physics, quantitative biology and computer sciences. As a result, a lot of new techniques were developed and many obstacles were overcome. Our aim here is to demonstrate a possibility of applying some of them for description of crystal-like media. In the sequel of this section we introduce basic concepts and point out genesis of our approach. In Sect. 7.2 we introduce notion of discrete description and discuss some differences between it and its continuous counterpart. Section 7.3 is devoted to derivation of a discrete version of Weingarten theorem. In the last section we outline some prospects and consequences of this approach. The theory of defects (e.g., Kröner 1981) describes physical properties of bodies with internal stresses caused by disturbances in ideal, regular and ordered structure of the medium. Nowadays this theory is well established and found many applications, including those in seismology (Takeo and Ito 1997) and geodesy (Yamasaki and Nagahama 1999a). Mathematical structure of fundamental equations of the theory of defects is similar to that of the Einstein-Cartan theory of gravitation (Traut-

68 M. Biaáecki

man 2006, Hehl et al. 1976, Hammond 2002). A comprehensive comparison of these theories is presented by Ruggiero and Tartaglia (2003). A meaningful extension of Einstein-Cartan theory in comparison to the classical Einstein theory of gravitation is to study properties of space-time geometry with nonzero torsion. This makes it attractive for description of rotational effects. One of our prospective aims is to transfer some results into such a general framework (Teisseyre 2002, 2005, Teisseyre and Biaáecki 2005). The theory of defects as a rule is formulated within the continuum framework which is usually claimed to be good for geometrical description (eg. Yamasaki and Nagahama 1999b). This continuum could be obtained from crystalline-like lattice by a limiting process, in which ”atoms” are split into smaller ones, so that the overall structure is preserved, but the lattice base is reduced. Such a procedure allows a proper definition of mass and defect densities, with the preservation of crystallographic directions. The assumption that the lattice constant and other variables could be infinitesimally small provides a significant simplification in many cases. For instance, it is possible to obtain in this way a simple characterization of the Frank vector. The crucial point is that only infinitesimal rotations could obey simple addition law, contrary to non-Abelian nature of rotation group for finite angles. This result strongly depends on infinitesimal size of defects and the rejection of this assumption leads to complicated formulas. On the other hand, one can recently observe a remarkable development of discrete techniques in mathematical physics. In the theory of integrable systems (called also the soliton theory) it is well known that a single discrete nonlinear equation ”contains” many important nonlinear partial differential equations, which means, they can be derived from this equation taking a suitable limit (Hirota 1981). Nowadays, also discrete geometry, developed in close connection with integrable differential equations, proved to provide fruitful concepts and has their counterparts in classical differential geometry. (For a recent state of theory of discrete integrable systems see Grammaticos et al. 2004.) It is worth mentioning the important terminological difference between discrete and ultradiscrete objects. For the first ones, the independent variables are discrete, but the dependent ones are continuous. The ultradiscrete, or completely discrete systems, deal with all variables being discrete, and are called cellular automata. (For integrable ultradiscrete systems see, for example, Tokihiro 2004, Doliwa et al. 2003, Biaáecki and Doliwa 2005.) Notice that the construction of completely discrete theory of defects, allowing only for discrete positions of atoms, is also possible in principle.

7 Towards a Discrete Theory of Defects

69

The motivation towards a discrete theory of defects is to transfer the development of discrete techniques from mathematics and mathematical physics to material science and to describe crystal-like media as fundamentally discrete objects.

7.2 Towards a Discrete Description An idea of a geometric description of crystals with defects comes from mapping an undeformed medium to a deformed one. Denote by x ( xi , x j , xk ) \ 3 the Cartesian coordinates of a material point P of un-

deformed body. After deformation, point P has coordinates x + u(x), where u(x) is the displacement field which describes the amount and direction of the deformation. So, in a continuous case, we have xc

x u( x ) ,

where prime indicates the coordinates after deformation. Lets focus our attention on a discrete case. If we denote position of lattice point P ( n1 , n2 , n3 ) ]3 by xn x ( ni , n j , nk ) ( xi , x j , xk ) \ 3 , one could expect, by analogy,

xnc

xn ua ( xn ) .

(7.1)

However, the meaning of this relation is not clear in the presence of defects. Assume that atoms at point P were removed leaving a vacancy. What is the value of the displacement field ua(xn) for P in this case? Is it meaningful what is its position after deformation? If we assume that atoms which build a crystal structure are indistinguishable, as vacancies are, we have troubles with the meaning of ua(xn). In such a case, an additional definition is required. In the continuous case, one can claim that the set of singular points of this sort is of measure zero and “neglect” them. But when every small value is finite, the situation requires more precise treatment. If we intend to describe the defects, we cannot use the above relation without modifications. Let us discuss the introduction of a Burgers vector. Denote by B0 a close circuit consisting of N atoms in undeformed medium, as schematically depicted in Fig. 7.1. When mapped into disturbed medium, the points form a contour which is no longer closed. The failure to close the circuit is given by lattice vector b called local Burgers vector. We assume the definition in which this vector points from the beginning to the end of circuit B. Then we have

70 M. Biaáecki

Fig. 7.1 Schematic diagram of N-atom circuit before and after deformation

¦x

n

0

and

¦ xc

n

b

where we indicate that sums are taken for N subsequent atoms forming circuits B0 and B, respectively. However, to obtain

¦u (x ) a

n

b ,

B,N

(7.2)

in a way consistent with Eq. (7.1), we cannot assume that atoms along B after vacancy are shifted up for situation presented in Fig. 7.1. In that case, each shifted atom apart from small disturbance ua(xn) adds lattice spacings l0. If we consider situation where ua(xn) = 0 for every point of B (or there is mirror symmetry in crystal with the plane containing the plane of defects and the last point of B is apart from the plane), then we see that b should be of the order of l0 for one vacancy. We are forced to assume the rule: when crossing the defect point we have to add (or subtract) a lattice spacing l0 and measure ua(xn), starting from the next point along the Burgers circuit. This agrees with indistinguishability of atoms in our model. So, instead of Eq. (7.1) we have xnc

xn G D ( xn ) ua ( xn ) : xn u( xn ) ,

(7.3)

where

G D ( xn )

0 for no defects ° ® l0 for vacancy ° l for interstice ¯ 0

and l0 pointed in the direction we cross a defect. Notice also that Eq. (7.2) cannot be derived from (7.1) by taking sum of both sides without specifying the meaning of these sums.


71

The described situation is, in a sense, quite typical, when constructing discrete models. Some difficulties (or differences) could “disappear” when taking a continuum limit. As a rule, there could be many continuous counterparts of a given discrete system, depending on specific settings of taking the limit. From that point of view, discrete cases are basic and allow to control the meaning and mutual dependencies of different parameters of the model.

7.3 Discrete Weingarten Theorem To demonstrate a possibility of realizing discrete description of defects in crystal-like materials with cubic structure, we will derive a discrete version of the Weingarten theorem. Notice that lattices with non-cubic structures are also under investigation (see Zakrzewski 2005). In this section we will transfer to a discrete case the result described by Kleinert (2006). Consider a crystal with a half plane layer of lattice sites removed; the configuration is schematically presented in Fig. 7.2. The positions of points are given by x ( ni , n j , nk )

( xi , x j , xk )

( xD ) .

Denote by TĮ a shift by one in variable Į, for example

T j x ( ni , n j , nk ) : x ( ni , n j 1, nk ) , and by 'D

TD 1 ,

D

i, j, k ,

j = j1

j = j2

Fig. 7.2 Deformation of lattice with a half plane layer removed

72 M. Biaáecki

a discrete counterpart of a first derivative in the variable nĮ. In the following we will omit dependent variables if they have the same value in all terms of equation. Let us introduce also the symmetric strain field

uDE :

1

ª 'D uE ' E uD º¼

2¬

and the local rotation field wDE :

1

ª 'D uE ' E uD º¼

2¬

which is antisymmetric. Although the removed layer of atoms has broken the regular structure of crystal, we assume that in the lattice rearranged in this way both sides of cutting surface fit to each other. This implies there is no “jump” in strain and its first derivative when crossing the rearranged surface. So, the physical requirement for the crystal structure along a cutting surface is reflected in the following conditions: ' D uDE ' D ( ' k uDE )

(7.4)

0,

(7.5)

0 ,

where ¨D stands for direction k crossing the singular surface. We would like to point out that the noncommutativity around the defects TiT j x z T jTi x

or equivalently

'i ' j x z ' j 'i x

is a source of nonzero curvature and torsion (see Kleinert 2006). Let us investigate the following expression

' D ui ( n j

j1 ) ' D ui ( n j

j2 )

: ª¬ui x ( j1 ) ui x ( j1 ) º¼ ª¬ ui x ( j2 ) ui x ( j2 ) º¼ , where x+ stands for the upper half space and x– for lower one. It could be rearranged to

ª ui x ( j2 ) ui x ( j1 ) º ª ui x ( j2 ) ui x ( j1 ) º , ¬ ¼ ¬ ¼ and then expressed by sums along the contour lines below C and above C cutting surfaces


j2 1

¦

73

j2 1

¦

' j ui

C : j j1

' j ui .

C : j j1

Using decomposition into symmetric and antisymmetric parts, we get j2 1

¦

C : j j1

uij wij

j2 1

¦ u

ij

C : j j1

wij .

If for simplicity we assume nj(j1) = 0 then j2 1

¦

wij

C : j j1

could be written as j2 1

¦

wij ' j j .

C : j j1

Integrating this expression by parts (see the Appendix) we arrive at wij n j

j2 j1

j2 1

0

¦

(T j n j ) ' j wij .

C : j j1

Using this result, we can write ' D ui ( n j

j1 ) ' D ui ( n j

j2 )

in the form wij ( j2 )n2

j2 1

¦

C : j j1

ª¬uij (T j n j ) ' j wij º¼ wij ( j2 )n2

j2 1

¦

C : j j1

j2 1 § j2 1 ª¬ wij ( j2 ) wij ( j2 ) ¼º n2 ¨ ¦ ¦ ¨ C: j j C: j j 1 1 ©

ª¬uij (T j n j ) ' j wij º¼

· ªu (T j n j )' j wij º¼ ¸¸ ¬ ij ¹

j2 1

¦

C : j j1

ª¬ ' D uij (T j n j ) ' D ( ' j wij ) º¼ .

Since Ti and Tj commute for the undisturbed part of crystal, we obtain ' j wij

' j ( ' i u j uij ) ' j ' i u j ' j uij

' i ' j u j ' j uij

' i u jj ' j uii .

Taking into account the physical assumptions, i.e. Eqs. (7.4) and (7.5), we conclude that this integral is equal to zero.

74 M. Biaáecki

In general, when we allow summation not only along straight path of C , we obtain more generally 2¨kwij = ¨k(ïuj í ¨jui) = (ï¨kuj + ï¨juk) + (¨j¨kui + ¨jïuk) + (¨kï í ï¨k)uj í (¨k¨j í¨j¨k)ui + (¨jï íï¨j)uk. With commutativity assumption we arrive at ¨kwij = (ïukj +¨juki). As a result, we obtain that for the difference of “jumps” between two arbitrary points the following relation is valid

x (2) x (1) w

' D ui (2) ' D ui (1)

j

ij

j

( j2 ) wij ( j2 ) .

(7.6)

Introducing the rotation matrix :ij :

w ( j ) w ( j ) ij

2

ij

2

and the rotation vector :k :

1 2

H ijk :ij ,

where H ijk is the antisymmetric symbol of Levi-Civita, we can rewrite Eq. (7.6) in the following form: ' D u(2)

' D u(1) : u x (2) x (1) .

This is a discrete version of Weingarten’s Theorem. The “jump” of the displacement field crossing the cutting surface can be only a constant vector plus a fixed rotation.

7.4 Prospects As we have shown in this introductory presentation, it is possible to obtain the equations of continuous theory of defects in a discrete way. Not suprisingly, the relations are exactly the same in both cases. This is not a disadvantage of the discrete approach; in contrary, the first test showed that it retains all results, which proved to be in agreement with measurement and were successfully applied in material sciences. Our hope and motivation is that the discrete version could deal with new phenomena, but reasonable discussion of this topic is impossible at such early stage. Also, it seems very hard to predict applications of this preliminary version of the theory. However, there are some general guidelines where to look for advantages of this approach. As mentioned in the introduction, the discrete approach proved its unifying and simplifying potential in the theory of integrable systems. So we expect a similar result in the theory of defects.


75

Discrete theories, with their lack of infinitesimally small amounts, are clear to understand and control, which makes them more comprehensive and promising in education. And last but not least, discrete models are suitable for numerical implementation and could be directly used for computational needs of material engineering and other scientific disciplines applying the theory of defects, including Earth sciences.

Appendix: Discrete Integration by Parts The discrete version of the integration by parts theorem could be derived in the same way as its continuous counterpart. We start from the Leibnitz rule for differentiation of the product of two functions: 'D ( u v )

'D u TD v u 'D v

TD u 'D v 'D u v .

Performing sums, one can easily obtain xend

¦ 'D ( u v )

(u v )( xend ) (u v )( xbeg )

C: xbeg

and for the other side xend

xend

C: xbeg

C: xbeg

¦ 'D u TD v ¦ u 'D v .

Joining the above expressions we arrive at the desired result. Acknowledgments. This work is partially supported by Polish Ministry of Science and Information Society Technologies, project 2PO4D 060 28.

References Biaáecki M, Doliwa A (2005) Algebro-geometric solution of the dKP equation over a finite field out of a hyperelliptic curve. Commun Math Phys 253: 157170 Doliwa A, Biaáecki M, Klimczewski P (2003) The Hirota equation over finite fields: algebro-geometric approach and multisoliton solutions. J Phys A: Math Gen 36: 4827-4839 Grammaticos B, Kosmann-Schwarzbach Y, Tamizhmani T (eds) (2004) Discrete integrable systems. Lecture Notes in Physics, vol 644. Springer

76 M. Biaáecki Hehl FW, Heyde P von der, Kerlick GD, Nester JM (1976) General relativity with spin and torsion: Foundations and prospects. Rev Mod Phys 48: 393-416 Hammond TA (2002) Torsiongravity. Rep Prog Phys 65: 599-649 Hirota R (1981) Discrete analogue of a generalized Toda equation. J Phys Soc Jpn 50: 3785-3791 Kleinert H (2006) Gravity with torsion (in preparation) Kröner E (1981) Continuum theory of defects. In: Balian R, Kléman M, Poirer JP (eds) Physics of defects. North Holland Publ Comp, Amsterdam Ruggiero ML, Tartaglia A (2003) Einstein-Cartan theory as a theory of defects in space-time. Am J Phys 71: 12, 1303-1313 Takeo M, Ito H (1997) What can be learned from rotational motions excited by earthquakes? Geophys J Int 129: 319-329 Teisseyre R (2002) Continuum with defects and self-rotation fields. Acta Geophys Pol 50: 1, 51-68 Teisseyre R (2005) Asymmetric continuum mechanics: Deviations from elasticity and symmetry. Acta Geophys Pol 53: 2, 115-126 Teisseyre R, Biaáecki M, Górski M (2005) Degenerated mechanics in homogenous continuum: Potentials for spin and twist. Acta Geophys Pol 53: 3, 219-231 Tokihiro T (2004) Ultradiscrete systems (cellular automata). In: Grammaticos et al (eds) Discrete integrable systems. Lecture Notes in Physics, vol 644. Springer, pp 383-424 Trautman A (2006) The Einstein-Cartan theory. Encyclopedia of mathematical physics. Elsevier Science Ltd (in print) Yamasaki K, Nagahama H (1999a) Continuum theory of defects and gravity anomaly. Acta Geophys Pol 47: 3, 239-257 Yamasaki K, Nagahama H (1999b) Hodge duality and continuum theory of defects. J Phys A: Math Gen 32: L475-L481 Zakrzewski WJ (2005) Laplacians on lattices. J Nonl Math Phys 12: 4, 530-538

8 Fault Dynamics and Related Radiation 1,2

1

Wojciech BoratyĔski , Roman Teisseyre 1


2


8.1 Introduction Usually when searching for the fault slip solutions we rely on classical elasticity with the friction constitutive laws introduced according to the experimental data. In spite of the fact that the obtained equations do not theoretically apply to elastic continuum that includes any distribution of defects as objects with their own stress field, the obtained results well explain the observational data. Instead we may consider an elastic continuum with asymmetric stresses and defects (Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2003); such an approach permits to study the defect interactions and elastodynamic solutions describing a slip propagation along a fault and related seismic radiation (Teisseyre and Yamashita 1999). As explained in the former Chapters 4–6, an elastic asymmetric continuum with defects and rotation nuclei can be analized with the help of the Kröner method with the elastic strains and stresses, E and S, and corresponding self fields, ES and SS forming together the total strain and stress fields ET = E + ES, ST = S + SS. In this method, we maintain the same type of the stress-strain constitutive relation – that of the ideal elasticity relation. The self fields are related to the internal stresses and their action can replace the role of friction constitutive laws (Teisseyre 2004). In this chapter we will consider the motion equations for dislocations and disclinations and fracturing phenomena: a process from a glide motion


to fracture slip and the subsequent formation of the soliton wave. Our consideration will end on a relation between the emitted seismic wave and the considered fracturing on a fault plane.

8.2 Fault and Related Stresses Our problem concerns a fault seismic zone; its plane is defined by y = x2 = 0. Defect accumulation and related induced shears on a fault S12(x, z) are described by the antiplane Į11, and inplane Į31 dislocations; hence, there follows the orientation of the other axes (x = x1, z = x3). The system is surrounded by the intact rocks under stresses S11, S22, S33. A fault plane is defined as that having its rigidity µ0 smaller than its bulk value µ in the surrounding rocks µ0 < µ. Considering the boundary conditions – stress continuity as well as their tangent derivatives – we get on the fault boundary

P0 P o D 0 P0 DP o D 0 ! D

(8.1)

defining a dislocation density jumps up to the greater value along a fault zone. In 1D (x, t) systems a dislocation density is given as gradient of stresses S , but a dislocation density is related also to slip į on a fault plane; both relations lead to the direct relation between slip and local stress on fault:

D

1 w S , P wx

D

1

/

G ,

hence

G

/ S W , P

where Ĳ is the friction, ȁ is a certain reference thickness. When computing a dislocation density we count the dislocations comprised in a layer of such a thickness.

8.3 Evolution Equations for Dislocations and Disclinations The defect conservation laws derived in Chapter 6 do not include the creation and annihilation processes: dislocation density:

D pl H pmk

wJ kl H pmk H klqYmq wxm

0,

(8.2a)

8

Fault Dynamics and Related Radiation

disclination density:

Tpq H pmk

wYkq wxm

79

bH pmk H qns

w 2Z (Sks ) wxm wxn

0,

(8.3)

where J and Y are the dislocation and disclination currents, respectively. wZ[Sks ]

w 2ZksS wxn wxm wxn (b = {0, 1}; see Chap. 4) the relation (8.3) presents the identity. However, the self-rotation field ȦS can be treated as a source term as it may appear due to internal dynamic processes, like earthquakes (cf. Chap 4). With

Ykq

bH nsq

,

and

T pq

bH pmk H qns

Thus, we can assume that the last term in (8.2a), as the source function term, may include the creation and annihilation of the dislocation pairs; the relation (8.2a) may be written simply as (Teisseyre 2001)

D pl H pmk

wJ kl wxm

3 pl ,

(8.2b)

where Ȇ is a source term, playing a similar role as body forces in usual equation of motion. The stress-dislocations relation in our system can be written as follows (cf. Chap. 6, Eq. 6.32a):

D11

1 w 1 w S(12) S[12] , P wz P wz

(8.4a)

where the line dislocations are assumed to be parallel to the x-axis; µ* is the rotation rigidity. For the inplane case with the we obtain

D 31

1 w 1 w S(12) S[12] , 2P wx 2P wx

(8.4b)

with the line dislocations parallel to the z-axis. These relations permitts to treat the antiplane and inplane cases in a similar way.

8.4 Motion Equations: Fault and Radiation Parts Following the results given in Chapter 6, the stress motion equations (6.35) become:


ª w2 º Ow ks Eii 2P E( ks ) » « ¬ wxk wxl ¼ ( ls )

U

w2 w w2 S E U J U b Z(ls ) . ( ls ) ( ls ) wt 2 wt wt 2

(8.5a)

A dislocation current and the self-rotation field is practically limited to the fault zone; thus, we can write

§ w2 · S( lk ) ¸ ¨ © wxk wxs ¹( ls )

U E(Tls ) bZ(Sls ) U J(ls ) ,

(8.5b)

where for dislocation current (Chap. 6, Eq. 6.29) and velocity in a dynamic range (6.30) we have

c(H mlq D qs )( ls ) Vm

J ls

Vm

H mij

D ip S( jp ) R D ip

R

.

(8.6)

From (8.6) we obtain

J 12

§ S(12) R ª w S ·¸ ¨ w 2abs Z[12] ¸ E ¨ (12) « ¨ wz ¸ 2 R wz © ¹ ¬ § w w S ·¸ º abs ¨¨ E(12) Z[12] ¸» . ¨ wx ¸ wx © ¹¼

c

1

(8.7)

While for the basic equations for antisymmetric stresses we write after (6.35):

w2 S[12] wxk wxk

2P

U

w2 S Z[12] wxk wxk

U

w2 Z[12] wt 2

w2 T w2 S Z[12] U 2 Z[12] . 2 wt wt

(8.8)

Motion equations in terms of strains become: w2 w2 w2 O E 2 P E 2 P E(12) ii 11 wx12 wx12 wx1 wx2

U E11 ,

(8.9a)

w2 w2 w2 O E 2 P E 2 P E(12) 22 ii wx22 wx22 wx1wx2

U E22 ,

(8.9b)

8


w2 w2 O E 2 P E33 ii wx32 wx3wx3

O

81

U E33 ,

(8.9c)

§ 2 w2 w 2 ·¸ w2 ¨ w ª P E11 E22 º¼ Eii ¨¨ 2 2 ¸¸ 2 P E(12) ¨ wx wx1 wx2 wx2 ¸¹ wx1 wx2 ¬ 1 © S U E(12) bZ(12) U

w J (12) . wt

(8.9d)

The last equation can be written as § ¨ ¨ ¨¨ ©

w2 w 2 ·¸ w2 w2 ¸ 2P E O E ª P E11 E22 º¼ (12) ii wx12 wx22 ¸¸¹ wx1 wx2 wx1 wx2 ¬ § ª w S ·¸ P ¨w ¸ U E(12) U c E (12) « 2abs ¨¨ E(12) Z[12] ¸¸ ¨ wz R wz © ¹ ¬

w w S ·¸ º ¸» E(12) Z[12] ¸¸ ¨ wx wx © ¹¼ § ¨

abs ¨¨

Ub

w2 S Z(12) . wt 2

(8.9e)

The fault plane is defined as

P0 ( y )

P ª¬1 H 0 exp(ay 4 ) º¼ .

(8.10)

Hence, an elastic strain field E can be presented as difference, ET – ES of the total ET field and the self ES = ȦS strain part, and we identify these . parts with the fault field ES = E and the wave radiation field ET = E Further, we assume that the self strains are only important on a fault plane, and that this field shall rapidly extinct outside the fault plane y = 0. Thus, we can put E(12) ( x z t ) exp Dy 4 E(12) ( x z t ) E[12] ( x z t ) exp Dy 4 E[12] ( x z t )

(8.11)

and further:

D ( x z t ) exp Dy 4 D ( x z t ) , J ( x z t ) exp Dy 4 J ( x z t ) , J ( x z t ) exp Dy 4 J ( x z t ) .

(8.12)


As to other components, we take them for the fault and radiation parts: E11 ( x z t ) exp ik x x ik y y ik z z iZ t E110 exp Dy 4 E11 ( x z t ) , 0 E22 ( x z t ) exp ik x x ik y y ik z z iZ t E 22

exp Dy 4 E22 ( x z t ) , (8.13) E33 ( x z t ) exp ik x x ik y y ik z z iZ t E 330 exp Dy 4 E33 ( x z t ) , E12 ( x z t ) exp ik x x ik y y ik z z iZ t E120 exp Dy 4 E12 ( x z t ) . In a fault plane domain (x, z, t), y = 0 the fracturing processes will cause the stress changes while a seismic wave radiation will be observed in the considered (x, y, z, t) domain. From (8.9) in the (x, y, z, t) domain, outside the fault, we obtain: § 2 Z2 · O k12 E 22 E 33 ¨ k1 2 ¸ E11 a 2 O P © ¹

(8.14a)

0,

§ 2 Z2 · O 2P k22 E11 E 33 k1k2 E(12) ¨ k2 2 ¸ E22 O 2P O 2P a ¹ ©

§ 2 Z2 · O k32 E 22 E 33 ¨ k3 2 ¸ E33 a 2 O P © ¹

(8.14b)

(8.14c)

0,

§ 2 ª O º Z2 · 1 2 Eii E11 E 22 » ¨ k1 k2 2 ¸ E (12) k1k2 « c ¹ 2 ¬ 2P ¼ ©

0,

0,

(8.14d)

where a and c are the P- and S-wave velocities. On the fault y = 0, we put c = c0 in the (x, z, t) domain, and we obtain

8


83

§ · w2 w2 ¨ 2P 2 2 D P0 ¸ E(12) U 2 E(12) wt © wx1 ¹ ª w S · Pw §w E(12) « 2abs ¨ E(12) Z[12] c0 U ¸ R wt wz © wz ¹ ¬ w S · § w abs ¨ E(12) Z[12] ¸ wx © wx ¹

Ub

w2 S Z(12) , wt 2

(8.15)

where the relations for other components appear to be independent of E(12) ; hence, we put E11

0,

E22

0,

E33

0.

For the inplane motion § · w2 w2 2 P 2 D P E U E(12) ¨ 0 2 0 ¸ (12) wx1 wt 2 © ¹ P w ªw º S c0 U E(12) abs « E(12) Z[12] » R wt ¬ wx ¼

Ub

w2 S Z(12) , wt 2

(8.16a)

and for the antiplane motion 2 D P0 E(12) U 2c0 U

w2 E(12) wt 2

w S · w2 S § w E(12) abs ¨ E(12) Z[12] ¸ U b 2 Z(12) . wz wt R wt © wz ¹

P w

The obtained equations can be written (with E(12) F

(8.16b)

S X , and G Z[12] ,

1 w2 S b Z(12) the source terms) as follows: c02 wt 2

w2 w 1 w2 § w · X 2 2 X B X abs ¨ ( X G ) ¸ AX 2 c0 wt wx wt © wx ¹

w 1 w2 §w · X 2 B X abs ¨ ( X G ) ¸ AX 2 2 c0 wt wt © wz ¹

F,

F,

where c0 is the shear wave velocity on a fault plane (µ = µ0).

(8.16a')

(8.16b')


The source functions F and G are related to dislocation densities, see Eqs. (8.4a) and (8.4b). Probably the source functions F and G cannot be given independently; for the final moment of the process, the counterparts of the inplane and antiplane motions shall be related to each other on a common plane to approch the equilibrium condition div S ĺ 0. In other words, the counterparts of the inplane and antiplane motions are mutually related on a common plane, at least, for a final time moment t ĺ t0, when

div S( x y z t0 ) o 0 .

(8.16c)

Both motions can occur simultaneously, see Fig. 8.1. Assume that an inplane motion occurs first, forming a fractured segment; its sides parallel to motion direction become formed with the related screw dislocations; we may expect that an antiplane motion might start in a neighbouring segment – see Fig. 8.2 (such a sequence can start reversely: first an antiplane motion and then an inplane one).

Fig. 8.1 Fault plane: simultaneous inplane and antiplane motions

Fig. 8.2 Inplane motion and induced antiplane motion on the neighbouring faults

These motions could be separated by some time interval (shock and aftershock); the related motions described by one of these equations (8.16a') or (8.16b') can start later releasing stresses in an aftershock with the final condition (8.16c). Of course, these equations can be simply solved separately for the inplane and antiplane motions; when putting for the searched function and

8


85

for the source functions X = X(x, t), F = F(x, t) and G = G(x, t), we arrive at the following independent equations: – inplane w2 1 w2 w § w · X X B X abs ¨ ( X G ) ¸ AX 2 2 2 c0 wt x wx wt w © ¹

F,

(8.17a)

– antiplane X ( z t )

X

F

F ( z t ) ,

and

G G ( z t ) ,

1 w2 w § w · X 2 B X abs ¨ ( X G ) ¸ AZ c02 wt 2 z wt w © ¹

F,

(8.17b)

where, e.g., the source functions can be given as proportional to sine -terms: G G0 sin >T ( x Vt ) @ ,

and

F

F0 sin >T ( x Vt ) @ ,

and

F

F0 sin >- ( z Wt )@ .

and respectively: G G0 sin >- ( z Wt ) @ ,

These equations can be solved numericaly with the assumed intial conditions X(x, 0) = sin(x) and for X(x, 0) = x sin(x); some examples of the obtained solutions are presented in Figs. 8.3–8.10 in the domains x: {0, ʌ}, t: {0, ʌ}.

Fig. 8.3 Inplane motion for X(x, 0) = sin x and X(0, t) = 0, X(ʌ, t) = t. Left: 3D plot X(x, t). Right: plot for X(1.5, t)


Fig. 8.4 Inplane motion for X(x, 0) = sin x and X(0, t) = 0, X(ʌ, t) = t. Left: 3D plot w wt X(x, t). Right: plot for w wt X(1.5, t)

Fig. 8.5 Antiplane motion for X(x, 0) = sin x and X(0, t) = 0, X(ʌ, t) = t. Left: 3D plot X(x, t). Right: plot for X(1.5, t)

Fig. 8.6 Antiplane motion for X(x, 0) = sin x and X(0, t) = 0, X(ʌ, t) = t. Left: 3D plot w wt X(x, t). Right: plot for w wt X(1.5, t)

8


87

Fig. 8.7 Inplane motion for X(x, 0) = x sin x and X(0, t) = 0, X(ʌ, t) = t. Left: 3D plot X(x, t). Right: plot for X(1.5, t)

Fig. 8.8 Inplane motion for X(x, 0) = x sin x and X(0, t) = 0, X(ʌ, t) = t. Left: 3D plot w wt X(x, t). Right: plot for w wt X(1.5, t)

Fig. 8.9 Antiplane motion for X(x, 0) = x sin x and X(0, t) = 0, X(ʌ, t) = t. Left: 3D plot X(x, t). Right: plot for X(1.5, t)


Fig. 8.10 Antiplane motion for X(x, 0) = x sin x and X(0, t) = 0, X(ʌ, t) = t. Left: 3D plot w wt X(x, t). Right: plot for w wt X(1.5, t)

Solutions were obtained with the help of Mathematica Version 5 Program. An additional boundary condition for X = 0 is given by X(0, t) = 0. The other boundary condition for x = ʌ can also be assumed as X(ʌ, t) = 0, which will corresponds to the motion presented in Fig 8.1, or we can resign from such a restriction allowing further fault propagation as presented in Fig. 8.2. With the obtained solutions, we can return to the wave equations outside the fault (8.14a, b, c, d), where the known solutions on a fault X E(12) are treated as the boundary/initial conditions for E(12).

8.5 Discussion The presented approach helps us to better understand a relation between the inplane and antiplane motions; their relation on a common fault becomes evident. For the independent solutions in time (shock and aftershock), we can take the initial condition for equation describing aftershock as that given by the final value of first solution describing main shock. We shall also recall that the space derivatives of the strains are proportional to the related dislocation densities.

8


89

References Teisseyre R (2001) Evolution, propagation and diffusion of dislocation fields. In: Teisseyre R and Majewski E (eds) Earthquake thermodynamics and phase transformations in the earth’s interior. Academic Press, San Diego, pp 167198 Teisseyre R (2004) Spin and twist motions in a homogeneous elastic continuum and cross-band geometry of fracturing. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 2, 173-183 Teisseyre R, BoratyĔski W (2003) Continua with self-rotation nuclei: evolution of asymmetric fields. Mech Res Commun 30: 235-240 Teisseyre R, Yamashita T (1999) Splitting stress motion equation into seismic wave and fault-related fields. Acta Geophys Pol 47: 2, 135-147

9 A Review on Friction Panayiotis Varotsos, Mary Lazaridou Solid Earth Physics Institute, Department of Physics, University of Athens Panepistimiopolis, Zografos 157 84, Athens, Greece e-mail: [email protected]

9.1 Introduction Tribology is in general the study of adhesion, friction, lubrication and wear of surfaces in relative motion. It seems that the more we learn about tribology the more complex it appears (Urbakh et al. 2004). Recent advances in friction reveal that it plays a major role in diverse systems and phenomena which although at first glance seemed to be unrelated are found to exhibit common features that are shared by all tribological processes in the fields of physics, chemistry, biology, geology and engineering. In the explanation of the classical laws of friction, e.g., the static friction, force is proportional to the load, and even since the early attempts (Coulomb 1785) the role played by interactions between asperities at the surfaces of solids was emphasized. Furthermore, the idea was put forward (Bowden and Tabor 1950, 1964) that the real contact area is very small and involves such large stresses that a significant plastification occurs. In simple words, one may view a material surface as being rough, consisting of asperities of different sizes which will deform under pressure. Thus, for static friction, in the frame of the so-called adhesion model, the friction results from the intermolecular adhesion between two surfaces at the points of contact (e.g., see Bowden and Tabor 1950, 1964). The basic assumption of this model is that when placing one surface on top of another, the deformation will cease when the total yield pressure of the asperities becomes equal to the load of the upper surface divided by the total contact area Ac. This area is usually several orders of magnitude smaller than the apparent area A, e.g., Ac/A | 10-6 (Johansen et al. 1993); thus, even though the apparent area A may be macroscopic, the actual contact area Ac can be small to such an extent that microscopic randomness may not simply average out. This is the stochastic element that can result in strong fluctuations

92

P. Varotsos, M. Lazaridou

of the static friction. Hence, the aforementioned classical friction law, stating that the static friction force is proportional to the load, holds only in an average sense. In the case of dynamic friction, as the velocity increases, there will be more momentum transfer into the normal direction, producing an upward force on the upper surface. This results in an increase in the separation between the two surfaces, thus leading to a decrease in the contact area. In the frame of the adhesion model, the decrease of the contact area reflects a reduced adhesion, which qualitatively explains the experimental results. An alternative model, which uses the collisions between the asperities as the dissipation mechanism, was also suggested. However, in spite of their partial success, these two models cannot fully account for the observed (non-linear hysteretic) phenomena (e.g., see Section 9.2). Both models lead to the following picture: If the fluctuations in the static friction are indeed determined by surface area and contact area, then the dynamic friction should fluctuate for the same reasons. This shows that the deterministic friction velocity relations suggested (e.g., see Section 9.3) hold only in an average sense. Furthermore, there are puzzles even for fully understanding very simple cases. For example, take a coin and launch it across your desk, recording the distance travelled. Now spin the coin about the axis perpendicular to its surface as you launch it; the coin will travel farther, even if we launch it with the same initial velocity. The coin will stop moving and stop spinning at exactly the same instant (Farkas et al. 2003). The explanation of such experiments (e.g., see Halsey 2003 and references therein) may be achieved on the basis of the suggestion that the coupled equations, describing how the spinning motion of the coin and its velocity both decrease with time, are highly non-linear (cf. The nonlinear nature of friction in general has been reviewed by Urbakh et al. 2004). It is recently shown (Farkas et al. 2003) that even when considering a coin, the sliding on a table is not a simple system. The frictional mechanics of the coin is governed by material phenomena at scales much smaller than the size of the coin. The wellknown laws of friction (i.e., the so-called Amonton’s laws) ignore the existence of these complex phenomena at smaller length scales entirely, at the cost of introducing a highly non-linear description of the macroscopic scale of the coin (Halsey 2003). Finally, we shortly refer to comment on the reason why several attempts have been made to model earthquakes by spring-block systems (with many degrees of freedom). Assume that a block resting on a surface is attached to a spring, the other end of which is pulled at a constant velocity. It has been observed that, at sufficiently slow velocities, the sliding process is not a continuous one, but the motion proceeds by jerks; the contact surfaces “stick” together until (as a result of the gradually increasing pull) there is a

9 A Review on Friction

93

sudden break with a consequent very rapid slip. This behaviour has been termed stick-slip motion and is reminiscent of fault seismicity (e.g. Brace and Byerlee 1966, Scholz 1998).

9.2 Stick-Slip Friction of a Granular System. Hysteresis and Precursors The response of a granular medium to shear forces plays a major role in earthquake dynamics. Slipping events occur along faults which are often separated by a “gouge” filled with sand or other granular material between more rigid regions (Lubkin 1997). The actual time-dependent frictional forces of granular material during brief periods of motion, i.e., individual slip events, have been experimentally studied by Nasuno et al. (1997), who were able to determine force variations within slip events lasting as little as 40 ms. Earlier studies of granular friction have mostly emphasized large systems, high velocity flows, and large normal stress, while Nasuno et al. (1997) measurements allowed direct imaging of particle dynamics and showed a stick-slip behaviour at low velocity across the layer, with a transition to continuous motion at higher velocity gradients (see the caption to Fig. 9.2). Furthermore, they found that the frictional force, within individual slip events, is a multi-valued function of velocity (Fig. 9.2b) and that localized microscopic rearrangements precede (and follow) macroscopic slip events. The experiment of Nasuno et al. (1997) could be briefly described as follows: A 2mm-thick granular layer consists of spherical glass beads with diameters ranging from 70 to 110 Pm. Shear stress was applied, by pushing with a (adjustable stiffness) leaf spring, on a transparent glass cover plate (which was roughened to prevent slip at the plate surface) across the granular layer. A translational stage pushes the spring mount at a speed X, and the spring deflection was measured as a function of time. Figure 9.1 depicts the results for various velocities: For a relatively low velocity, i.e., X | 5.67 Pm/s, a stick-slip motion (a) occurs; upon using a stronger spring, the deflections become smaller but the motions remain discrete. Increasing the velocity X by a factor of 1000 (using the same weak spring as in “a”), the dynamics changed from stick-slip motion to an inertia-dominated oscillation (b). Upon a further increase of velocity, a critical value of X was reached, and the motion became irregular but continuous. It seems that the stick-slip motion is a characteristic behaviour but only at low velocities. The stick-slip phenomena can be summarized as follows: If k denotes the spring constant and m the mass of the upper plate,

94


Fig. 9.1 Spring deflection as a function of time according to the experiment of Nasuno et al. (1997): (a) For a relatively low velocity X = 5.67 Pm/s, stick-slip motion occurs. When the system sticks, the cover plate is at rest, and the spring deflection increases linearly with time until it applies the maximum static friction force; upon reaching this value, the granular layer cannot sustain the imposed shear stress and the plate suddenly accelerates, while the friction force decreases. When the stress becomes small enough, sticking recurs. (b) When velocity is 1000 times larger, X = 5.667 mm/s, inertia-dominated oscillation occurs. (c) When X becomes even larger, X = 11.33 mm/s, steady sliding motion with fluctuations occurs (Lubkin 1997)

the slip duration Ws is comparable to the characteristic inertial time W in 2ʌ m / k (recall that the angular frequency Z is given by

Z k / m and Z { 2ʌ / W in ) and is substantially shorter than the time between slip events. The granular flow during slip seems to occur predominantly in the top few layers of the particles. It is important to note that visual observation reveals that the onset of sliding involves fluidization (i.e., transition from a solid state to fluid state, see also Section 9.5) of granular particles in the upper layers. The observed stick-slip motion is almost periodic for a wide range of parameter values. As the pushing velocity X increases, the mean period T decreases while the slip distance per event remains constant, until the inertia dominated regime is reached, which is depicted in the middle of Fig. 9.1b. The transition from the latter regime to continuous sliding (with fluctuations, see Fig. 9.1c) occurs at a critical value Xc, which decreases with increasing k and also varies with m. The oscillation amplitude strongly fluctuates near Xc.


95

An investigation of what happens during individual slip events is depicted in Fig. 9.2. Figure 9.2a shows the instantaneous sliding velocity versus time for four different pushing speeds ranging from X = 56.67 to 1133.27 Pm/s; despite the large variation in the pushing velocity X (cf. for fixed spring constant and mass), it is remarkable that the four curves coincide and reveal “velocity pulses” as large as 1 cm/s, which last only a short time, i.e., around 40 ms. The instantaneous (normalized) frictional force P

Fig. 9.2 Study of individual slip events, according to the experiment of Nasuno et al. (1997): (a) Instantaneous velocity versus time, for four different pushing speeds (the pulses are forced to coincide at the end of each event); (b) Instantaneous normalized frictional force for 3 different slip events, which correspond to the same pushing speed X = 113 Pm/s (Lubkin 1997)

96


(P = F/mg, where g stands as usually for the gravity acceleration) versus the instantaneous sliding velocity (of the moving plate that has mass m, as mentioned) is depicted in Fig. 9.2b, for three slip events, but for a given pushing speed X = 113 Pm/s. An hysteresis loop is observed as follows: The cover plate is at rest at the position “a” and the applied force starts to continuously increase; the frictional force rises (from the position “a” to “b”) along the vertical axis and at point “b” the motion begins; between “b” and “c” the plate is accelerating (the velocity increases, but the frictional force decreases) and the velocity reaches its maximum value at “c” (where the frictional force reaches a low value). From “c” to “a”, the plate decelerates (until coming to rest), the frictional force remains low (it continues to decrease slowly at first and then rapidly as the slider comes to rest) and does not retrace the first part (“c”o “b”); the arrows in Fig. 9.2b indicate a hysteresis loop, which is identical for all events in a run. The frictional force is not a single valued function of velocity (memory effects); it is larger for increasing than for decreasing velocity within individual events. One source of the latter difference is that an expansion of the layer during motion occurs, i.e., the measurements show that the layer thickness increases by roughly 15 Pm during the slip events; thus a time (about 2 ms) is required for the plate to fall a distance equal to the observed (vertical) dilation of 15 Pm. Imaging the granular layer through a microscope, Nasuno et al. (1997) clarified what happens during apparently quiescent intervals: Significant microscopic rearrangement events occur, during the sticking intervals, and their accumulation leads to creep. By subtracting two adjacent images (cf. the system was photographed at one-second intervals) they observed that they are not identical, there are regions that have moved (microscopic slip sites) (Lubkin 1997). The frequency of these microscopic rearrangements of precursor events was found to increase dramatically just before a major slip event; thus, before the major events, the precursors were also detectable macroscopically, because they contribute a finite amount of the creep. The accumulated precursors produce a displacement by about 1% as large as that occurring during a slip event. Stick-slip motion at low speed was also found in recent experiments (quoted by Lubkin 1997) that studied the friction between relatively smooth solids, e.g., a paper sliding on a paper; these experiments also reported creep before a slip event and showed an increase of the coefficient of static friction, when the materials remained in contact.


97

9.3 Rock Friction During the last several decades, geophysicists have been trying to explain the energy budget for tectonic faulting, which does not seem to add up (see Marone 2004 and references therein). The main unexplained fact could be summarized as follows: Faults appear more slippery (in other words, less constrained by friction) than has been predicted by theoretical work and laboratory measurements. The latter indicate that the frictional stress faulting (close to the Earth’s surface) must be of the order of 50100 MPa. This reflects that, during faulting, substantial heat should be produced in view of the following fact: when counting the other main energy expenses, i.e., radiation of seismic waves, and the creation of surface area from the production and comminution of “wear material”, we find that they are only a small fraction of the total energy dissipation (which is estimated upon considering that the income side of energy budget comes from the driving forces of plate tectonics and the elastic energy stored in the Earth’s solid crust). The problem consists in the fact that the expected frictional heat is missing (e.g., Scholz 2000). It has been suggested long ago, as already mentioned, that earthquakes result from a stick-slip frictional event, and it was assumed that sliding begins when the ratio of shear to normal stress on the surface reaches a value Ps, the static friction coefficient. Once sliding initiates, the frictional resistance decreases and is described through a lower dynamic friction coefficient Pd; this weakening of sliding resistance may, depending on the stiffness of the system, result in a dynamic instability (Scholz 1998). However, according to the recent aspects of rock mechanics (e.g., see Tullis 1996, Scholz 1998), there is an ageing of Ps (i.e., static friction increases with the time of being static) and a velocity dependence of Pd (Pd decreases with increasing slip velocity, but see below); in addition, when the velocity is changed, the transition to the new frictional resistance requires sliding some distance. Thus, within the frame of the new notions, there is now a continuum of varying friction values, while in the old frame the situation was described, as mentioned, in terms only of the static friction PS and the dynamic friction Pd alone. The current views on the rock friction behaviour could be alternatively summarised as follows: There are two competing effects: the direct effect and the evolution effect. The former is an initial increase in the resistance to sliding that occurs when the velocity of sliding is abruptly increased (Fig. 9.3); this is termed “the direct effect”, because the change of resistance occurs instantaneously and in the same sense as the change in velocity (Tullis 1996). The second effect refers to the fact that, after abrupt

98


Fig. 9.3 The frictional response versus the displacement, when the sliding velocity suddenly increases from a smaller value to a larger one and then is returning to its initial value (Scholz 1998)

changes in velocity, the frictional resistance evolves to a new steady-state resistance over a characteristic slip distance (thus the term “evolution effect”). When sliding is stopped for some period of time (after having attained a steady-state frictional resistance at constant velocity) and then resumed, the resistance climbs up to a peak value, which is larger than the steady-state value prior to the hold, and subsequently decays to the original steady-state value. The peak value increases nearly with the logarithm of the hold time (Fig. 9.4), i.e., surfaces in stationary contact increase in strength with time (thus a re-strengthening of surfaces between slip episodes occurs, without which a repeated unstable slip is impossible); this effect, which is an important aspect of rock friction in terms of application to earthquakes, is known as the evolution effect.

Fig. 9.4 The increasing 'P of the static friction versus the time period of holding static (Tullis 1996)


99

In summary, laboratory experiments show that the friction of rocks is a function of time, velocity of sliding, and displacement. The processes responsible for these dependencies are still unknown. Furthermore, the following point must be emphasized (e.g., see Tullis 1996): No laboratory experiments in rocks combine the large displacement, high slip rate, high normal stress, and presence of pressurized pore fluids that characterize earthquake slip. This means that the processes that may occur during dynamic slip in earthquakes have not been thoroughly explored experimentally. Chief among these are the shear heating and the associated possible melting or increase in pore fluid pressure. Recent laboratory experiments, that have been performed at high sliding velocities, of the order of m/s (see Section 9.4), which are believed to occur before earthquakes, showed that some of the conclusions deduced from the earlier laboratory measurements cannot be extended to the high velocity regime. The laboratory observations are described through the so-called rate/ state-variable constitutive law. However, when one looks carefully at the details, none of the laws suggested fits all aspects of experimental data and a better law is needed (Tullis 1996). The version of “the rate and state friction law”, which is believed to better account for the experimental data (Beeler et al. 1994, Scholz 1998), is the Dieterich–Ruina or “slowness” law, which reads:

W

ª §X · § X0T « P0 a ln ¨ ¸ b ln ¨ © L © X0 ¹ ¬

·º ¸» V ¹¼

(9.1)

where W denotes the shear stress and V the effective normal stress (i.e., the applied normal stress minus pore pressure), X is the slip velocity, X0 is a reference velocity and a, b are the material properties (see below); thus, the frictional resistance is described in terms of the so-called base friction P0 (the steady-state friction at X = X0), nearly independent of rock type and temperature, which is modified by second order effects involving a dependence on sliding velocity and a state variable T (Scholz 1998); the latter evolves according to dT dt

1

TX L

(9.2)

and hence at the steady state (SS)

T SS

L

X

,

(9.3)

100 P. Varotsos, M. Lazaridou

where L is the critical slip distance, which is usually interpreted as the sliding distance required to renew the contact population and, in this frame, TSS represents an average “contact lifetime”. At steady state, we have

W

ª § X ·º « P0 ( a b)ln ¨ ¸ » V © X0 ¹¼ ¬

(9.4)

and a–b could be defined as the velocity dependence of steady-state friction PSS:

wPSS . w(lnX )

ab

(9.5)

This can be visualised in Fig. 9.3, which schematically shows what happens when the sliding velocity is abruptly increased from a smaller value (the left portion in Fig. 9.3) to a larger one (the right portion); upon the initial application of the velocity increase, there is an “abrupt” increase a in friction, which is followed by a gradual decrease b (the difference in the friction of the two stages is equal to a–b, as shown). A possible connection of PS and Pd to the parameters a and b could be described as follows: If we define the dynamic friction coefficient Pd as the steady friction PSS at velocity X, and PS as the starting friction following a period of time in stationary contact, we have: wPd w (lnX )

ab

(9.6a)

b .

(9.6b)

and, for long t: wPS w (ln t )

If a–b > 0, the steady state friction PSS increases upon increasing velocity X (see Eq. 9.5); such a system is intrinsically stable. On the other hand, if a–b < 0, the value of PSS decreases upon increasing X; this is the case which is of interest for earthquakes, because when the applied normal stress V exceeds a critical value Vc the sliding is unstable under quasistatic loading. This can be understood on the basis of a spring-slider model (with fixed stiffness k) depicted in Fig. 9.5a in which the slider is assumed to obey Eq. (9.1). Figure 9.5b shows the velocity jump 'X, necessary to destabilize the system, versus V. This reveals that if V exceeds the critical value:

Vc

kL /( a b)

(9.7)


101

b

a

'vǻv

V

W Oscillations Oscillations

Vcı

Conditionally stable Conditionally stable

c

Vı Unstable Unstable

Fig. 9.5a A spring-slider model obeying Eq. (9.1); (b) the velocity jump 'X, necessary to destabilize the system, versus V (Scholz 1998)

sliding is unstable with respect to a vanishing incremental velocity perturbation 'X (i.e., a quasistatic loading). If V < Vc the system is in the socalled conditionally stable field, because it is stable under quasistatic loading, but may become unstable under sufficiently strong dynamic loading, i.e., if subjected to a velocity jump 'X exceeding that depicted in Fig. 9.5b. For smaller jumps, at the stability border (close to Vc, see the shaded region of Fig. 9.5b), sliding occurs by self-sustaining oscillatory motion (Scholz 1998, Heslot et al. 1994). Earthquakes can nucleate only in the regions of a fault which lie within the unstable regime. Equation (9.7) is derived in the case of the one dimensional spring-slider of Fig. 9.5a. For the two or three dimensional case of a slipping patch of size L, the stiffness k can be written as k = nG/L (Scholz 1998), where G is the shear modulus and n a geometrical factor of the order of unity. This implies that the instability occurs when L reaches a critical size Lc, called the nucleation length, given by (see Eq. 9.7): Lc

GnL . (b a )V

(9.8)

Laboratory observations indicate that stable sliding initiates at a point and then spreads out with an accelerating sliding velocity until the instability arises at Lc. It is not known yet whether such a nucleation occurs at natural faults. Furthermore, the physical significance as well as the scaling of the parameter L, which is of the order of a10 Pm in the laboratory, have not yet been clarified.


9.4 Laboratory Experiments at High Rates of Slip. The Energy Budget for Tectonic Faulting As already mentioned in the previous section, the dynamics of the tectonic faults that produce earthquakes remains puzzling (Marone 2004) since an energy budged imbalance seems to exist in tectonic faulting. Recent laboratory experiments, however, which will be discussed in this section, when applied to tectonic faults indicate that frictional stress and shear heating may be much lower than expected, thus probably resolving, at least partially, the question of this imbalance. The friction experiments in rocks mentioned in the previous section have been made at steady-state sliding conditions using velocities of no more than |1 cm/s; at such velocities, as mentioned, hysteretic elastic and plastic deformations at the scale of roughness asperities are of significant importance (e.g., see also Caroli and Nozieres 1996, Tanguy and Nozieres 1996, Caroli and Velicky 1997, Bocquet and Jensen 1997). These velocities, however, are orders of magnitude smaller than the sliding velocities which are believed to occur during an earthquake (meters or ten meters per second) and hence the extrapolation of the validity of the aforementioned constitutive laws (especially their velocity weakening dependence) to such velocities is very doubtful. This doubt is strengthened from studies of the physical mechanisms involved in the friction laws, which suggests (e.g. Lomnitz-Adler 1991, Pisarenko and Mora 1994) that different mechanisms (i.e., collisions between asperities and transfer of momentum between the directions parallel and perpendicular to the motion) may become important at large velocities. Furthermore, the results of three laboratory experiments described below started to shed light on what happens at such large velocities: First, Tsutsumi and Shimamoto (1996, 1997) performed friction measurements on rotating cylindrical samples at velocities up to 1.8 m/s and for slips of several tens of meters. This experiment shows that the behaviour of the friction changes upon increasing the velocity: at small velocities, the friction exhibits a “velocity weakening” regime (thus agreeing with the former friction experiments at small velocities), but this behaviour alters, at larger velocities, to a “velocity strengthening”. At even larger velocities, a “velocity weakening” regime is again found, which seems to be associated to the melting of a very thin layer. This behaviour seems to be in agreement with a “velocity strengthening” behaviour found in recent 3D numerical simulations (Maveyraud et al. 1999); the latter have been performed in the regime of velocities of one meter to ten meters per second


103

and showed that there is a doubling of the friction coefficient when the velocity increases from 1 to 10 m/s. Second, Johansen and Sornette (1999) reported the behaviour of the dynamic friction in the high velocity regime (i.e., slip velocities ranging up to Xmax | 0.35 m/s) from an experimental investigation in dry metallic friction. This was a spring-block sliding experiment, performed on a variety of smooth surfaces and revealed that acoustic radiation may control friction in the following sense: Radiation damping is a well-known phenomenon in electromagnetism (e.g., see p. 783 of Jackson 1975), but the corresponding mechanism of dynamic friction due to radiation of phonons had not received much attention. In Varotsos (2004), laboratory measurements have been discussed, which showed that the sound waves emitted by a propagating crack interact with the crack tip and modify the crack velocity. By the same token, in the friction experiments, the acoustic waves – emitted during sliding – lead to a radiation damping feedback; this feedback was found to be important in the range of high slip velocities studied by Johansen and Sornette (1999). Note that Varotsos (2001) showed that the radiation damping force – which is proportional to the derivative of the acceleration – plays a key role in the explanation of the experimental findings in the field measurements of acoustic emission before earthquakes. Third, Di Toro et al. (2004) reported measurements on quartz rich rock both at low- and high-slip rates. They found that in the former case friction is indeed high in agreement with previous studies, but in the latter case friction drops dramatically as the slip velocity approaches a few mm/s. More precisely, the data indicate an extraordinary progressive decrease in frictional resistance with increasing slip velocity above 1 mm/s; this decrease extrapolates to zero friction at seismic slip rates of a1 m/s, which might be due to the formation of a thin layer of silica gel on the fault surface. Di Toro et al. suggest that this might explain the low strength of major faults during earthquakes. We note, however, that Marone (2004) pointed out several reasons for caution in extrapolating these laboratory measurements to tectonic faults. Nonetheless, Marone adopted the view that nowadays several lines of evidence point to a high-speed, dynamic weakening of fault zones. Experiments of Di Toro et al. (2004) suggest that the “weakening” mechanism is connected, as mentioned above, to a thin layer of silica gel acting as grease between the surfaces. An additional key factor in these experiments is the low rate of heat production, which may provide a helpful clue in understanding the balance in the problematic energy budget for faulting since shear heating would be negligible, dissipation of seismic energy would be dominated by radiation of seismic waves and creation of surface area (Marone 2004). In other words, frictional stress and shear


heating are much lower than previously expected, thus implying that the energy imbalance for faulting, described in the beginning of the previous section, probably originates from a non accurate estimation of the energy income rather than of the energy expenses. The following clarification might be added. Varotsos et al. (2004) recently explained from first Principles why in the Gutenberg–Richter law (stating that the cumulative number of earthquakes N(>M) with magnitude greater than M is given by N (>M) a 10-bM) the so-called b-value is usually found to be around unity ranging only slightly from region to region. This explanation was achieved just by applying the analysis in the natural time-domain suggested by Varotsos and coworkers (e.g. Varotsos et al. 2001, 2002, Varotsos 2005), without using any adjustable parameter. There is nothing to differentiate the physics of earthquake rupture for small and large earthquakes in such a general scheme. According to the experiment of Di Toro et al. (2004) the onset of “weakening” occurs at only a few mm/s which would be reached even for very small earthquakes. Thus, all earthquakes, small and large ones, would experience considerable dynamic “weakening”, while earlier analyses have been predicted on the expectation that it occurs only for earthquakes of magnitude 5 or larger (Marone 2004, Kanamori and Heaton 2000). Hence, it seems that the current aspects coincide with the conclusion that there is no break in earthquake scaling relations.

9.5 Modern Views on Friction. Theoretical Studies The theoretical approaches introduced to investigate frictional forces in sheared systems can be classified into the following three categories: largescale molecular dynamics simulations, phenomenological rate-state models and “minimalistic” models. These three theoretical approaches to model friction have been recently reviewed by Urbakh et al. (2004). Simulations of the molecular order and dynamics in thin molecular layers (e.g., Thompson and Robbins 1990) indicated that stick-slip motion is associated with transitions from a static solid state to a sliding fluid state. Furthermore, friction over correlated surfaces has been analysed. Two such studies are now briefly presented below. First, we report on the memory effects in elasto-plastic models found by Tanguy and Roux (1997). They presented a model where the effective friction law results from the competition of the random interaction potential on the surface and the elastic properties of the solid (reduced to the elastic coupling between the asperity, and the center of mass of the solid). The ef-


105

fect of a long-range correlated scale-invariant random pinning force on the motion and friction properties of an elastically driven asperity was studied in the quasistatic regime. This study showed that, when the elastic coupling is weak, the macroscopic dynamic behaviour of the asperity can be described as elasto-plastic with a perfectly plastic plateau. The plastic plateau corresponds to statistically stationary sliding. Considering the fact that the macroscopic friction behaviour results from the competition between reversible and irreversible motion due to the multiplicity of equilibrium positions, they obtained a history-dependent behaviour, with marked memory effects over a characteristic length scale. It seems that this length scale is related to the “memory length” L involved in the Eqs. (9.1) to (9.8) of the “rate and state friction law”. However, the interconnection of these two “memory lengths” needs further investigation. Second, we refer to a study of the correlations induced by the dampened motion of a finite-size elastic chain with long range interactions by Tanguy et al. (1998). We clarify that in the case of solid friction, the dynamics of the slider is usually reduced to that of the asperities at the surface of the solid. The competition between the elastic restoring force (originating from the bulk) and the nonlinear pinning force (due to the contact between asperities of different solids) gives rise to multiple stable equilibrium positions. This multistability is responsible for hysteretic behaviour of asperities, when they are driven quasistatically over the pinning centers belonging to the surface of the other solid; the dissipation arises from this hysteretic behaviour. Tanguy et al. (1998) investigated the effect of the long-range elastic couplings on the fluctuations accompanying the average behaviour of an elastic line, driven quasistatically on a substrate with quenched (not changing with time) disorder. A schematic motion of the elastic chain is depicted in Fig. 1 of Tanguy et al. (1998). They considered a (discrete) one-dimensional elastic chain of size L which was discretized into L/d blocks; each point of discretization was called “asperity” and hence the quantity d represents the distance between asperities (in the strong-pinning limit, see below). Each site of the chain was subjected to the following forces: a driving force Fext(t), a random pinning force (from the interface) (which represents the interaction between the heterogeneous surface and the elastic chain and is always nonlinear), and a long-range elastic force describing the coupling to the other sites of the chain. Tanguy et al. (1998) studied the “strong-pinning” limit, i.e., the case when the couplings are small in comparison to the distortions of the pinning-potential. This study finally showed (more details can be found in Varotsos 2004) that the system organizes after a transient in a stationary state with long -range correlation and the memory of the initial state is lost. Tanguy et al. (1998) identified a crossover time-length tc above which the uniform dis-


tribution is valid and below which a power-law behaviour (with a nontrivial exponent) is observed. Furthermore, Tanguy et al. (1998) found that for a mix of various couplings, the system exhibits a crossover between a regime controlled by the short-range coupling (at small times and lengths) and a regime controlled by the long range coupling (at large times and lengths). We finally report on three solutions to the friction problem that have recently been proposed (the first two are briefly reviewed by Kessler 2001). The first, suggested by Muser et al. (2001), attributes a crucial role to dirt, i.e., the diffuse collection of foreign mobile atoms trapped between the two surfaces. Their numerical stimulations show that these mobile atoms quickly find appropriate gaps between the surfaces, where they become trapped; these atoms then “lock” the two surfaces in place. To move the top surface, it has to be pushed up and over the dirt atoms. An area independent friction coefficient is obtained, for any surface geometry, when an adsorbed layer of mobile atoms is introduced between the surfaces. The second mechanism was suggested by Gerde and Marder (2001). This is based on the physics of self-healing shear fracture and the basic idea could be simplified as follows (Kessler 2001): Imagine, we want to move a large rug some distance along the floor. Instead of dragging it, a less back-breaking method is to lift the back edge, slide the edge forward a bit and so introduce a ridge in the rug. Pushing on the ridge moves it forwards along the length of the rug, until it reaches the end. The net result is that the rug has been moved. In the fracture considered by Gerde and Marder (mode II crack) the two surfaces remain in close proximity and can come together again and bond, or “re-heal”, in their new laterally shifted positions. This re-bonding sets in some distance downstream of the crack edge, so the crack is of finite length. Their model also predicts the minimum shear force required to initiate a propagating crack. Once this minimum force is applied, self-healing cracks are created, causing the surfaces to slide past one another. The third mechanism was suggested by Rubinstein et al. (2004), who showed that the onset of frictional slip is governed by three different types of coherent crack-like fronts. Two of these fronts, which propagate at subsonic and intersonic velocities, have been also the subject of earlier studies by various groups. Rubinstein et al. show that a third type of front, which propagates an order of magnitude slower, is the dominant mechanism for the rupture of the interface. No sliding occurs until either of the two slower fronts traverses the entire interface.


107

9.6 Constitutive Friction Law for the Antisymmetric Stresses It is usually assumed that the dynamic processes along faults are governed by the friction constitutive laws, as discussed in this chapter. However, in a precursory time domain the dynamics of deformations is related to the “inner friction” which hampers a motion of dislocations; such an inner friction is called a stress resistance. It is worth noting that both kinds of frictions, i.e., the one on a fracture plane and that on a glide plane, may be closely related to rotations of particles/grains adjacent to slip planes; the related macroscopic constants are, of course, different for the two types of friction. Shimbo (1975, 1995) introduced the constitutive law governing the rotation motions as related to the rotation of grains adjacent to the slip planes which results in an appearance of antisymmetric stresses (cf. Teisseyre 2005):

Z[lk] =

1 S[lk] , 2µ *

S Z[lk] =

1 S S[lk] , 2µ*

(9.9)

S where Z[lk] is a self-rotation field and the factor µ* is introduced to indi-

cate that the constitutive parameter related to rotations is different from that related to rigidity µ. A fracture is usually characterized by an asymmetric fault pattern as manifested by the existence of main fault fracturing. The introduced antisymmetric stresses replace an action of the stress moments and the angular momentum. In our considerations we obtain instead the balance law expressing on the one hand the rotation of force arising from antisymmetric stresses (rot div S[lk]) acting on a body element and on the other hand the acceleration of rotation (Teisseyre 2005); in addition, we may introduce here also a body moment of forces related to the source function 3 (Teisseyre 2001):.

H lki

w2 S[ni ] wxk wxn

U

w2 Zl 3 l wt 2

or

(9.10) 2

H lki

w S[ ni ] wxk wxn

2

1 w H lki U 2 Z[ ki ] 3 l . 2 wt

It has been proposed that the bonds related to rotation are not as strong as those related to displacement motions and we can expect that the related waves propagate to distant sites (Teisseyre et al. 2003). It seems that the


transition from the precursory, very slow processes to those related to fracturing corresponds to the transition from the microscale motions to the miniscale and collective macroscale motions and fracturings. Instead of the body source function introduced above, we can introduce a stress moment resistance related to the inner friction (glide motion) and friction (fracturing) processes connected with rotations. As a result, we may expect to get different levels of the stress moment resistance magnitudes and the stress moment resistance R[lk] to be able to introduce into the former relation (instead of the source function). In such a case, the last equation will be written in the new form:

H lki

w2 S[ni ] R[ni ] wxk wxn

1 2

H lki U

w2 Z[ ki ] , wt 2

(9.11)

where the following expression for the stress moment resistance R[ ki ]

ª§ § Z s r0 · R[0ki ] « ¨ 1 0 ¸ exp ¨ 0 « R ¹ ¨ D © ¬©

· r0 º J0 ¸ 0» ¸ R » J 0 J 1 Z s J 2 Z s ¹ ¼

(9.12)

describes the transition from the premonitory to the fracture rebound process (see Teisseyre and Yamashita 1999) and is written in the form presented by Virieux and Madariaga (1982); it included changes of the friction constitutive laws from premonitory exponential to slip nucleation phase (slip weakening) and to dynamic phase (slip rate friction law) (see Varotsos 2004, Teisseyre 2001). Both approaches, the one in which the variation of stress resistance (Eq. 9.12) directly reduces the antisymmetric stresses, as above, and the other in which this variations enter into the source function (Eq. 9.10), introduce (into the respective relations) some instabilities related to friction and rotation processes.

9.7 Open Questions Although the dynamics of friction has been studied for hundreds of years, there are many aspects of these everyday processes that are not fully understood. A list of outstanding fundamental questions can be found in the review of Urbakh et al. (2004). Chief among these are: First, the onset of frictional motion (slip), which is central to diverse fields, e.g., physics, mechanics of earthquakes, tribology in general, still awaits for a full explanation despite the aforementioned recent advances. As a second exam-


109

ple, we refer to the question on whether stick and slip regimes are indicative of different phase states (liquid, solid, glassy) of the confined interfaces. Another point of central importance is the following: Recently, an entirely new time domain, termed natural time, has been introduced (Varotsos et al. 2001, 2002) as already mentioned above. It is known that Seismic Electric Signals (SES) activities are recorded before major earthquakes (see Varotsos 2005 and references therein). Such a recording signifies that the candidate area entered the critical regime. Upon analyzing the subsequent seismicity in the natural time-domain, we find (Varotsos et al. 2001, Varotsos 2005) that the time of the impending mainshock can be determined with an accuracy of the order of a few days. An application of this procedure to laboratory measurements, in order to find out whether it can approach the onset of frictional slip as well, has not yet been attempted.

References Beeler NM, Tullis TE, Weeks JD (1994) The roles of time and displacement in the evolution effect in rock friction. Geophys Res Lett 21: 1987-1990 Bocquet L, Jensen HJ (1997) Phenomenological study of hysteresis in quasistatic friction. J Physique I 7: 1603-1625 Bowden FP, Tabor D (1950) Friction and lubrication of solids. Part 1. Clarendon Press, Oxford Bowden FP, Tabor D (1964). Friction and lubrication of solids. Part 2. Clarendon Press, Oxford Brace WF, Byerlee JD (1966) Stick slip as a mechanism for earthquakes. Science 153: 990-992 Buchel A, Sethna JP (1996) Elastic theory has zero radius of convergence. Phys Rev Lett 77: 8, 1520-1523 Caroli C, Nozieres P (1996) Dry friction as a hysteretic elastic response. In: Persson BNJ, Tosatti E (eds) Physics of sliding friction. Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht, pp 27-49 Caroli C, Velicky B (1997) Dry friction as an elasto-plastic response: Effect of compressive plasticity. J Physique I 7: 1391-1416 Coulomb CA (1785) Theorie des machines simples. Memoire de Mathematique et de Physique de l’Academie Royale, Paris, pp 161-342 Di Toro G, Goldsby DL, Tulis TE (2004) Friction falls towards zero in quartz rock as slip velocity approaches seismic rates. Nature 427: 436-439 Farkas Z, Bartels G, Unger T, Wolf DE (2003) Frictional coupling between sliding and spinning motion. Phys Rev Lett 90: 248302(4) Gerde E, Marder M (2001) Friction and fracture. Nature 413: 285-288 Halsey TC (2003) Friction in a spin. Nature 424: 1005-1006

110 P. Varotsos, M. Lazaridou Heslot F, Baumberger T, Perrin B, Caroli B, Caroli C (1994) Creep, stick-slip, and dry friction dynamics: experiments and heuristic model. Phys Rev E 49: 4973-4988 Jackson JD (1975) Classical electrodynamics, 2nd ed. John Wiley, New York, 848 pp Johansen A, Sornette D (1999) Acoustic radiation controls friction: evidence from a spring-block experiment. Phys Rev Lett 82: 5152-5155 Johansen A, Dimon P, Ellegaard C, Larsen JS, Rugh HH (1993) Dynamic phases in a spring-block system. Phys Rev E 48: 4779-4790 Kanamori H, Heaton TH (2000) Microscopic and macroscopic physics of earthquakes. In: Rundle J, Turcotte DL, Kein W (eds) Geocomplexity and the physics of earthquakes, vol 120. AGU Monograph, Washington DC, pp 147155 Kessler DA (2001) A new crack at friction. Nature 413: 260-261 Lomnitz-Adler J (1991) Model for steadystate friction. J Geophys Res 96: 61216131 Lubkin GB (1997) Experiments find hysterisis and precursors in the stick slip friction of a granular system. Physics Today (September issue), pp 17-19 and references therein Marone C (2004) Faults greased at high speed. Nature 427: 405-406 Maveyraud C, Benz W, Ouillon G, Sornette A, Sornette D (1999) Solid friction at high sliding velocities: an explicit 3D dynamical smooth particle hydrodynamics approach. J Geophys Res 104: 28769-28788 Muser MH, Wenning L, Robbins MO (2001) Simple microscopic theory of Amontons’s laws for static friction. Phys Rev Lett 86: 7, 1295-1298 Nasuno S, Kudrolli A, Gollub J (1997) Friction in granular layers: hysteresis and precursors. Phys Rev Lett 79: 949-952 Pisarenko D, Mora P (1994) Velocity weakening in a dynamical model of friction. Pure Appl Geophys 142: 447-466 Rubinstein SM, Cohen G, Fineberg J (2004) Detachment fronts and the onset of dynamic friction. Nature 430: 1005-1009 Scholz CH (1998) Earthquakes and friction laws. Nature 391: 37-42 Scholz CH (2000) Evidence for a strong San Andreas fault. Geology 28: 163-166 Shimbo M (1975) A geometrical formulation of asymmetric features in plasticity. Bull Fac Eng, Hokkaido Univ 77: 155-159 Shimbo M (1995) Non-Riemannian geometrical approach to deformation and friction. In: Teisseyre R (ed) Theory of earthquake premonitory and fracture processes, Polish Scientific Publishers, Warszawa, pp 520-528 Tanguy A, Nozieres P (1996) First-order bifurcation landscape in a 2D geometry The example of solid friction. J Physique I 6: 1251-1270 Tanguy A, Roux S (1997) Memory effects in friction over correlated surfaces. Phys Rev E 55: 2166-2173 Tanguy A, Gounelle M, Roux S (1998) From individual to collective pinning: effect of long-range elastic interactions. Phys Rev E 58: 1577-1589


111

Teisseyre R (2001) Evolution, propagation and diffusion of dislocation fields. In: Teisseyre R, Majewski E (eds) Earthquake thermodynamics and phase transformations in the Earth’s interior. Academic Press, San Diego, pp 167-198 Teisseyre R (2005) Asymmetric continuum mechanics: deviations from elasticity and symmetry. Acta Geophys Pol 53: 2, 115-126 Teisseyre R, Yamashita T (1999) Splitting stress motion equation intoseismic wave and fault-related fields. Acta Geophys Pol 47: 2, 135-148 Teisseyre R, Suchcicki J, Teisseyre KP, Wiszniowski J, Palangio P (2003) Seismic rotation waves: basic elements of theory and recording. Ann. Geophys. 46: 4, 671-685 Thompson PA, Robbins M (1990) Origin of stick-slip motion in boundary lubrication. Science 250: 792-794 Tsutsumi A, Shimamoto T (1996) Frictional properties of monzodiorite and gabbro during seismogenic fault motion. J Geol Soc Japan 102: 240-248 Tsutsumi A, Shimamoto T (1997) High-velocity frictional properties of gabbro. Geophys Res Lett 24: 699-702 Tullis TE (1996) Rock friction and its implications for earthquake prediction examined via models of Parkfield earthquakes. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 93: 3803-3810 Urbakh M, Klafter J, Gourdon D, Israelachvili J (2004) The nonlinear nature of friction. Nature 430: 525-528 Varotsos P (2001) A review and analysis of electromagnetic precursory phenomena. Acta Geophys Pol 49: 1-42 Varotsos P, Sarlis N, Skordas E (2001) Spatiotemporal complexity aspects on the interrelation between Seismic Electric Signals and seismicity. Practica of Athens Academy 76: 388-415 Varotsos P, Sarlis N, Skordas E (2002) Long range correlations in the electric signals that precede rupture. Phys Rev E 66: 011902 (7) Varotsos P (2004) Fracture and friction: a review. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 2, 105142 Varotsos PA (2005) The physics of seismic electric signals. TERRAPUB, Tokyo, 338 pp Varotsos P, Sarlis N, Skordas E, Tanaka H (2004) A plausible explanation of the b-value in the Gutenberg-Richter law from first Principles. Proc Jpn Acad, Ser. B 80: 283-289 Virieux J, Madariaga R (1982) Dynamic faulting studied by a finite difference method. Bull Seism Soc Am 72: 345-369

10 Soliton Physics Eugeniusz Majewski Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland e-mail: [email protected]

10.1 Introduction This chapter is a brief review of some fundamental equations and recent results in the theory of solitons and their applications in physics. The soliton idea is a remarkable mathematical structure based on the integrability of a rather wide class of nonlinear differential equations. Solitons or solitary waves are a special kind of localized waves that propagate undistorted in shape. They are essentially nonlinear waves. We begin with the discovery of a solitary wave on the Edinburgh to Glasgow Canal by J. Scott Russell in 1834 (see Russell 1844, 1895). The solitary waves were known earlier than solitons. Much later, Zabusky and Kruskal (1965) discovered the mathematical structure of solitons. At that time it became clear that there are some intimate connections between these two concepts. While all solitons are solitary waves, the converse is not true; solitons have to satisfy more requirements than solitary waves. Solitons are a very restricted subset of solitary waves. A concept of soliton is very simple on intuitive grounds if we begin our study from solitary waves on shallow water. Ever since Korteweg and de Vries (KdV) first derived their famous equation for water waves in 1895, solitons have been a fascinating and popular area of study in the physics community. This chapter characterises the main features of these waves, and then reviews the fundamental concepts of the theory of nonlinear waves in order to sketch a few key ideas of the theory of solitons. There are approximately one hundred known integrable nonlinear differential equations with soliton solutions, including the KdV equation, the modified Korteweg–de Vries (mKdV) equation, the Kadomtsev–Petviashvili (KP) equation, the nonlinear Schrödinger (NLS) equation, the Boussinesq equations, the KleinGordon (KG) equation, and the sine-Gordon (SG) equation. While these investigations reveal general properties of solitons, of importance is the physical insight and applica-

114 E. Majewski

tions of solitary waves in modelling physical phenomena. Zabusky and Kruskal (1965) coined the term “soliton” due to the analogy with particles. The nagging question naturally arises: what is the difference between solitons and solitary waves? The standardized definitions for solitons and solitary waves were not established. Both are colloquially called solitons. There are many different working definitions in the literature describing how to distinguish solitons from solitary waves. These definitions change from author to author. Many authors refer to solitons as special wave pulses that can pass through each other or bounce back from each other (“elastic” interactions), keeping their basic identity and acting as particles. They are non-dispersive localized packets of energy moving with uniform velocity. Solitons resemble extended particles, even though they are solutions of nonlinear wave equations. Solitons are used successfully to model elementary particles in quantum field theories (cf., Rajaraman 1982). Some authors refer to waves which interact “inelastically” as solitary waves. Solitary waves were discovered in many branches of science, such as water dynamics, tsunami waves, optics, plasma, dipole chains, protein chains, dislocations, and seismology. In this chapter, we shall use both terms “soliton” and “solitary wave”, interchangeably. Solitons can exist in the so-called dispersive media. Most media are dispersive. That is, an initial very small amplitude disturbance in the form of a pulse will, as time evolves, tend to broaden and break up into its individual components. These are simple waves moving with different phase velocities. The existence of solitons is based on the fundamental assumption that large amplitude disturbances are considered, and it is necessary to invoke a nonlinear theory. Solitons exist because of this nonlinearity and travel with uniform velocity and no distortion in shape. If they collide, they subsequently retain their original shape and velocity. In fact, solitons are the result of the interplay between dispersivity and non-linearity. Namely, for differential equations where both dispersive and nonlinear terms are present, the effects can balance each other in such a way that special solutions called solitary waves or solitons emerge. This chapter briefly introduces the most famous nonlinear differential equations with soliton solutions, considers rotating solitons, and finally summarizes results on discrete soliton systems (cf., Hirota 1981, Tokihiro 2004). The Box-Ball System (BBS) and its application to the description of soliton motion is also discussed (cf., Toda 1967). General conclusions on soliton stability and applications close the chapter.

10 Soliton Physics

115

10.2 The Discovery of Solitary Waves In 1834, British engineer J. Scott Russell was riding a horse along the Edinburgh to Glasgow Canal. Suddenly, he noticed something strange. He expressed it in his own words (Russell 1844, 1895): …the mass of water in the channel…rolled forward with great velocity, assuming the form of a large solitary elevation, a rounded, smooth and well-defined heap of water, which continued its course along the channel apparently without change of form or diminution of speed. I followed it on horseback, and overtook it still rolling on at a rate of some eight or nine miles an hour, preserving its original figure some thirty feet long and a foot to a foot and a half in height. This was the first quantitative observation of a water solitary wave and was followed by measurements and laboratory experiments on these nonlinear waves (Drazin 1983, Drazin and Johnson 1989). Russell (1844, 1895) wrote reports summarizing his observations and experiments on solitary waves. He observed that a taller solitary wave propagates faster than a smaller one. In addition, he deduced empirically a formula for the steady velocity v of the solitary wave.

10.3 The Korteweg–de Vries Equation In 1895 Korteweg and his student de Vries presented a skillful derivation of a solitary wave equation (Korteweg and de Vries 1895). Their starting points were the equations of motion for surface water waves. They simplified these equations under the assumption that the solution propagates in the direction of increasing x. In addition, they assumed that the solution has amplitude A and wavelength Ȝ related to the water depth h by ( A / h) | (h 2 / O 2 ) 1 . Starting from a priori knowledge concerning an expected solution, Korteweg and de Vries found that a solitary wave would be described by the following nonlinear partial differential equation:

wu wu wu w 3u V u wt wx wx wx 3

0,

(10.1)

where ı = 0 or ı = 1, and u = u(x, t) is the displacement of the water surface from its equilibrium position at location x and time t. Here the units of time and distance were scaled. Equation (10.1) is known as the KdV equation. The nonlinearity is modeled in this equation by the third term that is proportional to displacement, and the dispersion is described by the fourth term that is proportional to the third derivative of displacement. The inter-

116 E. Majewski

play between these two terms is crucial for the formation of solitons. It is noteworthy that this equation does not describe dissipation. However, a soliton is characterized by a stable shape and constant velocity. Emploing a substitution method to Eq. (10.1), Korteweg and de Vries (1895) substituted u ( x, t ) \ ( x vt ) and solved the resulting ordinary differential equation for ȥ. They obtained a solution in the form of the following soliton

ª (x - vt ) v 1 º u ( x, t ) 3(v 1) sech 2 « », 2 ¬ ¼

(10.2)

where v is the constant speed of the soliton. Figure 10.1 shows a solution to the KdV equation in the form of a single soliton expressed by Eq. (10.2) for particular amplitude. However, this equation also reveals that for i different amplitudes (v 1)i , we can obtain many soliton solutions and i solitons exist here. This multi-soliton solution to the KdV equation is depicted in Fig. 10.2. The solitons have a tendency to form a sequence, with the soliton of the maximum amplitude in the front and the soliton of the smallest amplitude at the rear.

Fig. 10.1 A solution to the KdV equation in the form of a single soliton propagating to the right

Fig. 10.2 A multi-soliton solution to the KdV equation in the form of a sequence of four solitons moving to the right. The soliton of the maximum amplitude leads the sequence

10 Soliton Physics

117

Many researchers endeavored to generalize the KdV equation in different ways. Some of them accomplished their aims by introducing additional transformations (e.g., Miura 1968) and others introduced an additional space dimension (e.g., Kadomtsev and Petviashvili 1970).

10.4 The Modified Korteweg–de Vries Equation Miura (1968) and Miura et al. (1968) generalized the KdV equation. As a result, they obtained the so-called modified KdV equation (mKdV) in the form ww ww w 3 w 6 w2 wt wx wx3

(10.3)

0.

After Miura (1968), we define the relationship between the displacement u(x,t) described by the KdV equation and the new function w(x, t) in the form u ww / wx w2 . It should be emphasized that the mKdV equation is also analytically solvable.

10.5 The Kadomtsev–Petviashvili Equation The world we inhabit has 3 (space) +1 (time) dimensions, whereas most of the equations we have been studying have (1+1) dimensions. An interesting question is: what can we learn from these simple equations? Indeed, even one spatial dimension can reveal the most important features of physical phenomena. Depending on the particular physical model, one may describe wave processes in (1+1), (2+1) or (3+1) dimensions. Kadomtsev and Petviashvili (1970) generalized the KdV equation using two space dimensions by including a y-dependent term in this equation. In such a situation it is reasonable to assume a potential flow (Infeld and Rowlands 2000)

u < .

(10.4)

The KadomtsevPetviashvili (KP) equation can be written as w 2< w< w 2< w 4< V w 2< 2 4 2 wy 2 wx wt wx wx wx where V

r1 .

0,

(10.5)

118 E. Majewski

We can see that this equation is not symmetrical with respect to x and y variables. In contrary, we can observe here that x and y play different parts in this equation, or in other words, they have different weights. It is noteworthy that if we remove the derivative with respect to x in front of the parenthesis, we obtain the KdV equation inside the parentheses as follows w< § w< w< w 3< · V w 2< < 3 ¸ ¨ wx © wt wx wx ¹ 2 wy 2

0.

(10.6)

From the above equation, we can conclude that the KP solitons for ı = 1 travel in the x direction, but not in the y direction. In most cases they interact elastically, and they separate after the interaction. In addition, they have a zone of mutual interaction at the intersection that is called a virtual soliton. However, for some critical angles of the intersection, the KP solitons interact inelastically and join one another. Such a wave process is called a soliton resonance. The KP solitons for ı = 1 are stable. They were observed on water surfaces and in plasma physics (Infeld and Rowlands 2000). The other version of the KP equation for ı = –1 was also applied in solid state physics, physics of liquids, and other branches of science. Different kinds of solitons were observed, and many elastic interactions between them were described. However, some solitons are not quite stable, they decay after some period of time. The KP equation is also a very interesting area of research for discrete soliton systems (Tokihiro 2004). We shall discuss this problem at the end of this chapter.

10.6 The Boussinesq Equations Let us write down the first Boussinesq equation w 2u w 2u 2 wt 2 wx

w2 § 2 w 2u · u c ¨ ¸, wx 2 © wt 2 ¹

(10.7)

where c is a constant coefficient. The second Boussinesq equation (nonlinear string equation) can be expressed in the form w 2u w 2u 2 wt 2 wx

w2 § 2 w 2u · u d 2 ¸ , 2 ¨ wx © wx ¹

where d is a constant coefficient.

(10.8)

10 Soliton Physics

119

It is noteworthy that the KdV equation and Boussinesq equations are simple reductions of the following equation: 3 w 2u 4 wy 2

wu § wu 3 wu 1 w 3u · u ¨ ¸. wx © wt 2 wx 4 wx 3 ¹

(10.9)

10.7 The Doubly Dispersive Equations Samsonov (1988) investigated the following nonlinear equation: w 2u w 2u 2 wt 2 wx

H

w2 § 2 w 2u w 2u wu · g ¸ , 6 u a b ¨ 2 2 2 wx © wt wx wt ¹

(10.10)

where İ is a small parameter, g is the dimensionless “viscosity”, and a and b are constant coefficients. He called it the doubly dispersive equation (DDE), the wave equation describing dispersion and dissipation and having exact solitary solutions.

10.8 The Nonlinear Schrödinger Equation Let us take a closer look at the most famous nonlinear wave equation in quantum mechanics that puts a great emphasis on the wave amplitude < and its physical interpretations. Namely, we recall the nonlinear Schrödinger (NLS) wave equation. It belongs to the category of soliton equations and reveals multi-soliton solutions. It is also one of the most universal nonlinear differential equations and it was applied in many different branches of science. In general, the NLS equations can describe multiwave interactions, depending on additional conditions. The cubic NLS equation can be expressed as follows: i

w< w 2< w 2< 2 2V < < 2 2 wt wx wy

0,

(10.11)

where V r1 . The above equation also describes dispersive systems. The final form of this equation is the result of the interplay between dispersivity and nonlinearity that determines a different weight of each term. The NLS equation has soliton solutions. These solitons behave in a similar way as the KdV solitons. They are characterized by spatial and temporal stability and collide elastically. Their envelope can describe a simple pulse.

120 E. Majewski

10.9 The Nonlinear Klein–Gordon Equation The nonlinear Klein–Gordon equation (KG) can be expressed as w 2u w 2u w 2 < (u ) 2 wt wx wu

0,

(10.12)

where < is a general nonlinear function of u that may take different forms. For an exponential nonlinearity w< (u ) / wu exp(u ) , Eq. (10.12) was used as a modelling equation for many physical phenomena. For a cubic nonlinearity w< (u ) / wu u 3 u , Eq. (10.12) also had many applications. For instance, Rajaraman (1982) described the motion of an elementary particle in the framework of the unified field theory by using the nonlinear Klein –Gordon equation in the form w 2u w 2u 2 wt 2 wx

Au Bu 3 ,

(10.13)

where A and B are positive constants.

Fig. 10.3 The curve u(x) denotes the static kink solution of the Klein–Gordon equation (10.13). The curve E(x) depicts the energy density of the kink that is localized with a width characterized by A-1/2 (modified from Rajaraman 1982)

10 Soliton Physics

121

The soliton solution of this equation is as follows: u ( x)

ª A1 2 x x1 º § A1 2 · fr¨ tanh « ». ¸ 21 2 © B ¹ ¬ ¼

(10.14)

Figure 10.3 displays a soliton solution u(x) of the KleinGordon equation (10.13) and the energy density E(x) of the soliton. The solution above the x-axis plotted in Fig. 10.3 is called the “kink” and the one beneath the x-axis the “antikink”. The invariance of the solution with respect to translation is clearly visible, since a change in x1 merely moves the solution along the x-axis.

10.10 The Sine-Gordon Equation The sine-Gordon equation (SG) is a special case of the Klein–Gordon equation (KG). It was employed in the modelling of many physical processes such as for instance: motion of crystal dislocations in the periodic Peierls potential, motion of charged particles, biological processes like DNA dynamics, magnetic flux in the theory of Josephson junction ladders, Bloch wall motion in magnetic crystals, and two-dimensional models of elementary particles in the unified field theory (Rajaraman 1982). More information concerning soliton applications can be found in Barone et al. (1971), Scott et al. (1973), and Infeld and Rowlands (2000). The sine -Gordon equation can be expressed in the following form: w 2I w 2I 2 wx 2 wt

sin I ( x, t ) .

(10.15)

10.11 The Inverse Scattering Transform Processes of evolution of physical phenomena can be described by evolution equations that characterize how some physical variables evolve in time. The evolution equations are usually in the form of a set of nonlinear differential equations with given initial conditions. Most of them are very difficult to solve. Fortunately, some of them have a simple inner structure and can be reduced to linear differential equations that have exact analytical solutions. Due to the fact that these solutions describe physical models and represent applications of mathematics to the real world, they help to stimulate research in this branch of science. There are several mathemati-

122 E. Majewski

cal techniques that can be employed for this task. One of them is the socalled inverse scattering transform (IST), which is a generalization of the Fourier transform. The Fourier transforms are commonly employed to find solutions of linear differential equations. The main advantage of IST is that it reduces nonlinear problems to linear ones. We should recall that the inverse scattering problem is already well known in quantum mechanics. The key idea of this approach is that we have given the asymptotic form for the solution, and our goal is to construct the potential. In this process of constructing an appropriate potential or pseudo-potential, time t is treated as a parameter. When we say that we have given the asymptotic form for the solution, we mean that some features of the solution can be predicted. The key role in the IST is played by the Schrödinger equation. The famous KdV equation and many others can be solved using the IST technique. The IST was formulated by Gardner et al. (1967, 1974). Some more details concerning the IST are presented by Ablowitz and Segur (1981), Newell (1985), and Infeld and Rowlands (2000). The IST method allows us to transform the nonlinear partial differential equation into a linear integral equation that we can solve analytically. In addition, the obtained solutions have a form of solitons. A shortcoming of the method is that u(x, t) and various derivatives must approach zero as x o r f . Thus, this method gives only some of the solutions of the nonlinear differential equation in question. The IST method excludes periodic solutions and train waves.

10.12 Rotating Solitons Solitons, in general, can be composed of a single field or of many fields. When a soliton is composed of multiple fields that have different structures, they are called complex solitons or vector solitons. Moreover, there are composite solitons that are made up of optical fields that have different modes of their jointly induced waveguide; in addition, these multimode solitons can be viewed as spatial or temporal solitons. Composite solitons may have different forms. Carmon et al. (2001) presented some observations of (2+1)D composite solitons carrying angular momentum, and rotating throughout propagation. They called them propeller solitons because their planes of equal phase are shaped as propeller blades. Propeller solitons propagate without loss of energy and momentum. These solitons are composed of a bell-shaped mode jointly trapped with a 2D dipole mode rotating in unison. Such solitons can be described by the NLS equation. The envelopes Ȍ1 and Ȍ2 of the NLS equation were described by Carmon et al. (2001) as follows:

10 Soliton Physics

i

w u w 0u @ f

³ dW ³ H qmn C ijkl w m w j Gni ( x, t W ; [ ,0) I kl ([ ,W )dV ([ ) f

1

f

³ dW ³ H

qmn

2 f

U w 0 w 0Gnl ( x, t W ;[ ,0)w mcQ l ([ ,W )dV ([ )

f

1

³ dW ³ H 2

qmn

C ijkl w m w j Gni ( x, t W ; [ ,0)

f

u ^J

1

0 kl

([ ,W ) w 0c ekl ([ ,W ) w k cQ l ([ ,W )` dV ([ )

f

³ dW ³ H

2 f

qmn

U w 0 w 0Gnl ([ , t W ; x ,0)w mcQ l ([ ,W )dV ([ ) .

(11.97)

On the other hand, the velocity of translational motion is written as f

w 0uq ( x, t ) ³ dW ³ C ijkl w j Gqi ( x, t W ; [ ,0)w 0c ekl ([ ,W )dV ([ ) .

(11.98)

f

, w kQ l usThese two equations show that we can estimate the tensors J 0kl ing the translational and rotational motions of seismic waves simultaneously.

11.4 Possibility of Estimating a Rotational Strain Tensor Due to an Earthquake

To get information about J 0kl and w kQ l due to an earthquake based on

and w kQ l appearing in observed seismic waves, it is necessary that J 0kl

150 M. Takeo

Eq. (11.97) have a magnitude equal to or higher than w 0 ekl . Let us estimate their magnitudes in a simple case. In this section, we also assume that the coordinate system xi is Cartesian. From Eqs. (11.6), (11.7), (11.45), and (11.46), the discrepancy 'uj and the change 'Q k of a vector Q k due to defects are rewritten as

³S

'u j

pqj

df

6

'Q k where d f

1 2

Q l ³ R pqlk d f

pq

6

H ipq d6i

pq

pq

³D

i j

d6i ,

(11.99)

6

1 2

Q l ³ H ipq R pqlk d6i 6

Q l ³ H jlkT ij d6i ,

(11.100)

6

g and d6i is the i th component of the area vector

of 6. Now, we consider a simple model of an earthquake such that a material below a surface S has been plastically displaced with respect to a material above S by a constant amount which represents a rigid motion; the upper plane (denoted by S+) slips by a constant Burgers vector b relative to the lower plane (denoted by S), and S+ twists against S by a constant Frank vector : at point x0 (see Fig. 11.3).

Fig. 11.3 Schematic figures of dislocation (upper) and disclination (lower). The dislocation line is defined as a part of the boundary of a slip plane S. The disclination line is created by twisting surface S c against surface S c by rotation angle : at point x0. L is a Burgers circuit. When vector : is normal to S c, the disclination is of a twist type, and it is of a wedge type when : is on S c

11 Rotational Motions Excited by Earthquakes

151

We will derive expressions for the dislocation tensor D ij and the disclination tensor T ij in the case of a constant Burgers vector b and a constant Frank vector :. Since the discrepancy 'u j and the change 'Q k of a vector Q k are related to the Burgers vector bj and the Frank vector :i by

'u j

b j ª¬ : u x x 0 º¼ j ,

(11.101)

'Q k

: u Q k H ijk : iQ j ,

(11.102)

by comparing these with Eqs. (11.99) and (11.100), we have formulae relating D ij and T ij to bj and :j:

H jlk : jQ l

'Q k

Q l H jlk ³ T ij d6i ;

(11.103)

6

therefore :j

³T

ij

d6i ,

(11.104)

6

and bj

'u j ª¬ : u x x 0 º¼ j

³D

i j

6

³ ª¬D

d6i H jmn ³ T im x n x0n d6 i 6

i j

H jpq T

ip

x

q

6

x0q º¼ d6i .

(11.105)

Introducing I p l and E ij satisfying

D ij

H ipq w p E qj H qjn I p n ,

(11.106)

H ipq w p Iq j ,

(11.107)

T ij and defining ʌ pqn

H qnl I p l , we have v³ Ii j d Li ,

(11.108)

v³ ª¬ Eij H jpq Ii p x q x0q º¼ d Li ,

(11.109)

:j

L

bj

L

where we have used Stoke’s theorem.

152 M. Takeo

We see, the integrand of the first term on the right-hand side of (11.95) reads I mn

1 2

ʌ

w 0 E mn w mQ n ,

0 mn

(11.110)

where

Ii j

G i ( S ) : j ,

(11.111)

^

`

(11.112)

H klq I0 q

H klq w 0 ^: qG ( S )` .

(11.113)

G i ( S ) b j H jpq : p x q x0q ,

E ij ʌ 0 kl

Here Gi (S) is defined by

G i (S )

³ G ( x [ ) n dS ([ ) ³ G ( x [ ) dS i

S

i

.

(11.114)

S

It is straightforward to check that Eqs. (11.111) and (11.112) satisfy (11.108) and (11.109) if we note that

³G S

i

( L) dSi

i

³ G (S ) d L i

L

1 ° ® 0 ° 1 ¯

if L crosses S positively, if L does not cross S , if L crosses S negatively,

(11.115)

because the curve L crosses the surface S once as shown in Fig. 11.3. Here

G i(L) is defined by G i ( L)

i

³ G ( x [ ) t d L([ ) ³ G ( x [ )d L . i

L

(11.116)

L

During the last decade, waveform inversion of strong motion and teleseismic data excited by earthquakes have been used to determine the spatial and temporal variations of slip on the fault plane (e.g. Hartzell and Heaton 1983, Kikuchi and Fukao 1987, Takeo 1988), clarifying that the slip distribution on the fault plane of large earthquakes is generally very complex. The spatial resolution of the slip distribution obtained in these inversions is more than a few kilometers at best; the resolution depends on the minimum wavelength of the seismic waves employed in the inversion. Now, we assume that the Burgers vector is constant in the region S whose length-scale is shorter than 103 m, because we have no information about slip distributions in source areas smaller than several square kilometers. The order of : is not clear because the value related to an earthquake has not been obtained until now. One possible rotational deformation during an


153

earthquake is a tensile fracture at an end of the fault plane, as illustrated in Fig. 11.4. Let us assume that the order of : (O(: )) is 102 radian (|1o) and the area (S c) concerning this phenomenon is an order of magnitude less than the area of the fault plane (S), i.e., S c | Su0.1. The spatial variation of slip velocity (Ql) also has a large uncertainty due to the lack of observations. It seems, however, reasonable to assume that the spatial scale of variation is not shorter than the scale of S. Taking appropriate values for other parameters: O (b j ) | 1 m , O(Q l ) | 1 m s -1 and O (Eq. 11.114) | 1 km-1,

we get O (S 0 mn ) | 103 , O (w 0 E mn ) | 103 and O(w mQ n ) | 103 This result

have similar orders of magnitude, and it shows that ʌ0 mn , w mQ n and w 0 E mn

and w mQ n , i.e., J 0mn and w mQ n using the transis possible to estimate S 0mn lational and rotational motions of seismic waves simultaneously.

Fig. 11.4 Schematic image of a tensile fracture at edges of a fault plane

The resolution of the new angular sensor (Morris 1971, Nigbor 1994) is limited by internal sensor noise of about 3u10-4 rad/s, the value obtained in a field observation on the Izu peninsula, Japan. In order to estimate the magnitude of an earthquake whose rotational ground motion can be observed by the angular sensor, we calculate the rotational and translational velocities excited by an earthquake with a seismic moment of 1018 Nm buried 5 km deep. The focal mechanism is a vertical strike-slip fault: only dislocation is taken into account in this case. The reflection-transmission Table 11.1 Velocity structures used in the simulation of rotational and translational ground motions VP [km/s]

VS [km/s]

[kg/m3]

U

Depth [km]

QP

QS

2.80 5.60 6.00 6.80

1.30 2.90 3.40 4.00

2.30u103 2.50u103 2.60u103 3.00u103

0.00 2.70 6.10 19.00

200 400 500 600

100 200 230 270

154 M. Takeo

Fig. 11.5 Synthetic ground velocities of rotational and translational components at six stations of different hypocentral distances, ǻ. The number attached to each trace is the peak-to-peak amplitude of each of ground velocities. Zz , Zr and ut denote a rotational velocity around the vertical axis, the one around the radial axis, and a translational velocity of transverse direction, respectively

matrices (Kennett and Kerry 1979) and the discrete wavenumber method (Bouchon 1981) are used in the calculation of ground motion, assuming the anelastic layered half-space structure listed in Table 11.1. Figure 11.5 represents the rotational and translational ground velocities at stations that are in line along the strike direction of the fault plane. The rotational velocity around the vertical axis (Zz) has a maximum value of 2u10-3 rad/s at the hypocentral distance of 5 km. This simulation shows that this angular sensor will be able to record rotational motion excited by an earthquake of moment magnitude 6 (seismic moment: 1018 Nm) up to a hypocentral distance of 25 km.

11.5 Conclusions We extend the dislocation model of earthquakes to cover phenomena generated by rotational motions in the source area. The extended model includes defects, dislocations and disclinations, which are shown to be com-


155

pletely characterized by geometrical quantities, a torsion tensor and a curvature tensor. We derive a set of continuity equations among densities of dislocation and disclination and their currents. Employing the continuity equations, we derive a simple expression for the rotational velocity of seismic waves. Combining the rotational motions of seismic waves with the translational motions, we can estimate the ten and w mQ n , i.e., the rotational strain tensor and the spatial variasors J 0mn tion of slip velocity. These quantities will be large at the edges of a fault plane due to spatially rapid changes in slip on the fault and/or a formation of tensile fractures. We estimate from a simulation that the angular sensor now available will detect the rotational motions from earthquakes with magnitude 6 or larger if the hypocentral distance is shorter than 25 km.

Acknowledgments. This research was partially supported by Grant-in -Aid for Scientific Research (B), the Ministry of Education, Science, Sports and Culture, Japan.

References Aki K, Richards PG (1980) Quantitative seismology: theory and methods. Freeman WH and Co, San Francisco CA. Amari S (1962) On some primary structures of non-Riemannian plasticity theory. Memoirs of the Unifying Study of the Basic Problems in Engineering Sciences by Means of Geometry 3 D: 163-172 Amari S (1968) A geometrical theory of moving dislocations and anelasticity. Memoirs of the Unifying Study of the Basic Problems in Engineering Sciences by Means of Geometry 4 D: 284-295 Amari S (1981) Dualistic theory of non-Riemannian material manifolds. Int J Engng Sci 19: 1581-1594 Bilby BA, Bullough R, Smith E (1955) Continuous distribution of dislocations: A new application of the method of non-Riemannian geometry. Proc Roy Soc London A231: 263-273 Bouchon M (1981) A simple method to calculate Green's functions for elastic layered media. Bull Seism Soc Am 71: 959-971 Bouchon M, Aki K (1982) Strain, tilt, and rotation associated with strong ground motion in the vicinity of earthquake faults. Bull Seism Soc Am 72: 1717-1738 deWit R (1973) Theory of disclinations: II. Continuous and discrete disclinations in anisotropic elasticity. J Res Nat. Bureau Standards 77A: 49-100 Eshelby JD (1957) The determination of the elastic field of an ellipsoidal inclusion and related problems. Proc Roy Soc London A241: 376-396 Hartzell SH, Heaton TH (1983) Inversion of strong ground motion and teleseismic waveform data for the fault rupture history of the 1979 Imperial Valley, California, earthquake. Bull Seism Soc Am 73: 1553-1583

156 M. Takeo Kennett LN, Kerry NJ (1979) Seismic waves in a stratified half-space. Geophys J Roy astron Soc 57: 557-583 Kikuchi M, Fukao Y (1987) Inversion of long-period P-waves from great earthquakes along subduction zones. Tectonophysics 144: 231-247 Kondo K (1949a) A proposal of a new theory concerning the yielding of materials based on Riemannian geometry, I. J Jpn Soc Appl Mech 2: 123-128 Kondo K (1949b) A proposal of a new theory concerning the yielding of materials based on Riemannian geometry, II. J Jpn Soc Appl Mech 2: 146-151. Kondo K (1953) On the geometrical and physical foundations of the theory of yielding. Proc 2nd Jpn Nat Congr Appl Mech: 41-47 Kondo K (1955) Non-holonomic geometry of plasticity and yielding. Memoirs of the Unifying Study of the Basic Problems in Engineering Sciences by Means of Geometry 1 D: 453-572 Kondo K (1957) Geometry of deformation. Appl Math, B7-b, Iwanami Co, Tokyo Kossecka E, deWit R (1977a) Disclination kinematics. Archives Mech 29: 633651 Kossecka E, deWit R (1977b) Disclination dynamics. Archives Mech 29: 749-767 Kröner E (1958) Kontinuumstheorie der Versetzungen und Eigenspannungen. Springer-Verlag, Berlin-Göttingen-Feidelberg Minagawa S (1983) Continuum mechanics for an imperfect crystal. Zairyo Kagaku 20: 54-59 Mogi K (1978) Dilatancy of rocks under general triaxial stress states with special reference to earthquake precursors. J Phys Earth 25: Suppl S 203-S 217 Morris HD (1971) Angular acceleration measurements for geokinetic stability. AIAA Guidance, control and fright mechanics conference, Hofstra University, Hempstead, NW: No. 71-909 Mura T (1963) Continuous distribution of moving dislocations. Phil Mag 8: 843857 Mura T (1972) Semi-microscopic plastic distortion and disclinations. Arch Mech Stos 24: 449-456 Mura T (1982) Micromechanics of defects in solids. Kluwer Academic Pub Co, Dordrecht, Netherlands Nigbor RL (1994) Six-degree-of-freedom ground-motion measurement. Bull Seism Soc Am 84: 1665-1669 Schouten JA (1954) Ricci-Calculus, 2nd. Springer Verlag, Berlin Göttingen Heidelberg Shiozawa K (1980) Theory of distributed dislocations in continuum. In: Oominami M (ed) Micromechanics of solids, Orm Co, Tokyo, Japan Takeo M (1988) Rupture process of the 1980 Izu-Hanto-Toho-Oki earthquake deduced from strong motion seismograms. Bull Seism Soc Am 78: 1074-1091 Teisseyre R (1973) Earthquake processes in a micromorphic continuum. Pure Appl Geophys 102: 15-28 Yamaguchi R, Odaka T (1974) Field study of the Izu-Hanto-oki earthquake of 1974. Special Bull Earthq Res Inst, Univ Tokyo 14: 241-255

12 Ground Rotational Motions Recorded in Near-Source Region of Earthquakes Minoru Takeo Earthquake Research Institute, University of Tokyo Zip. 113-0032 1-1-1, Yayoi, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo, Japan e-mail: [email protected]

12.1 Introduction Only translational ground motions have been observed in instrumental measurements of seismic waves, and quantitative measurements of rotational ground motions have not been made until quite recently. Nigbor (1994) succeeded in measuring rotational and translational motions using a new angular measuring sensor (Morris 1971) at a surface station during a non-proliferation experiment at the Nevada Test Site. Spudich et al. (1995) also estimated a rotational ground motion excited by the 1992 Landers earthquake (M = 7.4) at the UPSAR seismograph array about 400 km northwest of the epicenter. Stedman et al. (1995) observed a rotational ground motion around the vertical axis using a Ring Laser Gyro. This motion was excited by an earthquake of magnitude 6.3 at Kelburn, Wellington, New Zealand, whose epicentral distance is more than 200 km. Nobody has, however, succeeded in recording a strong ground rotational motion in the near-source region of earthquakes until now. Bouchon and Aki (1982) simulated rotational ground motions near earthquake faults buried in layered media for strike-slip and dip-slip fault models, and obtained a maximum rotational velocity of 1.5x10-3 rad/s produced by a buried 30 km long strike-slip fault with slip of 1 m. On the other hand, employing the geometrical theory of defects, Takeo and Ito (1997) obtained a general expression for rotational motions of seismic waves as a function of parameters of source defects. They made it clear that a rotational strain tensor and a spatial variation of slip velocity can be estimated combining the rotational motions with the translational motions. These quantities will be large at edges of a fault plane due to spatially rapid changes in slip on a fault plane (Takeo and Ito 1997). Therefore,

158 M. Takeo

near-source rotational motions produce much detailed information on rupture processes of earthquakes. During an earthquake swarm at offshore region of Ito in Izu peninsula, Japan, we succeeded in recording rotational ground motions in the nearsource region of earthquakes. The purpose of this paper is to report the characteristics of the rotational ground motions excited by the earthquakes.

12.2 Observational System The observational system consists of a triaxial translational sensor, a triaxial rotational sensor, and a six-channel digital recorder. The translational and rotational motions are measured by a Kinemetrics FBA-23 triaxial accelerograph, and by a Systron Donner MotionPak triaxial gyro sensor, respectively. These sensors are similar to those of the recording system designed by Nigbor (1994). Full-scale outputs of the translational sensor and the rotational sensor are ±1 G and ±8.73x10-1 rad/s, respectively. The translational sensor has flat frequency response to translational acceleration from DC to 50 Hz. The rotational sensor has flat frequency response to rotational velocities around three axes perpendicularly intersecting each other from DC to 75 Hz. The digital data logger is a REF TEK 72A-08 DAS which has a threechannel, 24-bit resolution digitizer and a three-channel, 16-bit resolution digitizer. The signals from the rotational sensor are digitized by the 16-bit resolution digitizer, and those from the accelerograph are digitized by the 24-bit resolution digitizer. The sampling rate of this logger is 20 samples/s under a continuous recording mode. This observational system has been installed at Cape Kawana (KAW), about 4.5 km southeast of Ito, and near Cape Shiofuki (SOF), about 2.5 km east of Ito, since October 1996.

12.3 Near-Source Ground Rotational Motions The earthquake swarm started on 2 March, 1997, and lasted for 24 days: the source area lay about 3 km east of Cape Kawana extending for about 5 km in the east-west direction. Figure 12.1 shows epicenters of earthquakes with magnitudes larger than 3.5 that occurred from 2 March 15:00 to 7 March 15:00. During this swarm, 13 events excited large rotational ground motions exceeding the internal noise level of the rotational sensor at KAW. The observational system operated at SOF had a trouble and could not record ground motions.

12 Ground Rotational Motions Recorded in Near-Source Region of Earthquakes 159

Fig. 12.1 Epicenters of earthquake swarm from 2 March 15:00 to 7 March 15:00 at offshore Ito in Izu peninsula, Japan. The earthquakes with magnitudes larger than 3.5 are shown. The hatched area in the bottom panel on the right-hand side represents the offshore Ito. KAW is a station where an observational system for rotational and translational motions is installed. The closed circles represent the epicenters of the largest and the second largest events of the earthquake swarm.

The largest earthquake with a magnitude of 5.7 occurred at 3:51 GMT on 4 March. Figure 12.2 shows the triaxial translational velocities and the triaxial rotational velocities excited by the largest event and the second largest event which occurred at 14:09 GMT on 3 March, whose epicenters are shown in Fig. 12.1. These translational velocities are obtained by numerically integrating the accelerograms. The largest amplitude of rotational velocity observed at KAW during this swarm is 2.6x10-2 rad/s around the east-west axis, i.e. tilt in the north-south direction, which was excited by the second largest event. The maximum rotational velocity excited by the largest event is 5.9x10-3 rad/s around the north-south axis, i.e. tilt in the east-west direction. The peak to peak amplitude of acceleration at KAW during the largest event is 3 m/s2, whereas that of the second largest event is 8 m/s2. These large rotational velocities are accompanied by the large accelerations. The G sensitivity of the sensor (sensitivity to transla-

160 M. Takeo

tional acceleration) provided by the manufacturer is less than 3.5x10-4 rad/s/G, so that the errors in the rotational velocities due to large translational motions are less than 1.1x10-4 rad/s for the largest event, and 2.9x10-4 rad/s for the second largest event. These errors are about two orders in magnitude smaller than the signals in both cases.

Fig. 12.2 Triaxial translational velocities and triaxial rotational velocities excited by the largest event (upper panel) and the second largest event (lower panel), respectively. The epicenters are represented by closed circles in Fig. 12.1


The rotational velocities around the horizontal axes seem to be dominated by relatively higher frequency than those around the vertical axis. The Nyquist frequency of the recording system is 10 Hz. The frequency dominating the rotational velocities around the horizontal axes, i.e. tilts, is only a little lower than the Nyquist frequency of the recording system, so that quantitative evaluation of the tilts is very difficult. Therefore, we focus on the rotational motion around the vertical axis and present a preliminary analysis concerning the source process of the largest event in the next section.

12.4 Discussion The seismic moment of the strike-slip fault model used in Bouchon and Aki (1982) was about 8x1018 N·m, and the rotational velocity around the vertical axis of 1.5x10-3 rad/s was produced at a station 1 km away from the fault. The seismic moments of the largest and the second largest events of the swarm are 1.2x1017 N·m and 2.7x1016 N·m (Hayashi, personal communication, 1997). These values are two orders in magnitude smaller than that of the simulation model employed by Bouchon and Aki (1982). The maximum rotational velocities around the vertical axis at KAW are, however, about 3.3x10-3 rad/s for the largest event and about 8.1x10-3 rad/s for the second largest event. KAW lies about 3.3 km away from the both epicenters. The observed rotational velocities are several times larger than the simulation result, in spite of these smaller seismic moments and greater epicentral distances. What caused the large discrepancy between the observation and the simulation? During the last decade, waveform inversion analyses have clarified that the slip distribution on the fault plane of large earthquakes is generally complex (e.g. Hartzell and Heaton 1983, Kikuchi and Fukao 1987). One possible answer is that the large rotational velocities are caused by heterogeneity of slip velocity on the fault. Takeo and Ito (1997) derived a general expression for rotational velocities of seismic waves as a function of the geometrical quantities: torsion tensor and curvature tensor. Neglecting the term which dominates only in the high-frequency range, we get a simple expression as follows: f

w 0Z q (x, t ) | ³ dW ³ H qmn C ijkl w m w j Gni (x, tW ;[ ,0) I kl ([ ,W ) d V ([ ) . f

The velocity of translational motion is written as

(12.1)

162 M. Takeo f

w 0uq (x, t ) ³ dW ³ C ijkl w j Gqi (x, tW ;[ ,0) w 0’ ekl* ([ ,W ) d V ([ ) ,

(12.2)

f

where Cijkl, Ikl , ekl* and İqmn are the tensor of elastic constants, the current tensor of defect, the plastic strain, and Eddington’s epsilon, respectively. Green’s function Gni (x, t–Ĳ; ȟ, 0) satisfies the equation of motion

U w 0 w 0 Gni

C ijkl w j w k Gln G ni G (x[ )G (tW ) ,

(12.3)

where G ni and į(x–ȟ) or į(t–Ĳ) denote Kronecker’s delta and delta functions, respectively. Ikl is simply given by I kl

1 2

(J 0*kl w 0’ ekl* w k ’ vl ) ,

(12.4)

* where /Ĳ Ł 0ƍ and /ȟm Ł mƍ · J 0kl , and Ȟl are the plastic part of a rotational strain tensor and the slip velocity, respectively. For further details of these tensors, the reader should refer to Takeo and Ito (1997). These equations show that not only the plastic strain but also the rotational strain and the spatial variation of slip velocity at earthquake sources directly generate rotational components in seismic waves. On the other hand, translational motions in seismic waves are only excited by the plastic strain as shown in Eq. (12.2), which can be transformed into a dislocation in case of a simple fault model (Takeo and Ito 1997). Bouchon and Aki (1982) took into account only rotational motions excited by dislocations on the fault plane, and did not evaluate the direct excitation of rotational motions due to a spatial variation of slip velocity and due to rotational strains. The contribution of a spatial variation of slip velocity is another possible answer to the question posed in the head of the previous paragraph. Since the radiation patterns of seismic waves due to the second and the third terms on the right-hand side of Eq. (12.4) are different from each other, we can estimate how to change slip velocities spatially even in case of a point source approximation using rotational and translational motions at several stations around the source area. In the present case, however, we cannot estimate the spatial variation uniquely, because the rotational motions were recorded at KAW only. Therefore, we apply a simple point source model to evaluate the rotational velocity around the vertical axis during the largest event. The distribution of epicenters just after the largest event suggests that the nodal plane of the focal mechanism striking in the direction of N154°E is the fault plane of the largest event (see Fig. 12.3). First, we calculate the rotational velocity around the vertical axis at KAW using the focal mechanism shown in Fig. 12.3 with the seismic moment


of 1.2x1017 N·m. The seismic-moment-rate function is assumed to be an isogonal trapezoid as shown in Fig. 12.4. We assume that t1 and t2 are 0.2 s and 0.8 s, respectively; these values are obtained by trial and error fitting of the pulse width of the strong motion records. The reflection-transmission matrices (Kennett and Kerry 1979) and the discrete method (Bouchon 1981) are used in the calculation of ground motion, assuming the anelastic layered half-space structure listed in Table 12.1.

Fig. 12.3 Seismicity just after the largest event and the focal mechanism of the largest event obtained using near-field strong motion records (Hayashi, personal communication, 1997). The focal mechanism is plotted on the lower hemisphere. The epicenters with magnitudes larger than 2.5 which occurred on 4 March from 3:51 to 4:59 are shown

Fig. 12.4 The source-time function of PS1 used in the waveform calculation. The time constants t1 and t2 approximately correspond to the rise time of dislocation and the time for the rupture front to propagate through the fault, respectively

164 M. Takeo Table 12.1 Velocity structure used in the calculation VP

VS

ȡ

h 3

[km/s]

[km/s]

[g/cm ]

1.95 2.05 2.15 2.25 2.60 4.20 5.30 6.00 6.80 7.80

0.23 0.48 0.73 0.98 1.30 2.20 3.10 3.46 3.93 4.50

2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.30 2.50 2.70 3.00 3.20

QP

QS

[km] 0.00

50

30

0.04 0.08 0.12 0.16 0.36 1.86 4.30 15.0

50 50 50 100 300 500 1000 1000

30 30 30 50 200 300 500 500

30.0

2000

1000

Fig. 12.5 Comparison of observed rotational velocity around the vertical axis at KAW with synthetics calculated for a simple model composed by two point sources. An upper trace of the synthetics is the rotational velocity considering the full contribution of PS1 and PS2. A second trace represents the rotational velocity which takes into account PS1 and only the contribution of the spatial variation of slip velocity in PS2. The bottom trace is the rotational velocity excited by PS1. In this calculation, we consider that PS2 lies at the southeastern edge, but the synthetic for PS2 is calculated for the same epicentral distance with PS1. However, the synthetic for PS2 using the epicentral distance 1 km longer than that of PS1 differs little from the previous one

The bottom trace in Fig. 12.5 is the rotational velocity excited by this point source. The peak amplitude of the synthetic is about one seventh of the


observation. The first half cycle of the synthetics has a similar waveform with the observation, but the waveform in the later part is quite different from the observation, which has a large spiky pulse. We employ another point source which represents a spatial variation of slip velocity in a small region. Hereafter, we denote the former point source by PS1, and the latter by PS2. The first term on the right-hand side of Eq. (12.4) will vanish when we assume a flat fault plane in a homogeneous medium (Takeo and Ito 1997). Then, we consider the excitation of rotational motion due to the second term (0ƍ ekl* ) and the third term (kƍȞl) of Eq. (12.4) in PS2. The largest event is dominated by the left-lateral strike-slip motion with the strike direction of N154°E. Here, we assume a simple case of the spatial variation of slip such that the left-lateral strike-slip velocity decreases rapidly as we go to the edge of the fault. The duration of the spiky pulse appeared in the observation is about 0.1 s. The isosceles triangle with a base length of 0.1 s is employed as a source-time function of PS2. This duration of the source time corresponds to the spatial extent of about a hundred meters along the rupture direction assuming the rupture velocity of 3 km/s. We assume that the magnitude of the third term, µ kƍȞl dV (µ is the rigidity), is 1x1016 N·m/s, and that the source material satisfies the Poisson relation (Ȝ = µ). Then, the third term along the strike direction of N154ºE can be transformed to the components of the source-tensor as follows:

§ 2.62 0.79 0.0 · ¨ ¸ 16 ¨ 0.79 1.38 0.0 ¸ 1 u 10 ¨ 0.0 0.0 1.0 ¸ © ¹

(12.5)

Based on this model, we calculate the rotational velocity around the vertical axis. The second term on the right-hand side of Eq. (12.4) excites not only the rotational velocity through Eq. (12.1) but also the translational velocity through Eq. (12.2). For the second term, we use the same source-time function as that of the third term, and assume that the seismic moment of this limited region is 1x1016 N·m. Because this source time has short duration, the second term excites large spiky translational velocities of 0.5 m/s and 0.3 m/s on the NS and EW components of the translational velocity at KAW, respectively. The observed translational velocities, however, do not have such large amplitudes. Therefore, 1x1016 N·m is the supremum of the seismic moment concerned with the second term of Eq. (12.4) in PS2. Changing the time lag between PS1 and PS2, we calculate the synthetic rotational velocity and compare it with the observation. When the time lag

166 M. Takeo

is 0.3 s, we get a best fit between the synthetics and observation, as shown in Fig. 12.5. The second trace of the synthetics in Fig. 12.5 represents the rotational velocity which takes into account PS1 and only the contribution of the spatial variation of slip velocity in PS2 which lies at the southeastern edge of the fault. The spatial variation of slip velocity along the fault at the northwestern edge has the opposite sign to that at the southeastern edge. Then, the spiky pulse of the rotational velocity shown in the second trace has the reverse sign when PS2 lies at the northwestern edge. The upper trace of the synthetics in Fig. 12.5 is the rotational velocity considering the full contribution of PS1 and PS2 in the case when PS2 lies at the southeastern edge. The synthetic reproduces the observation well. When PS2 lies at the northwestern edge, the spiky pulses excited by the second term and by the spatial variation of slip velocity will cancel each other. If the spatial variation of slip velocity is small and the large pulse is excited only by the second term of Eq. (12.4), PS2 must have the seismic moment of 2x1016 N·m. However, this source also excites the translational velocity with amplitude larger than 1 m/s which was not observed. Therefore, the large spatial change of slip velocity should occur rapidly during the rupture process of the largest event. The time lag of 0.3 s corresponds to the spatial separation of about 1 km between PS1 and PS2 assuming the rupture velocity of 3 km/s. Then, we can estimate that PS2 lies about 1 km southeast of PS1 or the hypocenter; in other words, the fault slip stopped rapidly about 1 km southeast of the hypocenter. In the region of the eastern coast of Izu peninsula, many young and small submarine volcanoes are identified (Hamuro et al. 1980), and a submarine eruption occurred on 13 July 1989, during an earthquake swarm at the eastern offshore Ito which started on 30 June 1989. A shallow reflection survey in this region reveals that there are several old dyke formations whose P wave velocity is higher than that of the surrounding media (Kasahara et al. 1991). These old dyke formations are one of the candidates of barriers which make the slip stop rapidly. A similar rupture process was inferred for the largest earthquake of the 1989 earthquake swarm at the eastern offshore Ito (Takeo 1992). Of course, this simple model is not a unique one to explain the large rotational velocity observed at KAW, but is a candidate for the rupture model of the largest event. Acknowledgments. The author expresses his gratitude to S. Ide, W. Nakayama, I. Nishidomi, K. Imanishi, N. Hayashi, H. Aoyama, and I. Ogino who kindly supported the observation. I acknowledge the careful reviews by two anonymous reviewers, all of whom provided useful criticisms and suggestions. This research was partially supported by Grant-in-Aid for


Scientific Research (B), the Ministry of Education, Science, Sports and Culture, Japan.

References Bouchon M (1981) A simple method to calculate Green’s functions for elastic layered media. Bull Seism Soc Am 71: 959-971 Bouchon M, Aki K (1982) Strain, tilt, and rotation associated with strong ground motion in the vicinity of earthquake faults. Bull Seism Soc Am 72: 1717-1738 Hamuro K, Aramaki S, Kagami H, Fujioka K (1980) The Higashi-Izu-oki submarine volcanoes, Part 1. Bull Earthq Res Inst Tokyo Univ 55: 259-297 (in Japanese) Hartzell SH, Heaton TH (1983) Inversion of strong ground motion and teleseismic waveform data for the fault rupture history of the 1979 Imperial Valley, California, earthquake. Bull Seism Soc Am 73: 1553-1583 Kasahara K, Yamamizu F, Ikawa T, Kuroda T, Takahashi A (1991) Reflection profiles of active volcanic region, the east coast of Izu peninsula. Earth Monthly 13: 145-153 (in Japanese) Kennett L N, Kerry NJ (1979) Seismic waves in a stratified half-space. Geophys J R astr Soc 57: 557-583 Kikuchi M, Fukao Y (1987) Inversion of long-period P waves from great earthquakes along subduction zones. Tectonophysics 144: 231-247 Morris HD (1971) Angular acceleration measurements for geokinetic stability. Paper presented at AIAA Guidance, Control and Flight Mechanics Conference, Hofstra University, Hempstead NY, No. 71-909, Aug. 16-18, 1971. Nigbor RL (1994) Six-degree-of-freedom ground-motion measurement. Bull Seism Soc Am 84: 1665-1669 Spudich P, Steck LK, Hellweg M, Fletcher JB, Baker LM (1995) Transient stresses at Parkfield, California, produced by the M 7.4 Landers earthquake of June 28, 1992: Observations from the UPSAR dense seismograph array. J Geophys Res 100: 675-690 Stedman GE, Li Z, Bilger HR (1995) Sideband analysis and seismic detection in a large ring laser. Applied Optics 34: 5375-5385 Takeo M (1992) The rupture process of the 1989 offshore Ito earthquakes preceding a submarine volcanic eruption. J Geophys Res 97: 6613-6627 Takeo M, Ito HI (1997) What can be learned from rotational motions excited by earthquake? Geophys J Int 129: 319-329

13 Fracture-Band Geometry and Rotation Energy Release Roman Teisseyre, Marek Górski, Krzysztof P. Teisseyre Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland; e-mail: [email protected]

13.1 Introduction In this chapter we recall some basic ideas of the Earthquake Dislocation Theory (Droste and Teisseyre 1959, Teisseyre 1961, 1964, 1970) and Fracture Band Model (Teisseyre 1996, 1997, Teisseyre and Wiejacz 1993, Teisseyre et al. 2001) in order to obtain a better insight into the problem of fracturing under different load conditions, including the earthquake premonitory and rebound phases. A counterpart of the rotation processes and rotation energy release explains fragmentation process and permits to estimate the efficiency of different fracturing modes.

13.2 Earthquake Dislocation Theory We will start with recalling some elements of the elastic dislocation theory (e.g., Eshelby et al. 1951, Nabarro 1951, Kröner 1981): – Dislocation notion in its physical meaning is related to disorder in a crystal lattice caused by a slip along a certain glide plane by a lattice spacing (lattice constant Ȝ); as a result, the lattice disorders appear only at the edges of the glide, while along a glide the continuity is preserved. This notion differs essentially from a geological dislocation like fault. – Dislocated area with a constant slip value (the Burgers vector) 'u O , along its surface, is bounded at its edges by the dislocation line, called in physics just a dislocation (only such a line represents a real physical object in a crystal lattice). – The elastic energy is concentrated around a dislocation line and is a source of elastic deformation, decreasing with distance from the dislocation.

170 R. Teisseyre et al.

– Dislocations can have different signs (orientation of slip vector as related to the normal of the dislocated area); the dislocations of opposite signs attract each other (tendency to join the respective two dislocated areas), while dislocations of the same sign repel each other; a dislocated area is bounded at its opposite edges by the dislocations of opposite sign. – An external stress field acts on a dislocation line; when this load overpasses a certain limit (stress resistance), the opposite dislocations move in the opposite directions (the Koehler force). – Under an external load the dislocations having the same sign and situated on a common plane, may form a dislocation array; this happens when the dislocations moving in the same direction are, at the first leading dislocation, stopped by some barrier (obstacle), with a greater stress resistance. – The dislocations grouped in an array form a concentration of stress field S nA S0 ( S0 is the external stress load, nA is the number of dislocations) and when the concentration of stresses is very high, such an array well approximates a dislocation with the slip nA O . – The stress field of an array, with a sufficiently great number of dislocations entering it, exactly approximates the field of a crack tip. – At the other side of the obstacle, the travelling array can meet the opposite array; the external forces and additionally the attraction of the opposite arrays may break the barrier and the strains of the two arrays will be mutually canceled, and their energies will be released; a related dynamic process becomes manifested by formation of a micro-crack. Recall now the basic elements of the Earthquake Dislocation Theory (Droste and Teisseyre 1959, Teisseyre 1961, 1964, 1970): – The early premonitory time-domain: formation of the dislocation arrays of different signs, interaction between the arrays, generation of the micro-cracks accompanied with the respective energy releases (transition from quasi-static to dynamic processes and from stress resistance to friction). – The advanced premonitory time-domain: interaction between the tips of microcracks of opposite orientations (signs); mutual annihilation of the respective crack tips leading to expansion of the cracks, formation of bigger and bigger cracks; formation of fragments of slip fracturing (macrocracks, fragmentation); development of a rapid dynamic process along the planes with the slip fragments, in which the fragmented parts join together in a main fault (an earthquake); the possible aftershocks. These processes may develop along two perpendicular planes, but in reality, due to the fact that any geological space is extremely complex, one main fracture plane is

13 Fracture-Band Geometry and Rotation Energy Release

171

usually formed first, and an asymmetric geometry pattern of the resulting faults remains. In this theory, an energy release is explained by the mutual annihilations of the strain energies of the opposite groups of defects: dislocation arrays, tips of microcracks, tips of cracks and those of fragments (macrocracks).

13.3 Earthquake Thermodynamics and Fracture Band Model The basic elements of the fracture band model in a 2D simplification (Teisseyre 1996, 1997, Teisseyre et al. 2001): – In an earthquake preparation zone, besides the basic lattice, we expect an existence of a super-lattice caused by the interactions between the densely distributed dislocations (a dislocation super-lattice can be associated with an internal structure, band of the old slip planes or the slip plane fragments). – We assume that for the super-lattice constant ȁ we can put / O . – We expect that in earthquake preparation zone the super-lattice may be very irregular. In order to make it more coherent we define, at desired places, the vacant dislocations; a difference between the best fitted regular super-lattice and the real one defines a number of the vacant dislocations. – The thermodynamics of a super-lattice (Teisseyre 2001) is based on the Gibbs formation energy gˆ f for a vacant dislocation and the related expression for an equilibrium number of vacant dislocations is

nêq

§ gˆ f exp ¨ /3 © kT 1

· ¸. ¹

– For a fracture model we assume for simplicity a disc model of an earthquake volume 'V

SR2 D .

(13.1)

– In the fracture band model, we assume that a band of slips is active both during the premonitory time-domain and during the fracture process; the respective motions appear as glide motions (dislocation slips) and as fracturing (fracture slip). – We assume that a local shear stress before an earthquake can be estimated by the value of the related stress drop (Teisseyre 2001)

S

A 'S ,

(13.2)


where we shall note that this assumption follows from the studies of series of earthquakes (see Teisseyre 1996, Teisseyre and Wiejacz 1993). – The Burgers dislocation vector b (slip vector) is assumed to be given by the product of the number of dislocations in an array and the lattice constant b

NO ,

'u

where the number of dislocations entering an array may be estimated to be proportional to the shear local field; hence, according to the former assumption we can put N

B 'S

(13.3)

and we get 'u

b

B O 'S

B OS . A

– For a band of shear planes, an equivalent value shall be multiplied by ratio of a band width D and super-lattice constant ȁ (Fig. 13.1): b

'u

B O 'S

D

/

B D OS . / A

(13.4)

Fig. 13.1 Shear band model

– Finally, for a seismic scalar moment we obtain the expression M0

P b 's P B

O 'S S R 2 D , /

(13.5)


173

where for the given M 0, ǻS, R and assumed constants µ, Ȝ, ȁ we can find a source thickness D. – For the total energy release we get the formulae

'E

1 S 'S S R 2 D , 2P

'E

A ('S ) 2 S R 2 D , 2P

(13.6)

where the second relation follows from the above-mentioned empirical relation (13.2). Using the observational data 'E rad , 'S , R and the thickness D estimated from the seismic moment (13.5), we may estimate the total energy release (13.6). – The estimated total energy release can be compared with the Boltzmann expression for the energy release 'E

kT ˆ 2 'SR D 3

O

(13.7)

as defined by the volume of the broken bonds, with 'ˆ being the source damage parameter. However for the band model we shall define, instead of the elementary volume element O 3 , the element related to both the crystal lattice and super-lattice /O 2 . We get instead of (13.7): 'E

kT 2 'SR D /O 2

(13.8)

and hence the redefined damage parameter ' can be estimated. – The seismic efficiency can be now estimated as follows:

K

'E rad 'E

2P 'E rad . A('S ) 2 S R 2 D

(13.9)

– The shear band fracture model can be generalized to the form including the action of tensile stresses (Teisseyre et al. 2001). Some thermodynamic considerations related to the presented fracture band model are presented in paper by Teisseyre (2001).

13.4 Elastic Rotation Energy A density of strain energy for the case of asymmetric fields (see Chapter 3) can be written as


1

H

2

1

Sik Eik

2

S

T ik

SikS

E

T ik

EikS ,

(13.10)

where this expression contains also the elastic rotation energy. This formula can be considered separately for the axial and deviatoric fields; for any tensor F we can write: Fîk

1 3

Fss G ik ,

Fik

1

Fik

3

(13.11)

Fss G ik ,

and on this basis we consider the cases of compression, shears and rotations separately. We assume that the diagonal terms Sˆss , Eˆ ss of the total fields are equal to those of the elastic fields; this means that the self fields are zero in the axial/deviatoric representation: SˆkkS = 0 , Eˆ kkS 0 . The energy densities can be written as

H

3O 2P § wuk · ¨ ¸ 2 © wxk ¹

H( )

1

H( )

1

2

2

for the compression case, and

S(ik ) E (ik )

1

S(ik ) E(ik )

P¨

S 2

T ( ik )

S(Sik )

E

T ( ik )

E(Sik )

or

2

§ wuk · § wuk · * S S ¸ ¨ ¸ P Z(ik )Z(ik ) , x x w w © i ¹(ik ) © i ¹(ik )

(13.12)

for the shear case, where referring to Chapter 3 we use the following assumption for the self -rotation field: E(Sik ) Z(Sik ) , P is the rotation rigidity (Shimbo 1995, Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2003). Hence, here and further on we neglect the § wu · cross terms as formed by the independent fields, like ¨ k ¸ Z(Sik ) 0 . © wxi ¹(ik ) The density of the rotation elastic energy is

H[ ]

1 2

S[ik ] E[ik ]

ª wuk º ª wuk º * S S » « » P Z [ik ]Z [ik ] . w w x x ¬ i ¼[ik ] ¬ i ¼[ik ]

P«

(13.13)


175

We shall underline that the elastic rotation energy is included only when assuming the constitutive law joining rotations with the antisymmetric stresses. This expression corresponds to the density of angular motion energy when putting for the constitutive law for the antisymmetric part of stresses and for the self-fields the following relations:

S[ik ]

2P * ª¬ E[Tik ] E[Sik ] º¼ ,

S[Sik ]

2P *Z [Sik ] ,

Z [Sik ]

E[Sik ]

(13.14)

as already postulated in Chapters 3 and 5.

13.5 Cross-Band Fracturing Model and Rotation Processes During the precursory time-domain and during a seismic event we can consider the same system of glide and slip planes as defined for the band model. The cross band model (see Teisseyre 2004) consists of two perpedicularly oriented shear plane systems: one greater with the characteristic parameters R, D and the other smaller, with parameters r, d (Fig. 13.2, also compare Fig. 13.1).

Fig. 13.2 Two systems of the band planes

Taking the slip values on the parallel and perpendicular planes as related to the dislocation arrays, we put according to (13.4) for slips on the parallel (main) planes and on the perpendicular planes:


'u &

'u A

O 'N &

D

/ d O'N A /

O D 'S , / O B A d 'S , / B&

and (13.15)

where the parameters B& and BA determine an asymmetry of the fracture pattern: 'N &

B & 'S ,

'N A

B A 'S .

We relate these slips with the stress drop during a considered seismic event. For the band model describing the systems of the parallel (main) planes and perpendicular planes we may define the seismic moment, stress release, and rotation release or the drop of the angular seismic moment. Such expressions contain both the classic energy release and the elastic rotation energy release, assuming that stress drops contain both symmetric and antisymmetric parts: 'S 'S( ) 'S[ ] . For the seismic moment generalized in such a way, and its release, we obtain: M&

'M

S & D(S R 2 ) ,

&

2

'M A

D 'S (S R ) , 'M

A

S A d (Sr 2 ) ,

and

2

d 'S ( Sr )

or according to Eqs. (13.2), (13.6), and (13.15): A / 'N & (S R 2 ) D 'S (S R 2 ) , & B O A / 'N A (Sr 2 ) d 'S (S r 2 ) . A B O

'M & 'M With Z &

A

¦ 'u /

&

N&

DO 2

/

and Z A

¦ 'u

and (13.16)

A

/

NA

dO

/2

we obtain

the expressions for elastic rotation energy release: 'E[&]

'M & Z &

A / DO 'N & (S R 2 ) N & 2 & B O /

N&

DO

/2

D 'S ( S R 2 ) ,

(13.17) E[A]

'M A Z A

A / dO 'N A (S r 2 )N A 2 A / B O

NA

dO

/2

d 'S (S r 2 ).


177

The energy release expressions presented here correspond to the previously defined density of elastic rotation energy (13.14). Compression and induced shears S[12]

S[21]

Under the assumption ǻV = 0 we can reexamine Dietrich’s (1978) compression experiments, which leads to the conclusion that for the precursory shear stress S12pre ! 0 (as induced by the confining pressure) we arrive at coseismic rebound compensation of shears by the rebound stress S12reb 0 (signs are defined arbitrarily): (13.18)

S12pre S12reb | 0 .

With the antisymmetric stresses induced by a rotation process as shown in Fig. 13.3, we can propose the following reinterpretation: – local induced shear stresses are antisymmetric: S12 ! 0 and S12 0 ; – for stresses on the parallel plane & (which will become the main fracture plane) we have S12& pre ! 0 ,

S12&reb 0 ;

– for rotations (on the main plane & we have ( Z(Sik )

J & pre o clockwise ,

(13.19)

J (ik ) )

J &reb o anticlockwise ;

(13.20)

– for stresses on an auxiliary, perpendicular plane A we have S 21A pre 0 ,

S 21A reb ! 0 ;

(13.21)

– for rotations on an auxiliary, perpendicular plane A we have

J A pre o clockwise ,

J A reb o anticlockwise .

(13.22)

Precursory rotations associated with slips or dislocations are opposite to that related to coseismic process and both preserve their sense on perpendicular planes. The repeated precursory processes lead to a number of the microfracturings finally forming a fragmentation pattern. On the presented figures, here and further, we explain schematically a possible pattern of premonitory distributions of the dislocations arrays or microcracks; a rebound process follows such a scheme leading to a cumulative process of energy release.


To relate the stress acumulation S to defect densities, we recall the basic relation S = nS0 for the dislocation array in an equilibrium (supported by the external stress S0). This relation comes from interaction of the dislocations (densities Di represented here by the stress gradients Si) pushed by the external field S0 to the first blocking dislocation; S is the resulting stress accumulation at the place of the first dislocation: S

n

x

³ S i di

³ wx S dx .

0

w

(13.23)

0

In our case, we have no initial shear field but only compression: due to the lower value of shear resistance we have to assume that inside a body there appear regions with the induced shear stresses of opposite signs (as a result, we get the induced antisymmetric shear stress).

Fig. 13.3 Compression: induced shear stresses of opposite signs on perpendicularly orientated planes; a common sense of rotations

According to the band-model, the shear stress is related to the concentration of induced dislocations (in the number Nind, nind, respectively): the induced shear stressess are asymmetric, S = An, hence, the stresses at these planes can be related to dislocation densities (Fig. 13.2): – on the parallel plane & : S & pre | AN & ind v D & ind ,

S & reb | AN & ind v D & ind ,

(13.24)

– on the perpendicular plane A S A pre | An Aind v D A ind ,

S A reb | An Aind v D A ind .

(13.25)


179

The signs of dislocations of these planes can be different, depending also on the position of their wedge, but a common sense of rotations shall be preserved on these planes. Earthquake process and its energy release relates to a coalescence of dislocation arrays of opposite signs; also that part of energy release which depends on drop of moment of momentum depends on dislocation coalescence process; it can be expressed by the rotation release. For a total shear release on the two planes we can demand at a compression (with the signs as in Eq. 13.19) 'S & pre 'S & reb | 0 ,

'S AA pre 'S AA reb | 0

(13.26)

while for an instantaneous, rebound, shear stress drop and the total shear stress drop we get 'S & reb | A 'N & ind ,

'S A reb | A 'n Aind ,

'S reb | A 'N & ind 'n Aind .

(13.27)

Thus, the total shear stress drop for compression process can be, in such a case, relatively small; the real stress drop relates to non-shear components. The coseismic rotations are opposite to the precursory rotations; it is the coseismic, rebound process that brings the release of rotation. According to (13.16) and (13.17), the total rotation releases at the & and A planes the precursory and rebound processes become: 'M & pre 'M & reb | 0 ,

'M A pre 'M A reb | 0 .

(13.28)

The final instantaneous rotation release for coalescence process on both planes and the total one are as follows: 'M &reb |

A/ 'N &ind , BO

'M A reb

A / Aind 'n , BO (13.29)

'M reb

'M &reb 'M A reb

A/ 'N Aind 'n Aind , BO

where A and B are the adequate proportionality coefficients. Comparing this result with that for the related stress drop (13.27) we find that at the compression load the related energy releases for the induced shears are relatively smaller (a difference of stress drops related to parallel and perpendicular systems) than for the rotation related moment drops (a sum of moment drops). Under a compression load the rotation processes in fragmentation and fracturing play an essential role.


External shear load S120

S210

For symmetric fields, in a similar way as above, we may put at the main, parallel plane & and at the perpendicular planes A (Fig. 13.4): S12& pre ! 0 ,

S12& reb ! 0 ,

S 21A pre ! 0 ,

S 21A reb ! 0 ,

(13.30)

J & pre o clockwise ,

J & reb o anticlockwise ,

(13.31)

J A pre o clockwise ,

J A reb o anticlockwise .

(13.32)

Fig. 13.4 External shears: shear motion on perpendicularly orientated planes; an opposite sense of rotations 0 For the regional shearing field S 0 (S120 S 21 ) , the effects of processes at the main shearing and at auxiliary, perpendicular planes are (on both planes, & and A

S & pre | S0 AN & pre v D & pre ,

S & reb | S0 AN & reb v D & reb ,

(13.33)

S A pre | S0 An& pre v D & pre ,

S A reb | S0 An& reb v D & reb .

(13.34)

The shear stress drops on both planes, & and A , and the total shear stress drop is, respectively: 'S & | A 'N ,

'S A | A 'n ,

'S reb | A('N 'n) .

(13.35)


181

The signs of rotation release on these planes are opposite; for instantaneous rotation release we get expression with a relatively smaller value (comparing to the former case) 'M reb

A/ 'N A 'nA . BO

(13.36)

Comparing this result with that for the related stress drop (13.35) we find that at a shear load the related energy releases for the shears are relatively greater (a sum of stress drops related to parallel and perpendicular systems) than for the rotation related moment drops (a difference of moment drops). Under a shear load the shear processes play the main role in fragmentation and fracturing. Compression and shear load S110 < S220 0 Assuming S110 S22 we can present the initial stress state as a combination 1 0 0 0 S110 and S120 S21 ( S 22 S110 ) of the two cases presented above: S22 2 (Fig. 13.5).

Fig. 13.5 Compression and shear load: asymmetric shears and differentiated rotations

Such a combination leads to: (a) bigger precursory phenomena (sum of the precursory shear and induced shear); and (b) smaller shears on perpendicular planes (difference of precursory and induced shears).


Hence, there follows a rule for earthquake asymmetry faulting (even independent of any previous stick-slips): – a combined shear stress drop becomes 'S reb | A['N 'N ind 'n 'nind ] ,

(13.37)

– an instantaneous rotation release becomes 'R reb | B ['N 'N ind 'n 'nind ] .

(13.38)

Thus, for momentum and moment of momentum releases for the 2D band fracture model we obtain 'M 'M Z

AS [ R 2 D ('N 'N ind ) r 2 d ( 'n 'nind )] ,

(13.37ǯ)

BS [ R 2 D ('N 'N ind ) r 2 d ('n 'nind )] .

(13.38ǯ)

13.6 Conclusions The fracture processes are determined by stress load and local stress concentrations due to accumulation of dislocations and partial mutual dislocation annihilations. In such processes, the formation of dislocation arrays and microcracks related to the premonitory processes and its rebound event plays an essential role. Additional counterpart of stress moments appears due to the antisymmetric stresses related grain rotations and due to stress moments formed by the fracturing pattern. Rotations at source zones help to understand geometry of fracturing and releases of stress and rotation counterparts as a result of precursory and rebound processes.

References Eshelby JD, Frank FC, Nabarro FRN (1951) The equilibrium of linear arrays of dislocations. Philos Mag 42: 351-364 Dietrich JHJ (1978) Preseismic fault slip and earthquakes prediction. J Geophys Res 83: (B8) 3940-3954 Droste Z, Teisseyre R (1959) The mechanism of earthquakes according to dislocation theory. Sci Rep Tohuku Univ, Ser 5 Geophys 11: 55-71 Kröner E (1981) Continuum theory of defects. In: Balian R, Kléman M, Poirer JP (eds) Physics of defects (Proc Les Houches, XXXV), North Holland Publ Comp, Amsterdam


183

Nabarro FRN (1951) The synthesis of elastic dislocation fields. Philos Mag 42: 1224-1231 Shimbo M (1995) Non-Riemannian geometrical approach to deformation and friction. In: Teisseyre R (ed) Theory of earthquake premonitory and fracture processes, PWN, Warszawa, pp 520-528 Teisseyre R (1961) Dynamic and time relations of the dislocation theory of earthquakes. Acta Geophys Pol 9: 3-58 Teisseyre R (1964) Dislocation systems and their interaction inshock sequence. Acta Geophys Pol 12: 23-36 Teisseyre R (1970) Crack formation and energy release caused by the concentration of dislocations along fault planes. Tectonophysics 9: 547-557 Teisseyre R (1996) Shear band thermodynamical earthquake model. Acta Geophys Pol 44: 219-236 Teisseyre R (1997) Shear band thermodynamical model of fracturing with a compressional component. In: Gibowicz S, Lasocki S (eds) Rockburst and seismicity in mines, pp 17-21, Balkema, Rotterdam-Brookfield Teisseyre R (2001) Shear band thermodynamic model of fracturing. In: Teisseyre R, Majewski E (eds) Earthquake thermodynamics and phase transformations in the earth’s interior. Academic Press, San Diego-Tokyo. Teisseyre R (2004) Spin and twist motions in a homogeneous elastic continuum and cross-band geometry of fracturing. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 173-183 Teisseyre R, BoratyĔski W (2003) Continua with self-rotation nuclei: evolution of asymmetric fields. Mech Res Commun 30: 235-240 Teisseyre R, Wiejacz P (1993) Earthquake sequences: stress diagrams. Acta Geophys Pol 41: 85-100 Teisseyre R, Teisseyre KP, Górski M (2001) Earthquake fracture-band theory. Acta Geophys Pol 49: 463-479

14 Rotation Motions: Recording and Analysis Krzysztof P. Teisseyre, Jerzy Suchcicki Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland; e-mail: [email protected]

14.1 Introduction Rotation motions can be classified as those associated to the body seismic waves (displacement-related component and micromorphic component) and those which form independent fields (pure rotation and twist waves); see Chaps. 4–6. The equipment that records rotation motions may use various sensors, like the Sagnac-effect based gyroscopes (see Chaps. 11, 12, 29, 30, 31, 37), seismometers (Chaps. 15, 32, 33, 34), tiltmeters (Chap. 36) or rotation sensors (Chap. 35). In this Chap. we present some records obtained with a system of two horizontal seismometer pairs, each containing two pendulums suspended on a common axis and aligned in opposite directions. The pairs were oriented perpendicular to each other. The system was constructed by J. Suchcicki (see Teisseyre et al. 2003). Its ability has been improved by some numerical procedures normalizing the signals at the antiparallel channels. The errors caused by the inevitable small differences in seismograph responses have been estimated and a reliability of recordings was tested in many ways: by filtering in the time domain (using some data obtained from the same equipment as a reference, see NowoĪyĔski and Teisseyre KP 2003), or by numerical filtering procedure in the frequency domain and the learning procedure for filters (Teisseyre R et al. 2003a, b). Any serious analysis of rotation wave records would require, first of all, the existence of a network of recording stations; however, up to now, only few rotation-recording stations do exist, and these use various sensors. There is also a need for a more advanced theory describing propagation and reflection of the rotation waves. Such an advanced approach should follow the development of the classical seismology, starting with hodographs and separation of phases of rotation motions.

186 K.P. Teisseyre, J. Suchcicki

The independent rotation waves may travel with different, rather lower velocities than those related to the body waves. This is due to the different material constants that describe the stress response to rotational deformations. Such constants enter in the constitutive relation between the stress moments (or equivalently, the antisymmetric stresses) and angular motion (see Chaps. 4–6). To better understand the role of pure rotation and twist, we shall take into account the fact that rotation of particles or grains induces antisymmetric stresses (equivalent to stress moments). We expect the rotation rigidity (see Chap. 5) to be smaller than the rigidity modulus; hence, we could expect the late arrivals of the related rotation waves. To discover such late arrivals we shall start with hodographs for near field and gradually extend the required time interval of registrations. A first trial of such a near field hodograph is presented by Jaroszewicz et al. in Chap. 31. However, we shall also take into account an interrelation between the displacement motion and rotation, which may lead to a kind of coupling of these motions; this is, among other things, discussed in this chapter.

14.2 Examples of Records and Their Preliminary Analysis In this chapter we present some examples of rotation wave recordings, and their preliminary analysis. All the cases chosen were analyzed in the frequency range of 2.6-43 Hz, some cases being studied also in the low frequency range: 0.3-3 Hz. The main part of our analysis is based on the data from l’Aquila Observatory (central Italy). Twenty four cases were chosen, for which good quality of rotational components has been obtained; good quality means that the seismic event is seen not only in the plots of the so-called initial data (displacement velocity V, after its correction by filtration), but in the plots of rotational motions ( ~ 'V/2l0 , where l0 is the reduced length of the seismometer) as well. Data acquisition took place in 2002; the chosen cases belong to the local seismic events. Among the events recorded in l’Aquila, the nearest occurred at a distance of 6.9 km, while the five most remote ones at a distance of about 40 km from the measuring site in the Castello Cinquecentesco in the town of l’Aquila. The maxima of initial signals, Vmax , appear to lie between 75 Pm/s (for the seismic event nearest to the station) and 1 Pm/s. The calculated rotation motions achieved maximum values from 15.7 to 0.37 Prad/s, depending on the case. In all the cases except of four, the twist motions have slightly greater amplitudes than the spin ones (the four cases for which the spin curve had

14 Rotation Motions: Recording and Analysis

187

a higher maximum value belong to a few cases of low intensity of initial and rotational signals, and high noise content in the latter). Generally speaking, with increasing distance, the signals relating to the seismic event, at both the spin and the twist plots, were less distinct from the noise. In the tectonic seismic events encountered near l’Aquila we found some discrepancy and shift between the curves of the displacement velocity signals (shown here after filtration and normalisation) and the curves of rotation motion, especially profound at the beginning of the seismic event. The rotational motions were often unexpectedly large. Here we present the results for the three cases: one from the l’Aquila Observatory (Fig. 14.1); one for an earthquake in Podhale region (southern Poland, 30 November 2004 at 17:18; Fig. 14.2); and a seismic event in the mine in southern Poland (Upper Silesian mining region; Fig. 14.3). The latter two events were registered at the Ojców Observatory, southern Poland. To study the differences between the displacement velocity curves and the rotational ones, and to analyse the course of seismic records, we introduce index T, defined as a mean of the absolute values of differential signals.

T

1 § 'V12

'V · 34 ¸ , 'V12 = V1 V2 , 'V34 = V3 V4 . ¨ 2l0 ¹ 2 © 2l0

The plots of this mean (lower curves in Figs. 14.1.b, 14.2b, 14.3.b; also Figs. 14.1d, 14.2d and 14.3d) were compared to the curves of mean absolute values of the displacement velocity signals U

1 4

V

1

V2 V3 V4

seen in the upper portions of the same figures. Subsequently, on the basis of variation in shape and amplitude of both curves, we computed, for short time intervals, the new indices Rm defined as follows:

Rm

2

¦ T ¦U . 2

Index Rm is analogous to the indices R1 and R2 used in the study of differential motions at the Pasterze Glacier (see Chap. 15 and the references therein). While analysing the l’Aquila data, indices Rm were in each case calculated for three time intervals: one at the beginning of seismic event, one somewhere in the middle and the last in that part where oscillations start to decline. Usually such an interval was 60 samples long (which corresponds


rad/s

rad/s

m/s

m/s

(a)

s

m/s

(b)

rad/s

s

s

Fig. 14.1a, b Seismic event recorded at l’Aquila Observatory (20 Aug 2002, 13:50, Aquilano region) for normal frequency range (2.6-43 Hz): (a) displacement velocities V2 and V3, spin, twist; (b) mean absolute velocities of displacement U (top) and mean absolute values of rotational motions (bottom)


189

rad/s

rad/s

m/s

m/s

(c)

s

m/s

(d)

rad/s

s

s

Fig. 14.1c, d Seismic event recorded at l’Aquila Observatory (20 Aug 2002, 13:50, Aquilano region) for low frequency range (0.3-3 Hz): (c) displacement velocities V2 and V3, spin, twist; (d) mean absolute velocities of displacement U (top) and mean absolute values of rotational motions (bottom)


rad/s

rad/s

m/s

m/s

(a)

s

m/s

(b)

rad/s

s

s

Fig. 14.2a, b Earthquake recorded at Ojców Observatory (30 Nov 2004, 17:18, Podhale region) for normal frequency range (2.6-43 Hz): (a) displacement velocities V2 and V3, spin, twist; (b) mean absolute velocities of displacement U (top) and mean absolute values of rotational motions (bottom)


191

rad/s

rad/s

m/s

m/s

(c)

s

m/s

(d)

rad/s

s

s

Fig. 14.2c, d Earthquake recorded at Ojców Observatory (30 Nov 2004, 17:18, Podhale region) for low frequency range (0.3-3 Hz): (c) displacement velocities V2 and V3, spin, twist; (d) mean absolute velocities of displacement U (top) and mean absolute values of rotational motions (bottom)


rad/s

rad/s

m/s

m/s

(a)

s

m/s

(b)

rad/s

s

s

Fig. 14.3a, b Mining seismic event recorded at Ojców Observatory (22 Mar 2004, 23:48, the region of Upper Silesia) for normal frequency range (2.6-43 Hz): (a) displacement velocities V2 and V3; spin, twist; (b) mean absolute velocities of displacement U (top) and mean absolute values of rotational motions (bottom)


193

rad/s

rad/s

m/s

m/s

(c)

s

m/s

(d)

rad/s

s

s

Fig. 14.3c, d Mining seismic event recorded at Ojców Observatory (22 Mar 2004, 23:48, the region of Upper Silesia) for low frequency range (0.3-3 Hz): (c) displacement velocities V2 and V3, spin, twist; (d) mean absolute velocities of displacement U (top) and mean absolute values of rotational motions (bottom)


to 0.6 s). In most cases, the results obtained had the following characteristic feature: indices Rm calculated for the first and the last interval were greater than for the middle one, and the first had the greatest value. This result, emphasising temporal variation of the wave generation in the source, is not shown here. For simplicity, we only show, in Fig. 14.4a, the means of those three indices, denoted by squares. The same figure shows also maxima of rotational motion for the same cases (absolute values), denoted by asterisks. Both kinds of resulting data are ordered by the maximum (absolute) value of displacement velocity, Vmax. Next, we have normalized the maximum amplitudes (Vmax) to the related epicentral distances. A damping effect is not included, but the distances considered are not drastically different. Then we put again these experimental results in Fig. 14.4b, but rearranged according to new values at the abscissa. Now, the Rm-means are shown as triangles, and rotation motion maxima – as small five-pointed stars. We return to the obtained picture in the discussion. Beside the above-mentioned discrepancy between the curves, the rotation motions compared with the displacement motions differ also in minute

Vmax

Fig. 14.4a Analysis of 24 seismic events recorded at l’Aquila; normal frequency range. Mean indices Rm (squares) and maxima of rotation motions amplitude (asterisks) versus maxima of displacement velocity


195

normalized V max

Fig. 14.4b Analysis of 24 seismic events recorded at l’Aquila; normal frequency range. Mean indices Rm (triangles) and maxima of rotation motions amplitude (stars) versus distance-normalized maxima of displacement velocity

details – micro-differences look like results of a phase-shift on the way of seismic waves from the source to the station. Comparing the plots of U and T, we noticed that the same holds for the means. Similar observations are drawn from the analysis of an earthquake in the Podhale region. This seismic event had longer duration; therefore, finding the details of differences between separate curves is more difficult. Interestingly enough, an analysis of the same cases in the low frequency range (0.3-3 Hz), gives surprisingly different course of the studied event. We observed slightly later arrivals of distinct peaks, as compared to the results of analysis in normal (2.6-43 Hz) frequency range, especially visible in the plots of mean values ( U and T, compare Fig. 14.1d with Fig. 14.1b). Also the general shape of recorded event is different; relatively highamplitude oscillations persist for longer time than in the higher frequencies. For the mining events (see Fig. 14.3), the rotation motions are more similar to the displacement fields, although we still find all the abovementioned differences: between curves of initial and differential data, and


between results obtained at low frequencies and in the normal frequency range. Here, the number of studied cases was small; nevertheless, it seems that the results of the mining events registered at Ojców have more in common with the results for mining events obtained at KsiąĪ Observatory (in Sudety Mts., southern Poland), than with the results of analysis of tectonic earthquakes.

14.3 Discussion According to the analysis of l’Aquila data, we may tentatively state that, during the seismic event, the short intervals with the high content of rotations interlace with intervals with a relatively low content of rotation waves. These results fit to a slip-rotation scheme of fracturing, presented in Chap. 13. Accordingly, we may say that a slip step unlocks a rotation step occurring with some delay; and vice versa: a rotation step is followed by a slip. A possible support for this hypothesis comes from an analysis of seismic events recorded at the Pasterze Glacier (Chap. 15). In the course of differential motion, obtained from this research, we have also noticed some precursory signals directly prior to the record of the event. Experimental evidence from l’Aquila shows that there exist a hyperbolic relation Vmax · Rm = constant (see Figs. 14.4a, b). After the distance-normalisation of the abscissa, its relation with the indices Rm still resembles a hyperbole, but now the values of mean Rm in the higher-amplitude part of the plot are greater than before. These relations refer to situation closer to the source, and we see that the smaller the displacement amplitude (for a given case), the bigger the part of energy emanated as rotations. We may say: in smaller earthquakes, relatively bigger portions of energy release through rotational waves, and this relation has a hyperbolic character. However, it is still too early for any definite statements about the rotational aspect of seismicity around l’Aquila. Note that a picture similar to that in Fig. 14.4a was found for the seismic events occurring in Pasterze Glacier, studied in the frequency range of 3-15 Hz (see Chap. 15). For the glacier events, however, no distance-normalised values could be calculated, as we do not know the distances from the measuring site to the sources of registered seismic events. A few glacial cases were analysed also in the frequency range of 0.3-3 Hz, and then no relation between Vmax and indices R1 or R2 was found. In the seismic events occurring in mines, studied so far, the generation of rotation motion is apparently more strictly bounded to the course of „regular” seismic waves generation. This may be explained by smaller


197

confining pressure in mines, as compared to the foci of tectonic earthquakes. Under the conditions present in the mine, no large rotations are needed to unlock the slip movement. To come upon conclusions, some discrepancies were found between rotational and „classic” seismic motions emitted from the tectonic shock. The discrepancies were much milder in the cases of mining tremors. But we cannot make any firm statement about an influence of the local material micromorphism on the results obtained at a given station, because outcomes of detailed analyses are still sparse. Therefore, we must take into account the fact that the rock media between the source and the measuring station may distort the shape of rotation curves, to an unknown extent. For example, the minute time-differences between local peaks of displacement and rotational motions (these are seen after stretching the time scale) might reflect the processes in the source, but might also be results of phase-shift in the material between the focus and the measuring equipment. The low-frequency seismic waves seem to travel somewhat slower than the waves of higher frequencies (this is especially clearly seen in the diagrams showing rotation motions), but we cannot decide yet, whether this is a source-effect or an effect of rock media influence. We hope that further studies, with the networks of rotational seismic stations, will solve these, and many more questions.

References NowoĪyĔski K (2004) Estimation of magnetotelluric transfer functions in the time domain over a wide frequency band. Geophys J Int 158: 32-41 NowoĪyĔski K, Teisseyre KP (2003) Time-domain filtering of seismic rotation waves. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 1, 51-61 Teisseyre R, Suchcicki J, Teisseyre KP (2003a) Recording the seismic rotation waves: Reliability analysis. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 1, 37-50 Teisseyre R, Suchcicki J, Teisseyre KP, Wiszniowski J, Palangio P (2003b) Seismic rotation waves: basic elements of theory and recording. Annals Geophys 46: 4, 671-685

15 Glacier Motion: Seismic Events and Rotation/Tilt Phenomena Marek Górski, Krzysztof P. Teisseyre Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland e-mails: [email protected]; [email protected]

15.1 Introduction The many-year seismic monitoring of the Hans Glacier (South Spitsbergen) made it possible to associate seismic events with dynamic processes taking place in the glacier and related to its movements. The first registrations of seismic events in the Hans Glacier were made by Roman Teisseyre in the summer season of 1962 (Lewandowska and Teisseyre 1964). The study of seismic events on the Hans Glacier are based on two sources of recording. The first is the incessant recording of ice seismicity on the seismological station (HSP) at the Polish Polar Station Hornsund (Górski 1997). The other is the seasonal seismic survey carried out on the Hans Glacier. The results from the Hans Glacier were compared with analogous studies in the Antarctic and an Alpine glacier. The study of rotation waves which were generated and propagated in ice was initiated in the Hans Glacier region in 2000 (Teisseyre et al. 2004). The study was continued at the Pasterze Glacier in the Austrian Alps. There are two main types of seismic events generated in glaciers: icequakes (Fig. 15.1) related to the release of stresses accumulated in ice, and ice-vibrations (Fig. 15.2) of a relatively long duration and relatively low frequency spectrum (dominant frequencies of 2-12 Hz).

15.2 Icequakes Observations of icequakes on the Hans Glacier lead to the conclusion that the recorded seismicity can be related to the release of stresses in the marginal zone of the glacier, on the boundary between the two parts of the

200 M. Górski, K.P. Teisseyre

Fig. 15.1 Icequake event recorded on the Pasterze Glacier at 14:32 on 28 August 2005

Fig. 15.2 Ice-vibrations event recorded on the Pasterze Glacier at 16:12 on 29 August 2005

glacier: the part which is strongly associated with rocky environment and the other which constitutes the glacier’s main stream. This can be seen in Fig. 15.3, in which we show the location of foci of icequakes recorded in two measurement series (Górski 2003). Icequakes are associated with regions of large gradient of ice movement velocity, rather than with the large value of ice flow velocity itself (Fig. 15.4). The figure shows a comparison of the location of epicenters of icequakes with magnitudes greater than – 0.7, with the annual mean distribution of ice flow velocity at the glacier surface. The seismically active region is situated in the marginal zone of the glacier along the western border of the maximally cracked region; in this place the gradient (on a transverse profile) of the glacier velocity in its annual movement is large. The glacier’s bottom in this area is at depths from 0 to over 50 m below sea level. Spectral parameters of icequake foci have been determined for the series of events recorded at the Hans Glacier. The calculations were based on Brune’s model. A comparison was made of icequake series recorded in different seasons (Górski 2003). A comparison of the seismic moment– focal radius and seismic moment–seismic energy relationships for spring and summer seasons point to seasonal changes of physical parameters of ice or focus structure. Figure 15.5 shows, for the event series of Fig. 15.3, the relation between the seismic moments and the source radii: lines of

15 Glacier Motion: Seismic Events and Rotation/Tilt Phenomena

201

constant stress drop are marked. For comparison, we also present in this figure (gray-colour area), the groups of various earthquakes and mining tremors in South Africa gold mines (Abercrombie and Leary 1993). The ellipse represents the region occupied by icequakes recorded in an Antarctic shelf glacier (Osten-Woldenburg 1990). The radii of icequakes are in the range of 10–100 m. It is seen in the figure that the location of points corresponding to the same values of the seismic moment for earthquakes differs from that for icequakes. Icequakes are shifted towards greater values of focus radii. This is a consequence the different physical properties of ice and rocks.

Fig. 15.3 Location of icequake epicentres of three series at the Hans Glacier and seismometer sites. The glacier’s margin is marked by a broken line

15.3 Ice Vibrations Vibration-type events accompany glaciodynamical processes in the main glacier flow area (Fig. 15.4). These vibrations are most probably related


Fig. 15.4 Location of icequakes epicenters (circles) recorded in the Hans Glacier in April 1995 (Górski 1997). Arrows are the vectors of annual glacier motion velocity (Jania 1992)

Fig. 15.5 Seismic moment vs. source radius. The circles, triangles and crosses mark icequake series recorded in the Hans Glacier. The lines labeled 0.0001, 0.001 and 0.1 MPa represent the respective constant stress drops. The gray area represents the location of groups of various earthquakes and mining tremors in South Africa gold mines, ellipse indicates icequakes recorded in Antarctic shelf glacier


203

to the processes occurring in the bottom zone of glacier and to displacements of glacier parts due to gravity or uplift forces. Of interest is an analysis of these events in terms of coherent seismic waves in the glacier movement zones (self-organization processes). Spectral analysis of the recorded vibrations indicates that there exists a relation between their period and the scale of dynamic processes within the glacier (Górski 2004). Spectra of vibration-type seismic events contain characteristic resonance frequencies related to the scale of dynamic processes within the glacier. The measurements were made with the use of continuous recording and large sampling frequency, which enabled a full interpretation of the generation process of seismic events in the glacier, those of vibration-type in particular. The recordings made from April to August 2002 by an array of seismometers placed directly on surface of the Hans Glacier enabled us to fairly accurately locate the vibration-generating area. In Fig. 15.4 this area is shaded. The major part of the analysed material are the records of seismo-glacial events at the Hornsund station. Owing to the refinement of digitalisation of analog seismograms, a valuable comparative material was obtained from the vibration seismograms recorded by one of the authors at Huron Glacier of the Antarctic Peninsula (Fig. 15.6). Vibrations recorded at the Hans Glacier in Spitsbergen are shown in Fig. 15.7. Vibrations recorded at the Hans Glacier in Spitsbergen are also compared to the events of the same type recorded at Pasterze Glacier in the Alps (Fig. 15.8). 15.3.1 Relation between rotation/tilt phenomena and the Pasterze Glacier seismic events Measurements on the Pasterze Glacier, Austria, have been performed by means of one rotation seismograph system in September 2003, and two such systems in September 2005. Each of the systems consists of two vertical seismometers (Fig. 15.9), their horizontal pendulums being aligned in opposite directions. Such a pair permits to record vertical displacements, and also a rotation/tilt around horizontal axis, as the difference between records from two separate sensors (cf. Chapter 14 by Teisseyre KP and Suchcicki, and Chapter 33 by Wiszniowski). The two systems were oriented perpendicularly enabling to record rotations around two independent horizontal axes. Each of the rotation/tilt motions is a complex one: it is a sum of the spin and twist motions (see Chapters 3 and 4) and also may include the tilt variation component. We have no separate source of knowledge about variations of the glacier’s surface tilt below the recording systems, so the signal differences are referred to the rotation/tilt motion.


Fig. 15.6 Ice vibration event recorded on the Huron Glacier at 03:15 on 15 January 1991. The displacement seismogram recorded on the glacier is shown on top. The lower diagram presents the isolines of the spectrum; broken line denotes the dominant frequency

Fig. 15.7 Ice vibration event recorded on the Hans Glacier at 06:35 on 21 August 2002. The displacement seismogram recorded on the glacier is shown on top. The lower diagram presents the isolines of the spectrum; broken line denotes the dominant frequency


205

Fig. 15.8 Ice vibration event recorded on the Pasterze Glacier at 00:53 on 30 September 2003. The displacement seismogram recorded on the glacier is shown on top. The lower diagram presents the isolines of the spectrum; broken line denotes the dominant frequency

Fig. 15.9 Horizontal rotation system constructed from two vertical seismometers suspended on a common axis and aligned in the opposite directions (construction: J. Suchcicki, see Wiszniowski et al. 2003; phot.: A. SkrzyĔski)

The rotation/tilt phenomena recorded on the Pasterze Glacier indicated a distinct activity observed during the whole recording experiment. For analysis of seismic events, we have chosen single tremors and in some cases two or more tremors; the total number of analysed cases is 39. We estimate that from the data collected in 2005, most of the usable se-


quences were taken into account; those with a high noise level were excluded from further study. The recorded displacement velocities are called initial data, in contrast to the differential data, which mean the rotation/tilt. Differential data are defined as the differences between the filtered signals from two parallel but oppositely oriented pendulum sensors, divided by the reduced distance between them. The maximum amplitudes of the displacement velocity for a given shock were generally in the range of 1.8-26 Pm/s; two smaller events were included, which will be mentioned later. An analysis of results shows that on the surface of glacier the relation between seismic displacement oscillations and the differential motions is complex (it seems to be much more complex than in rock media); the records show an almost constant rotation/tilt activity related to the glacier responses to the accumulated strains caused by glacier deformations and flow. Studying the diagrams containing both the initial and differential data, we have distinguished several types of glacier responses revealing different correlations between the initial and differential data: – an almost perfect correspondence: the seismic event is clearly seen both in the plots of the initial data and of differential ones; the influence of noise is negligible; – a good agreement: the event is still clearly visible on the differential components, but the influence of noise is high; – in one of the differential signals, the seismic event may be distinguished with ease, while in the other it is not so; – in differential signals, the seismic events are invisible, or at least hard to find. As mentioned above, the glacier seismic events include the icequakes and the ice vibrations (see Figs. 15.1 and 15.2). Typical examples of analysed cases including vertical displacement velocities and rotation/tilt motions are shown in Figs. 15.1015.15. From the initial recordings, only two channels are shown, because channel V2 is visually indistinguishable from V1, and V4 from V3. The initial data are always shown unfiltered. In general, stronger seismic events are characterized by rather good agreement between vertical displacement velocities and the shape of differential data; the three strongest events belong to the first type. Their maximum amplitudes were 26 Pm/s, 20 Pm/s and 18 Pm/s; the fourth reached an amplitude of 14 Pm/s which was found also in two cases of worse initial-differential data correspondence. On the average, stronger


207

Fig. 15.10 Event on the Pasterze Glacier, 30 August 2005, 13:21. Channels V1 and V3 present the vertical displacement velocities; channels T1 and T2 present rotation/tilt motions around two horizontal axes






209

Fig. 15.14 Event on the Pasterze Glacier, 31 August 2005, 06:41. Channels V1 and V3 present the vertical displacement velocities; channels T1 and T2 present rotation/tilt motions around two horizontal axes for the 0-3, 1-5 and 3-15 Hz frequency ranges

Fig. 15.15 Pasterze Glacier, 31 August 2005, 03:38. Seismic event of long-time, low-amplitude, ascribed to the ice vibration class. Differential motion curves are poorly correlated with those of the displacement motions. Channels V1 and V3 present the vertical displacement velocities; channels T1 and T2 present rotation/tilt motions around two horizontal axes for the 0-3, 1-5 and 3-15 Hz frequency ranges


events contain a relatively smaller contribution of the rotation/tilt motions, when analysed in the higher frequencies range. All initial data were pass-band filtered in the 3-15 Hz range. Ten cases were analysed also in the 0.3-3 Hz range and additionally in the 1-5 Hz range (Figs. 15.14 and 15.15); these cases were chosen because a high content of low frequency undulations was visible in the initial data. Cases shown in Figs. 15.14 and 15.15 belong to this group, other cases were analysed only in the higher-frequency part of the spectrum. In many cases, curves showing rotation/tilt correspond to the curves of initial data, especially for the strongest seismic events. Weaker seismic events, and probably those which occurred at a greater distance from the measuring site, showed more varied differential motions, as compared to the initial signals. Icequakes of short-duration recorded at a close distance revealed a poor agreement of rotation/tilt motions with the initial data presenting displacement motion (see Fig. 15.14). This is especially marked in low frequencies. For all the cases analysed in low frequencies, differential motions appear smaller than those obtained in an analysis in high frequencies, and bear less resemblance to the displacement motions. In order to make more precise analysis, we have calculated indexes R1 and R2 for a given interval, showing relation between mean rotation/tilt motion (squared) and the mean filtered displacement motion (squared), for each seismometer pair separately:

R1

6T12 , 6U12

R2

6T22 , 6U 22

where

T1

U1

V1 V2 2l0

V1 V2 2

,

T2

,

U2

V3 V4 2l0

V3 V4 2

,

,

Vi are the displacement velocities recorded with separate sensors and 2l0 is the reduced distance between two sensors within a pair. Such indexes are compatible with the ratio R used in the analysis of data collected at the Pasterze Glacier in 2003 (Teisseyre KP et al. 2004.). These indexes were calculated for each of analysed cases, and always the case included the time interval of the seismic event and some short intervals before and after


211

it. For presentation purposes, somewhat longer time-windows are shown in Figs. 15.14 and 15.15. Our analysis with the help of the calculated indexes R1 and R2 reveals that for higher frequencies the indexes decrease with increasing displacement motions. This is shown in Fig. 15.16, together with a positive correlation between maximum rotation/tilt amplitudes and those of the displacement velocities. For low frequencies, no such correlations were found (see Fig. 15.17). Indexes R1 and R2 calculated for the frequency range 3-15 Hz lie generally in the range 0.07-2.6. Differences between R1 and R2 are in many cases large. The strongest event, that of 26 Pm/s amplitude, was analysed only in this higher-frequency part of the spectrum; indexes calculated for this case are amongst the lowest: R1 = 0.18; R2 = 0.32. The indexes calculated for low frequencies (0.3-3 Hz) are more uniform for each case; they lie in the range of 1.1-7.6.

Fig. 15.16 Maximum amplitudes of displacement velocity signals vs. maximum amplitude of differential signal in Prad/s (asterisks), and mean value of R1 and R2 (circles). Pasterze Glacier, 2005; data analysed in the 3-15 Hz range


Fig. 15.17 Maximum amplitude of the displacement velocity signals signals vs. maximum amplitude of differential signal in Prad/s (asterisks), and mean value of R1 and R2 (circles). Pasterze Glacier, 2005; data analysed in the 0.3-3 Hz range

Two events clearly stand out; these are the smallest ones, whose maximum amplitudes were about 0.8 Pm/s while the neighbouring noise was reaching 0.1-0.2 Pm/s. In the first of these cases, the indices for higher frequencies are the greatest: R1 = R2 = 5.4; for low frequencies we obtained R1 = 6.7 and R2 = 6.6. The second event, which occurred 37 minutes later, also shows a large content of rotation/tilt motions, as the indices are again relatively large: R1 = 1.9, R2 = 2.4, and for low frequencies R1 = 6.4, R2 = 7.3. We must remember that each time the window selected comprised, beside the recording of the event, also a certain sequence of just noise, before and after the seismic event. This noise might influence the results to some extent; on the other hand, the rotation/tilt activity appears frequently in the time periods without icequakes. Similar index R, calculated for some analysed cases belonging to the data collected on the Pasterze Glacier in 2003 (Teisseyre KP 2004), are


213

several times smaller. Maybe, the wider spectrum of those analysed data is the cause of such a profound difference, but this requires further research. 15.3.2 Transient quiescence in rotation motion or a variable geometry?

The lack of distinct correspondence of differential motions with the initial data, revealed in many cases, is worth consideration. Let us assume that this disagreement between the curves is systematic. Indeed, in many such cases some strong fluctuations are seen on rotation/tilt plots before and after the seismic event, and they might well be related to the event. Also, a marked difference between two rotation/tilt channels and a certain quiescence in these channels is seen, being more visible in one of them (to emphasise this, the same case was shown in Fig. 15.14, with the frequency ranges for rotations/tilts: 0-3, 1-5, and 3-15 Hz). We find two possible explanations. First, rotational noise is usually present in the creeping glacier; these tiny motions facilitate the flow. When they are in a certain area blocked for some reason, the stress reaches higher values and an icequake occurs. This would be similar to the well-known seismic quiescence in a tectonically active region, but in a much shorter time scale. In this explanation, the above-mentioned special undulations before and after the icequake would be the signs of blocking and unblocking of the creep-and-rotation activity in the area. Such a hypothesis assumes that the curve of differential motions reflects the preseismic activity in the focus lying at a small distance from the measurement site. These fluctuations might be a sign of preparation for rupture or slip process, and after the event they result in smaller motions in the focal area; during the seismic event itself, the majority of rotation/tilt motions becomes only two-dimensional, and this may be also the reason why rotational waves have a relatively smaller amplitude at this moment. More precise analysis, using several time windows (before, during, or after the shock) would probably enlighten the problem of disagreement between initial and differential motion curves, so often observed in the research at glaciers. We have made the first attempt: we calculated indexes R1 and R2 once more for two already investigated cases (Figs. 15.14 and 15.15), but not for the same time intervals as previously, but in four or six time-windows separately. Two time-windows were chosen for periods of noise. In the first case, the seismic event was relatively short (see Fig. 15.14) and was taken into analysis as a whole. In the analysis of the second case (see Fig. 15.15), the seismic event was divided into three parts of equal length. The last time-window was used to analyse the period just


after the seismic event. In each time-window, indexes R1 and R2 were calculated for two spectral ranges: 0.3-3 and 3-15 Hz. For low frequencies, all the obtained indices lie in a very narrow range: 4.9-7.8. For higher frequencies, the time interval when the shock was visible in initial data differs from time intervals before and after the seismic event. In the first case, R1 = 0.27 and R2 = 0.5 for the event and outside the seismic event these indices were in the range 4.6-5.8. In the second, ice-vibration case, during the shock these indices appeared to be in the range of 1.05-1.78, and for time outside the seismic shock the range was 3.6-5.9. Therefore we may conclude that (a) the relative weakness of high-frequency differential motions during the seismic event is proved, (b) the long-duration seismic event of the ice vibration character appeared to be similar to other events, despite its resemblance to the exaggerated noise (whatever it might be). Such conclusions are in agreement with the general picture seen in Figs. 15.16 and 15.17.

15.4 Discussion The results obtained show that in glaciers we observed probably more complex relations between the seismic events (icequakes and vibrations) and rotation/tilt phenomena. The rotation/tilt phenomena have always been present at the investigated glaciers. They may be signs of the ice flow. However, also opposite interpretation may be true: these tiny movements may facilitate the creep. Even the character of rotational/tilt noise, so often different for different orientations of sensors, also points to the complexity of seismic field at glaciers surface; such a complexity would be hard to detect with single sensors. Seismic events in ice are also rich in rotational compounds, especially at low frequency range (0-5 Hz). The differential data, calculated for many sensors, bring new information on the complex glacier responses to stress. To obtain deeper knowledge of dynamic processes occurring in the glacier, more systems to record rotational/tilt data should operate on it simultaneously. Probably this would also help to refine some methods of analysis. We shall notice that the rotation/tilt activity might be different in cooler glaciers. It is also possible that the same or similar phenomena associated with relations between the glacier rotation noise and glacier flow exist in the tectonic regions of Earth’s crust and mantle. In the case of rocks, such a flow-related noise would be limited only to very low frequencies and would be detectable only with instruments of a very high sensitivity. How-


215

ever, at deep parts of the seismotectonic regions, at elevated temperatures, the situation might be again similar to that in glaciers. Acknowledgement. Part of visual analysis and calculations has been done with the help of computer programs and procedures written by Jan Wiszniowski (including time corrections).

References Abercrombie R, Leary P (1993) Source parameters of small earthquakes recorded at 2.5 km depth, Cajon Pass, Southern California: Implication for earthquake scaling. Geophys Res Lett 20: 1511-1514 Górski M (1997) Seismicity of the Hornsund region, Spitsbergen: icequakes and earthquakes. Publs Inst Geophys Pol Acad Sci B-20: 308, 1-77 Górski M (2003) Icequakes in Hans Glacier, Spitsbergen: source parameters of icequake series. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 4, 399-407 Górski M (2004) Predominant frequencies in ihe spectrum of ice-vibrations events. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 4, 457-464 Jania J (1992) Some results of glaciological research – Hansbreen. In: Field Workshop on Glaciological Research in Svalbard, University of Silesia, V/19-V/34 Lewandowska H, Teisseyre R (1964) Investigations of the ice microtremors on Spitsbergen in 1962. Biul Inf Komisji Wypraw Geof PAN 37: 1-5 Osten-Woldenburg H (1990) Icequakes on Ekstrom ice shelf near Atka bay, Antarctica. J Glaciol 36: 31-36 Teisseyre KP, Górski M, Suchcicki J (2004) Seismic events and rotation waves in the Hans Glacier, Spitsbergen, and Pasterze Glacier, Austria. Acta Geophys. Pol. 52: 4, 465-476 Wiszniowski J, SkrzyĔski A, Suchcicki J (2003) Recording rotations with a pendulum seismometer: A sensor with reduced sensitivity to linear motions. Acta Geophys Pol 51: 4, 433-446

16 Rotational Energy and Angular Momentum of Earthquakes Eugeniusz Majewski Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland e-mail: [email protected]

16.1 Introduction Motions in the earthquake source can be translational, rotational, rolling, vibrational, and rocking. The importance of the study of rotational motions occurring in the earthquake source stems from the fact that these motions may provide information regarding the structure as well as energy states of the source. This chapter estimates a rotational energy generated by rotational motions in the earthquake sources. We derived here general expressions for rotational energy of an earthquake in terms of dimensions of the earthquake source and of the total slip on the fault. In addition, the angular momentum generated in the earthquake source was considered.

16.2 Modelling the Rotational Motions Excited in Earthquake Sources as Rolling Motions We consider here a simple model of an earthquake source composed of two tectonic plates and a large, round fragment of rock (shaped as a solid cylinder) between them. The tectonic plate A moves from right to left, but the tectonic plate B stays at rest. At the same time, the large, round fragment of rock rolls from right to left. The rolling motion of the solid cylinder is a combination of purely translational and purely rotational motions. The rotation of the largest fragment of rock is conveyed to other, smaller rock fragments that rotate as well. Thus, in the earthquake source there are many rotating fragments of rocks that are the sources of seismic rotation waves. Figure 16.1 shows the schematic picture of a simple model of a rolling motion in the earthquake source.

218 E. Majewski

O

O

Fig. 16.1 A simple model of rolling motion generated in the earthquake source. Due to the motion of tectonic plate A during an earthquake, the round fragment of rock shaped as a cylinder rolls from right to left. We assume here that plate B is at rest. The rolling motion is a combination of a translational motion over a distance s and a pure rotation in the counterclockwise direction

16.3 Rolling in the Earthquake Source as Translation and Rotation Combined Our starting point in exploring the rotational energy is to assume a rolling motion in the earthquake source. Here we consider only a solid rock cylinder that rolls smoothly along a tectonic plate surface; that is, the cylinder rolls without slipping or bouncing on the plate surface. Note that the center of the cross-section of the cylinder moves along a straight line parallel to the plate surface. A point on the cylinder’s rim moves along a curve called a cycloid. However, we can treat this motion as a superposition of translation of the cylinder’s central axis and rotation of the rest of the solid cylinder around that axis. If we observe the cross-section of the cylinder in Fig. 16.1 as it rolls along the tectonic plate, we can see the center of mass O of the circle (cross-section of the cylinder) moves from right to left at constant speed Ȟcm. The point D on the plate B where the circle makes contact with the plate surface also moves from right to left at speed Ȟcm , so that point O remains directly above point D. During a time interval t, both O and D move from right to left by a distance s. We assume here that this distance is equal to the total tectonic slip on a fault during an earthquake.

16 Rotational Energy and Angular Momentum of Earthquakes

219

The cylinder rotates through an angle I about central axis, with the points of the cylinder that were touching the plate B at the beginning of t moving through arc length s. We can express the arc length s in terms of the rotation angle I :

s IR ,

(16.1)

where R is the radius of the solid cylinder. The linear speed Ȟcm of the center of mass of this uniform cylinder is ds/dt. The angular speed Ȧ of the cylinder about central axis is dI / dt . Thus, differentiating Eq. (16.1) with respect to time yields

Q cm

dI R ZR , dt

(16.2)

where Ȧ is the angular speed of the cylinder. Every point on the cylinder rotates about central axis with angular speed Ȧ. Bearing in mind that the motion of the cylinder rolling smoothly over a plate surface can be decomposed into purely rotational and purely translational motions, we can observe that the bottom part of the cylinder at point D is stationary and the top part at point C is moving at speed 2Ȟcm , thus twice faster.

16.4 The Kinetic Energy of Rolling in the Earthquake Source Let us now calculate the kinetic energy of the rolling cylinder in the earthquake source. If we treat the rolling as a pure rotational motion about an axis through the point D on the bottom plate in Fig. 16.1, then we obtain K

1 2

ID Z2 ,

(16.3)

where ID is the rotational inertia of the cylinder about the axis through point D, and Ȧ is the angular speed of the cylinder. Using the parallel-axis theorem for the rotational inertia, we obtain ID

I cm m R 2 ,

(16.4)

where Icm is the cylinder’s rotational inertia about an axis through its center of mass (central axis), and m is the mass of the solid cylinder. Combining Eqs. (16.4) and (16.3), we obtain

220 E. Majewski

1

K

1

2

I cmZ 2 mR 2Z 2 . 2

(16.5)

Using Eq. (16.2) gives the relation 1

K

2

1

2 I cmZ 2 mvcm .

2

(16.6)

The physical interpretation of the first term in the above equation is that it describes the kinetic energy of the cylinder’s rotation about an axis through its center of mass, and the second term can be interpreted as the kinetic energy of the translational motion of the cylinder’s center of mass. If we assume that plate B is at rest and only plate A is moving, its speed will be twice larger than the speed of the cylinder’s center of mass. The plate’s speed equals the time derivative of the slip function, i.e., s v . The mass of the cylinder of length h is m SR 2 hU . Thus, the kinetic energy generated in the earthquake source in terms of the slip rate is as follows:

K

1 2

SU hR 4 2SU hR 2 s 2 ,

(16.7)

where ȡ is the material density of the rock cylinder. The above formula determines the kinetic rotational energy generated in the earthquake source in terms of the source dimensions and the tectonic slip rate. Here 2R is the distance between tectonic plates and h is the length of the rolling cylinder. When the rock cylinder rolls at constant velocity, it has no reason to slide at the contact point D, and thus the frictional force is zero there. However, when a net force is accelerating or decelerating the rolling motion of the cylinder, then that force generates acceleration acm of the cylinder’s center of mass along the direction of the tectonic fault. It also generates an angular acceleration or deceleration Į of the cylinder. These accelerations can generate sliding motions of the cylinder at point D. These motions create a frictional force between the cylinder and the plate at point D. When the cylinder does not slide, the static frictional force Fs is created, and the cylinder is rolling smoothly. We can then express the magnitude of the linear acceleration acm in terms of the angular acceleration Į by taking a time derivative of Eq. (16.2). Consequently, on the left side of this equation, we obtain dvcm / dt that is equal to acm, and on the right side we obtain dZ / dt that is equal to Į . Thus, in the case of smooth rolling we obtain the following relation:


acm

RD .

221

(16.8)

When the cylinder slides and the net force is not zero, then the kinetic frictional force Fk acts at point D. In such a case, the motion is not smooth rolling, and Eq. (16.8) is not valid for this motion. The kinetic frictional force will be discussed in Section 16.6.

16.5 Modelling Purely Rotational Motions in the Earthquake Source Now let us consider a model of purely rotational motions in the earthquake source depicted in Fig. 16.2. Particularly, one can infer spin motions of the solid cylinder (Teisseyre 1973, 2004). We can also imagine such a situation that both tectonic plates will move in opposite directions and oscillate along the fault at the same time. During such a process, the tectonic plates vibrate in the opposite directions and the cylinder is in a twist motion. We can combine these two simple motions of tectonic plates together and obtain a resulting motion of the cylinder with two components: twist and spin motions.

O

Fig. 16.2 A model of purely rotational motions generated in the earthquake source. Due to the motion of tectonic plates A and B in opposite directions during an earthquake, the round fragment of rock shaped as a cylinder rotates counterclockwise. This situation corresponds to spin motions of the rotating cylinder. If the tectonic plates move back and forth, then the cylinder may have twist motions

222 E. Majewski

16.6 The Torque and Angular Momentum of the Earthquake Source The torque is equal to the vector representing the cylinder’s diameter perpendicular to the plate cross the kinetic frictional force between the cylinder and a tectonic plate: W

2R u Fk .

(16.9)

We can also write that W I cm D . The angular momentum of the solid rock cylinder about central axis can be expressed as M

1

I cm Z

2

m R 2Z

1 2

S U h R4 Z .

(16.10)

Since we use the solid rock cylinder to model rotations in the earthquake source, the magnitude of the seismic angular momentum generated in the source is as follows: 1

M

2

S U h R 4Z .

(16.11)

For 3D space rotation, the dynamical law corresponding to the law F = dp/dt , is that the torque vector is the rate of change with time of the angular momentum vector W

dM / dt .

(16.12)

If we take a vector sum of all external torques over all grains or blocks in the earthquake source, the external torque acting in the source is the time rate of change of the total angular momentum:

W ext

d M total / d t .

(16.13)

For a rotational motion in the source, one can calculate the work I2

W

³ W dI

.

(16.14)

I1

Consequently, one can find the power P for rotational motion in the earthquake source as P W

W I W Z .

(16.15)


223

16.7 Modelling Rotational Motions in the Earthquake Source as a Turbulence of Grains and Blocks Between Moving Tectonic Plates Now let us model the rotational motions in the earthquake source as turbulence of grains and blocks between moving tectonic plates. This model is depicted in Fig. 16.3. Such an approach will allow us to look at the problem of rotational energy from a broader perspective. The turbulent flow is in general rotational. We can describe turbulence in the framework of a micropolar theory of fluent media (Eringen 1966, 2001). It was found that there is some correspondence between plastic flow of solids and motions in micropolar fluids. Our aim is to estimate the angular momentum of such a turbulent motion of grains and blocks in the earthquake source.

Fig. 16.3 A model of rotational motions in the earthquake source as a turbulence of grains and blocks between moving tectonic plates. The grains and blocks rotating counterclockwise at the angular speed Ȧ form the vortex

In order to describe turbulence, we have to consider the problem at two levels: macroscopic and microscopic (Teisseyre and Majewski 2001, 2002, Nikolaevskiy 2003). Thus, we need two linear scales: the external scale L, and the internal scale / . We also need to consider a macrovolume ǻV and a microvolume dv. The macrovolume and microvolume are displayed schematically in Fig. 16.4. The equations describing the microscopic level are usually differential equations. A complete description of turbulence requires a separate set of equations for the description at the microscopic

224 E. Majewski

level and another set of equations describing processes at the macroscopic level. The key idea here is that a small eddy (an element of turbulent mesostructure) reveals its own dynamics as a structure element rotating at its own spin velocity. In order to describe the behaviour of such a system of rotating objects, one has to formulate the angular momentum balance for a macrovolume. This angular momentum is taken about a mass center of the macrovolume ǻV.

Fig. 16.4 Microscopic and macroscopic levels of description of the turbulence. Here dv denotes the microvolume, and / – the internal scale, ǻV – the macrovolume (modified from Nikolaevskiy 2003)

One can write the angular momentum balance in the form (Nikolaevskiy 2003): w w H kmn U un rm ! H kmn U un rp um ! m H kpn U un u p ! p wt wX m w H kmnV mp rp ! p H kpn V np ! p H kpn rp Fn ! , (16.16) wX m where denotes the average, H kmn is the Levi-Civita alternating tensor, ȡ is the material density, ui are the velocity components, V mp are the viscous stress components, Fn are the components of the mass force, xm and Xm are the microscale and macroscale coordinates, respectively, and rm = xm + Xm is a radius-vector relative to the mass center of the elementary volume. It is assumed that the macrovolume ǻV contains i eddies. The spatial averaged angular momentum of one eddy is defined as Mk !

H kpn U un rp ! .

(16.17)


225

16.8 Conclusions This chapter briefly presented a few models of rotational motions in the earthquake source. At first, rolling motions were considered and the kinetic energy of rolling was formulated. The second model deals with purely rotational motions. The kinetic energy, work, power, and angular momentum for this model were expressed in terms of earthquake dimensions and the total tectonic slip on the fault. The third model treats rotational motions in the earthquake source as turbulence of grains and blocks between moving tectonic plates. A general approach to the turbulence was discussed. A balance equation for the angular momentum was shown. An angular momentum for a small turbulent eddy was defined.

References Eringen AC (1966) Theory of micropolar fluids. J Math Mech 16: 622-729 Eringen AC (2001) Microcontinuum field theories, II: Fluent media. Springer, New York Nikolaevskiy VN (2003) Angular momentum in geophysical turbulence. Kluwer, Dordrecht Teisseyre R (1973) Earthquake processes in a micromorphic continuum. Pure Appl Geophys 102: 15-28 Teisseyre R (2004) Spin and twist motions in a homogeneous elastic continuum and cross-band geometry of fracturing. Acta Geophys Pol 52: 173-183 Teisseyre R, Majewski E (eds) (2001) Earthquake thermodynamics and phase transformations in the earth’s interior. Academic Press, San Diego Teisseyre R, Majewski E (2002) Physics of earthquakes. In: Lee WHK, Kanamori H, Jennings PC, Kisslinger C (eds) International handbook of earthquake & engineering seismology, Part A. Academic Press, San Diego, pp 229-235

17 Bend-Rotation Wave as a Mechanism of Macroseismic Effects Vladimir Aksenov Institute of Physics of the Earth, Russian Academy of Sciences Bolshaya Gruzinskaya str., 10, Moscow, Russia e-mail: [email protected]

17.1 Introduction Instrumental measurements in epicentral zones of earthquakes and especially on outcropped faults are still relatively rare. This also concerns macroseismic observations during strong earthquakes. Issues regarding faulting kinematics, distribution of effective forces, accelerations and other parameters of near-surface seismic process, and, consequently, the focus mechanisms in the case of their outcropping, are still insufficiently studied. Macroseismic observations and measurements that are available show various effects. We put a special attention to the following macroseismic observations: eruption of soil and hard rock with overturning in air; bouncing of heavy blocks with simultaneous shifting 2-5 m aside; overturning of soil and ground blocks with 180º rotation along horizontal axis (Bolt 1978, Nikonov 1992). In Japan, movement of rectangular ledger blocks immediately near a fault formed at the graveyard was noted (Nikonov 1992). It is essential that ledger stones were of standard size, and stood vertically on pins fixed in underlying horizontal slabs; the pins remained undamaged, whereas vertical slabs have been displaced along the fault to the opposite wall of the fault. Hence, not a mere shear movement but slab tossing in air by some angle to the horizon took place. Interesting data can be found in the publication by Popova (1990). During Kudmdag earthquake (March 14, 1983) in the South-Western Turkmenia, with M = 5.4, I = 8, and focus depth h = 3 km, a 20 km long fault cropped out crossing the settlement built on a plane. Engineering -seismologic study revealed strengthening of shocking force by 0.5-0.7 (comparing to average values for the settlement) in strips along the fault, 150-400 m wide on one side, and 75-200 m wide on the other side of the fault. For earthquakes with high magnitude and intensity, the width of

228 V. Aksenov

zones with strengthened impact along outcropping faults increases significantly. So, for earthquakes of epicentral intensity of 9-10, the width of the zone of highest intensity at the fault amounts to 2-6 km (Popova 1990). We draw special attention to the measurements which showed differences with distance in acceleration values recorded by accelerographs; a representative example is here the Rudbar earthquake in North Iran (20 June 1990, Ms = 7.7). At this event, a 80-km long fault ripped on the surface in three areas; the left-lateral shifts had the horizontal extent of 0.6 m (maximum), and the vertical extent up to 0.95 m (Berberian et al. 1992). The peak accelerations recorded at different distances from the focus and fault plane are listed in Table 17.1. Table 17.1 Peak accelerations of the Rudbar event of 20 June 1990 Distance [km]

Acceleration g

Site from epicenter

from fault

vertical

horizontal

Abbar

47

8

0.23

0.65

Kazvin

80

50

0.09

0.19

Abbar

77

75

0.06

0.13

Tonekabon

130

95

0.03

0.11

Karai

182

148

0.03

0.06

It is seen that the values of vertical and horizontal accelerations increase exponentially up to 0.65g when approaching the ripped fault at a distance of 8 km, so that the value of 2g was possibly achieved at the fault’s edges. Many authors have noted clear features of non-linearity of intense soil movements in the zone of tectonic faults (Aksenov et al. 1992, 1993, Aksenov and Lokajiþek 1997, Li et al. 1994). The following features were observed in all reports: – low-frequency oscillations (0.4-1.5 Hz), – high-amplitude monochromatic coherent oscillations, – low velocity of phase range of 160-180 m/s with duration of up to 5 minutes. All these three features have been observed only in a zone adjacent to the tectonic fault. Moreover, the distance from the fault walls where the non-linear effects are observed depends on the earthquake magnitude. It is important to note that there is a rather sharp boundary of the space beyond which all non-linear effects disappear (Li et al. 1994). Presentation of

17 Bend-Rotation Wave as a Mechanism of Macroseismic Effects

229

models of mechanisms for all non-linear effects mentioned above, including rupture mechanism, involves many problems. Basing on theoretical works on non-linear dynamics (Lyapunov 1892, Poincare 1928, Mandelshtam 1950, Nicolis 1986), laboratory experiments and field studies, the author suggests a model based on bend-rotation waves as a mechanism of fracturing and macroseismic effects.

17.2 Experimental Data First of all, it is necessary to select oscillation parameters describing seismic soil movement to investigate dependence of the selected parameters on energy (magnitude), motion or destruction type, and distance from registration point to the tectonic fault. Determination of the mechanism causing macroseismic effects is the foremost issue. The following parameters have been selected as the main oscillation parameters: Ⱥ – amplitude characterizing the signal intensity; Ĳ – pulse width (the parameter of the assemblage of curves delineating envelope of oscillations); f0 – dominant frequency (or period) of oscillations; S – spectrum width. The author used a laser vibrometer with flat characteristic from 0.1 Hz to 0.5 MHz. Models of three types were built, as shown in Fig. 17.1: the barrier model A (fine sandstone, coarse sandstone); the enclosed fault model B (perspex); and the open fault model C (granite). The barrier model A consisted of a parallelepiped with sides of 20×30×10 cm. On sides, direct cuts at an angle of 45 degrees were made, leaving a barrier of 3 cm in the center. The sample loading was performed along vertical axis until the moment of the barrier destruction. Recording by the laser vibrometer was carried out in the center of the barrier. Figure 17.2 shows time pulse records for model A (tracks 1, 2, 3 – fine sandstone; 4, 5, 6 – coarse sandstone); pulse amplitude spectra are presented below. Tracks 1 and 4 are the typical records of pulses corresponding to beginning of the barrier destruction. Pulses are short, with low amplitude. They have high -frequency spectra. Dominant frequency is hard to isolate. The spectrum width is 60 kHz. We observe a typical interference of waves from independent oscillation sources. At increasing load (axial pressure P) we obtain different pulse shapes; tracks 2 and 5 and their spectra reflect qualitative transition of the system to another state. Amplitudes, i.e., the signal intensity, increased sharply, as well as the pulse width did. The base frequency of 80 kHz for track 2 is isolated. That for track 5 is 115 kHz. The spectrum width is 10 kHz in both cases. Sidebands are present in the spectra. Such spectra occur in the case

230 V. Aksenov

Fig. 17.1 The three models: A – barrier model (P is the axial pressure, 1 denotes the 2D luminous reflectance point); B – enclosed fault model (R0–R5 are the 2D luminous reflectance points); C – open fault model (P1 is the axial pressure, P2 is the lateral pressure, 1 and 2 are the 2D luminous reflectance points of waves from independent oscillation sources)

of modulated oscillations. Let us consider a simple amplitude-modulated oscillation. Initially, we had oscillations of the carrier frequency: Y = a0 sin (Z0t I0 ) , and a modulating oscillation 1+ m f(t), where f(t) is the modulating function, m is the parameter characterizing the affection level. As a result of some operation, called “modulation”, both these oscillations are multiplied, yielding: ɯ = a0 [1 + m f(t)] sin (Z0t I0 ) . Then, the carrier frequency is marked in the spectrum, and the modulating frequency is available on sides. This is true for periodic functions only. In case of nonperiodic modulating function, i.e., inharmonic oscillations, continuous sidebands will be observed in the spectrum instead of side lines. Tracks 3 and 6 (further increase of load) are examples of time oscillation records registered before the final destruction of the barrier. The am-


231

Fig. 17.2 Barrier model A, the wave shapes and spectra. Tracks 1-3 – fine sandstone, tracks 4-6 – coarse sandstone

plitudes and pulse widths are at maximum. The dominant frequency radically shifted to the low-frequency region. The period increases twofold for track 3, and sevenfold for track 6. The width of spectra sharply contracts, thus showing the coherence of oscillations. The evolution of pulses and their spectra raises a number of questions. Which of the parameters of appearing fault (destruction of the barrier) causes this evolution? This problem can be solved with the help of the theory of nonlinear dynamic systems. As follows from Niɫolis (1986), if n independent oscillators with unit amplitude interfere in some point of space, then the total energy is proportional to the sum of energies of each oscillator: W| 2

¦E

2 i

§ n · § n · W | ¨ ¦ cos Ii ¸ ¨ ¦ sin Ii ¸ ©i1 ¹ ©i1 ¹ where M i M j

,

2

n ( n 1) / 2

n2

¦

cos H V ,

(17.1)

iz j

H V ; for all M equal (complete coherence), H V

0 , and the

energy becomes W | n ( n 1)n

n2 .

(17.2)

232 V. Aksenov

If phases are independent and distributed uniformly, then M has Simpson’s distribution (in the interval from S to S ), and the energy of incoherent oscillators is

n ( n 1) ½ W | ®n ¦ cos H V ¾ V 1 ¯ ¿

2S

n

n( n 1) cos H V dH V 2 S ³0

n .

(17.3)

So, it can be stated that the total energy density is proportional to the second power of the number of oscillators n2 (coherence) provided that the phases of all n oscillators are equal. If phases of oscillators are random and uniformly distributed over some, 2 S long interval, then the total energy density is proportional to the number of oscillators n (incoherence). Thus, if only 10 out of 100 oscillators are coherent, then these 10 oscillators “behave” like the remaining ones, and are able to synchronize the rest of oscillators. Of course, in the most abundant case we deal with time-limited partial coherence. Enclosed fault model B: In the perspex plate of 15×15×1.5 cm size, a cut was made in the center at an angle of 45º presenting “a fault” of 4 cm length. Under vertical pressure, the “fault” walls shift to opposite sides relative to each other making cyclic motion of the stick–slip type. Surface oscillation recording points R0–R5 (Z-component) were placed on the straight line perpendicular to the "fault" with spacing of 10 cm. Recorded pulses shape and their spectra are shown in Fig. 17.3. At R0, a single unipolar pulse is recorded. Noteworthy is the high amplitude of the pulse, its small width, very low dominant frequency (610 Hz) and small width (Ĳ = 0.001 s). The spectrum width is small as well. Typically, a single pulse of arbitrary shape has continuous spectrum within the frequency interval in which the period stays long as compared to the pulse length. At increasing frequency, when the period Ɍ becomes comparable with the pulse length Ĳ, function S (spectrum) starts to decrease. As to the spectrum width, according to Mandelshtam (1950), Charkievich (1953), and Nicolis (1986), the bell-shaped pulse exhibits a number of remarkable features. Out of all pulses of random shape, the maximum energy is concentrated in the bellshaped pulse. Its spectrum width is minimal, i.e. the wave is coherent. In other words, high energy is concentrated in such a pulse in short time interval. Then, at points R2–R5 we have ordinary elastic oscillations with wide spectra. R1 is like a transitional point, and the distance R0–R1 can be called the zone of the pulse existence (action) with all the consequences. The open fault model C consists of three blocks subject to lateral pressure Ɋ2. The medium block makes shear movements under vertical pres-


233

Fig. 17.3 The barrier model B: pulse shapes and their spectra

sure Ɋ1. The objective of the experiment was to thoroughly study physics and “kinematics” of a shear movement. The laser vibrometer recorded oscillations (both velocity and displacement) directly on the contact surface of the “fault”, point 1 (see Fig. 17.1). At point 2 we recorded the total movement of the block relative to the support surface. Shapes of pulses recorded at point 1 (contact surface of the fault wall), and at point 2 (the total displacement of the block) are presented in Fig. 17.4. The shape of pulses approaches the bell-type one. Pulse width amounts to Ĳ = 0.01 s. Thus, the shear movement generates a pulse, and vice versa, a bell-shaped pulse generates shear movement. According to Mogi (1985), localization of deformation occurs at fault’s walls before shear movement. This local deformation was registered by Mogi (1985) by strain gage; however, the kinematics of the movement itself could not be registered for technical reasons. Upon combining the results of Mogi and the author’s own experiments, we can propose the bend-rotation wave (BRW) model, or, more specifically: Bend rotation wave as a mechanism of shear movement, macroseismic effect, and ripping of tectonic fault's seam (rapture mechanism). Let us consider a flexible thread lying on the support surface. A local deformation occurs due to shear stress (Mogi 1985), see Fig. 17.5. The thread rests on a flat support at its non-deformed sections. The deformation grows up to some value, and then the wave starts motion toward the zone of lower stresses. After moving over some interval ǻȋ relative to the support

displacement (v)

displacement (v)

234 V. Aksenov

Fig. 17.4 The open fault model C. The upper track – the total movement of the block. The lower track – the pulse recorded on the side of contact surface of the fixed block

Fig. 17.5 Fracturing process and formation of the bend-rotation wave; motion of an arbitrary point a on fracture plane is shown and a final slip ǻX is indicated


235

surface, it transits to the position a1 being in resting state. Thus, upon entering the wave, each point of the body makes wave incremental movement and the entire body translates over the support surface. For better understanding the mass wave transfer as a physical phenomenon, we present the diagram of discreet wave motion of the linear density. Figure 17.6 shows the macroparticle displacements under the influence of a wave of increased density (compression) and a wave of decreased density (tensile). During motion of the wave with increased density, a macroparticle velocity vector ȣa coincides with the vector of the wave with decreased density, under the influence of which macroparticle ai shifts by +¨xi. On the other hand, the velocity vector ȣa in the wave with decreased density is directed oppositely, and the macroparticle ai shifts by –¨xi . The main feature of this motion is a chain process of small displacements of adjacent particles of the body subjected to the wave propagation. The wave propagates continuously, and the body’s particle moves in a pulse manner. Thus, a moving wave (compression or tension) serves as a mechanical transformer of continuous motion into discrete one. Let us show that the de formed section of the thread being in the wave moves without friction relative to the support (Fig. 17.5). The wave velocity is Vy = V sinĮx , so Vx V (1 cos D x )2 sin 2 D x at Įx ĺ 0, Vx = 0; Vy = V, i.e., when the wave leading edge enters, point ɚ0 has a velocity whose vector is directed perpendicularly upward, and at the

(a)

(b)

Fig. 17.6 Diagram of macroparticle displacements ai under the influence of compression wave (a) and tensile wave (b). 1 – macroparticles, 2 – compressional wave in part (a) and tensile wave in part (b)

236 V. Aksenov

end of the wave trailing edge – perpendicularly downward to the contact surface. Such a wave is called the bend-rotation wave, since the nondeformed thread that enters the wave before the leading edge deforms (undergoes compression or depression), and is carried by the wave to the end of the trailing edge where the deformation is removed.

17.3 Field Observations As already mentioned, a number of recordings which have been performed in-site, so almost in the focus, is extremely low, especially at walls of faults. But there are facilities creating laboratory conditions for earthquake registration. Such facilities comprise underground gas storages, which are of particular environmental hazard. Figure 17.7 presents layout of an underground gas storage, coordinates of earthquakes, and dates of the strongest earthquakes (M = 1.69-1.24 as recorded in the region of PĜíbram of Czech Republic, in 1999–2001). The strongest earthquakes occurred in June and January. This fact can be explained as related to the period of gas injection (June) and the period of gas extraction (January). The difference between maximum and minimum pressures amounts to 9 MPa. The rock enclosing the gas storage is under variable load and, accordingly, shear stresses. As Revuzhenko (2000) showed, ordered structures are formed in homogenous medium under alternate load.

DISPLACEMENT

X [km]

Fig. 17.7 Layout of the underground gas storage


237

These structures move relative to each other under shear stresses, thus forming faults. Figure 17.8 shows the seismograms for event Ɇ = 1.24 for stations L, K, J. Figure 17.9 shows the use of 3 Hz low pass filter to iden-

Fig. 17.8 Records of the seismic event Ɇ = 1.24 for three stations

Fig. 17.9 Waves forms after filtration (3 Hz low pass filter)

238 V. Aksenov displacement (µm)

time (s)

Fig. 17.10 Recorded displacements (after integration, seismic event Ɇ = 1.24) for the three components at the three stations

tify low-frequency component of the seismic signal. As a result, monopolar pulses can be derived. Amplitudes of signals on non-filtered seismograms (2-fold) at stations L and K are rather different, but become equal after filtration. Figure 17.10 shows displacements at the same stations. At L and K, displacements greatly differ from each other; station L is closer to the focus (Fig. 17.7), the distance being 700 m, but the displacement is 3 times smaller than that at station K. This confirms the conclusions made by Li et al. (1994); station K is situated at the fault wall. At station K, acceleration reached 0.3g. For stations K and R, rotation of displacement vector was found, i.e. vector of sum of two components (N-S, E-W) was changing its direction from event to event. As a result, residual displacement obtained rotational nature, and “rotational” dislocation occurred.

17.4 Conclusions Basing on the model of bend-rotation wave (BRW), it seems possible to interpret non-linear and macroseismic effects as the effect of BRW on the medium. The BRW parameters (amplitude A, pulse width Ĳ, velocity V) are


239

determined by local deformation. As experiments have shown, when the lateral pressure increases (Fig. 17.1, open fault model C), the pulse width Ĳ increases too, from Ĳ = 0.001 to 0.02 s. For the gas storage (K station, E–W component, Fig. 17.9), Ĳ reaches 0.6 s. Due to long period, the BRW can create modulation. At passing of “rotation wave”, modulation involves n oscillators. Under «BRW» action, oscillators in the wave are synchronized, and their total energy is proportional to n2 (Nicolis 1986). The oscillation period grows too. Therefore, the released energy and the BRW pulse width are directly proportional. BRW is a 3-dimensional wave, and buildings, boulders, etc are affected with impact, related to a rotating vector (Fig. 17.5). However, the BRW amplitude is spatially limited, and, as a consequence, macroseismic effects are observed in a limited zone along the tectonic fault. Acknowledgements. I wish to thank Tomas Lokajiþek and Vladimir Rudajev of the Institute of Rock Structure and Mechanics, Academy of Sciences of the Czech Republic.

References Aksenov V, Kozak J, Rudajev V, Lokajiþek T (1992) Seismic source selforganizing. Acta Montana A89: 89-110 Aksenov V, Kozak J, Lokajiþek T (1993) Nonlinear process in earthquake foci. Pure appl geophys 140: 29-47 Aksenov V, Lokajiþek T (1997) Influence of nonlinear processes in seismic foci on released energy. Pure appl geophys 149: 337-355 Berberian V, Qorashi V, Jackson JA, Priestley K, Wallace T (1992) The RudbarTarom earthquake of June 1990 in NW Persia: preliminary field and seismological observations and its tectonic significance. BSSA 82: (4) 1726-1755 Bolt B (1978) Earthquakes. A primer. WH Freeman and Company, San Francisco Charkievich, AA (1953) Spectra and analysis. GITTL, Moscow (in Russian) Li Y, Aki K, Adams D, Hasemi A (1994) Seismic guided waves trapped in the fault zone of the landers. California J Geophys Res 99: (B6) 11705-11722 Lyapunov AM (1892) Fundamental problems of movement stability. Kharkov Math Soc (in Russian) Mandelshtam, LI (1950) Complete collection of works, vol III. Izd Acad Nauk, Moscow, pp 89-178 (in Russian) Mogi K (1985) Earthquake prediction. Academic Press, Tokyo Nicolis JS (1986) Dynamics of hierarchical systems, an evolutionary approach. Springer Verlag, Berlin-Heidelberg Nikonov A (1992) On extreme seismic velocities. Dokl RAN 323: 70-73 (in Russian)

240 V. Aksenov Poincare A (1928) Sur les courbes definies par une equation differentiele. Ocuures VI, Paris Popova E (1990) Macrocosmic data. Nauka 31: 135-137 Revuzhenko AF (2000) Mechanics of elastoplastic media and nonstandard analysis. Izd Novosib Univ, Novosibirsk (in Russian)

18 Solitary Waves in Crustal Faults and their Application to Earthquakes Victor G. Bykov Institute of Tectonics and Geophysics, Far East Branch of the Russian Academy of Sciences, 65 Kim-Yu-Chen St., 680 000 Khabarovsk, Russia e-mail: [email protected]

18.1 Introduction The problem related to crustal fault dynamics consists of identification of the processes and parameters that are responsible for sliding regimes in the faults. The concepts according to which the transition from creep to stickslip along the crustal fault, in most cases accompanied by a tectonic earthquake, is caused by geometrical inhomogeneities of fault surfaces, a decrease of friction in some segments of the fault and by anomalies of the pore pressure, are considered to be conventional (Ben-Zion and Rice 1995). The deformational waves propagating along the faults and excited by elastic-rebound in the foci of the past earthquakes may also initiate seismic slips in crustal faults (Ulomov 1993). The deformational waves detected from changes in the geophysical fields (Nikolaevskiy 1998) are accompanied by migration of seismic activity in a number of cases (Ulomov 1993). The existence of these waves is known to be confirmed in the course of experimental studies of slow deformation processes in the crust (Nevskiy 1994). A lot of direct and indirect evidences (Nikolaevskiy 1996) show that slow tectonic deformations are propagating as solitary waves – solitons. For this reason, theoretical studies (Garagash 1996, Nikolaevskiy 1996, Nikolaevskiy and Ramazanov 1986) aimed at developing mathematical models that lead to soliton-like solutions and, at the same time, reflect the main features of wave deformation process occurring in the crust are of topical interest. In this chapter it is shown that local deformation effects at the mesoscopic level related to decrease of friction at the contacts of inhomogeneous fault surfaces may cause solitary waves of activation whose evolution leads to macroscopic processes as seismic slips in crustal faults. The model

242 V.G. Bykov

suggested describes the dynamics of relative displacements of fault surfaces including retarding and accumulation of energy necessary to provide a stick-slip process. As it is well known, the stick-slip is a necessary element to provide seismic events inside the earthquake focus. Analysis is made of asperity and friction effects in the fault on the evolution of velocity of waves of activation and also the amplitude and frequency of periodical load on fault dynamics. A relative role of different processes in the initiation of seismic slip is investigated.

18.2 Observational Evidence The concept of the deformational (tectonic) waves generated in the Earth is based on the results of the study of spatio-temporal density distribution and processes of crustal deformation. The results of observation of the oriented earthquake migration of direct and indirect in-situ measurements of deformational waves or of their indications are most comprehensively shown and analyzed by Mogi (1968), Nersesov et al. (1990), Barabanov et al. (1994), Kasahara (1979), and Nikolaevskiy ( 1998). Quantitatively, the deformational wave processes are displayed in the rate of the earthquake foci migration and the presence of geophysical field anomalies close to the faults. In conventional approach, the most characteristic rates of these processes and the corresponding waves can be divided into two groups (two scales of manifestation): global tectonic waves and deformational waves generated in the faults. The global tectonic waves with velocities of 10-100 km/year are observed in the following phenomena: the oriented migration of large earthquakes (Stein et al. 1997); seismic velocity anomalies (temporal variations of seismic wave velocities, travel-times and time discrepancies) (Nevskiy et al. 1987); changes of the underground water table along the fault zone due to waves (Barabanov et al. 1994); deformographic measurements (Ishii et al. 1979); cyclic migration of aseismic gaps in the Earth’s mantle (Nikolaevskiy 1998); oscillation motions of seismic reflectors (Bazavluk and Yudakhin 1993, Bormotov and Bykov 1999). Movement of slow tectonic deformations occurs along the deep faults in a narrow “corridor” (a100 km) (Nevskiy et al. 1989). Rapid migration of seismic activity occurring in vast areas prior to or after large earthquakes testifies indirectly about the existence of the deformational waves with velocities of 1-10 km/day generated in the faults (Hill et al. 1995, Barabanov et al. 1994). The seismic activity can be detected from the observable radon, electrokinetic and hydrogeodynamic

18

Solitary Waves in Crustal Faults and their Application to Earthquakes

243

signals (Nikolaevskiy 1998), and exciting of the stress-and-strain waves at the explosion and vibration slips in initiation in the fault zone (Ruzhich et al. 1999). Geophysical signals have a shape of solitary waves and are propagating along the crustal faults (Nikolaevskiy 1998).

18.3 Mathematical Model of Deformation Process The model includes two most important mechanisms providing interaction of the fault surfaces: friction, simulated by introduction of gouge viscosity in the fault, and geometrical inhomogeneities which are characterized by ratio of scales of asperity and sinusoidal parts of the internal fault surfaces, and external load. Thus, we now postulate the following equation:

w 2U w 2U w[ 2 wW 2 where U

sin U D

2S u a , [

D | a P d 'U gh , J

wU J [ G [ L sin U V W , wW

Sx ap , W

SZ 0t p , p 2 a 2 D 4mgh , Z 02

(18.1) D m,

H L , U is the displacement of blocks located periodically along the fault length; ɚ is the distance between the block centers; D is the tangential contact stiffness; m is the mass of the block; h is the distance between the block centers of the adjacent block layers; g is the gravity acceleration; P is the viscosity of the layer between the blocks; d is the diameter of the circular contact of the blocks; ' is the layer thickness; U is the density of the block material; D and J are the parameters of friction and inhomogeneity, respectively; H, L are the height of asperities and the distance between them normalized to ap/S G([) is the Dirac delta-function and VW is the function which reflects the external load at the contact of the fault surfaces. Figure 18.1 shows schematic presentation of the fault surfaces. The left-hand side of the generalized sine-Gordon equation (18.1) corresponds to the wave operator applied to the relative displacement of the fault surfaces. In the right-hand side of Eq. (18.1) the first term characterizes the “restoring” force, originating due to shear along the sinusoidalhomogeneous surfaces of the fault; the second one – the friction force, which is proportional to the velocity relative to displacement; the third term corresponds to corrections for inhomogeneities which are distributed at a distance apL/S; the fourth one describes the initiation external load on the fault.

244 V.G. Bykov

Fig. 18.1 Schematic diagram showing a change in contact between fault surfaces (a) and a change in the geometry of blocks contact (b-d): ɚ | 2r, r is the radius of blocks

The expression for parameter D is obtained proceeding from the concepts of stick-slip (Dieterich 1987, Sleep 1995) and theory of dimension. Friction parameter D is mainly dependent on the average sizes of the blocks on the fault surface and also on the viscosity of the gouge, and assumes the values 0.01-1.0. Inhomogeneity coefficient J is equal to ratio of height H of the asperity to length L of the sector of the sinusoidal-inhomogeneous surface and characterizes regular point asperities of the relief of the fault surfaces. This element of the model reflects the fractal structure of the fault surfaces in the first approximation. Variation of the inhomogeneity coefficient J is possible in the range from 0 to 1.0. The zero value means a complete absence of “cohesions” distinguished at the sinusoidal surface. The inhomogeneity coefficient value equal to 1.0 means coincidence of the height of the point asperity with the amplitude of the sinusoid. Note that the effect of block rotation suggests an explanation for the sinusoidal character of the “restoring” forces (Nikolaevskiy 1996). Integration of Eq. (18.1) has been made by the McLaughlin–Scott approximation method (Solerno et al. 1983), and numerical realization has been performed by the Runge-Kutta-Felberg scheme (Forsythe et al. 1977). The parameters of the medium were as follows: U= 3x103 kg/m3, D = 104-106 N/m, g = 9.8 m/s2, r = 0.1-1.0 m, a = h = 2r. Computation has been carried out with variation of the parameters of friction D and

18


245

inhomogeneity J, which characterize the state of the contact at the fault, and also the value of VW , that determines the external load.

18.4 Solitary Wave of Fault Activation Profile of velocity v of the particles (Fig. 18.2) on the fault surfaces has a shape of the soliton v(x,t) = vmaxsech(x–VD t), moving along the fault with a velocity VD . Variation of friction parameter D in the sine-Gordon equation clears up significantly the reasons for variations of velocity VD of the solitary wave in the crustal fault, as well as the consequences related to this variation. Value of velocity v of a particle on the fault surface is dependent on the state of the contact, that is, the value of the parameter D. It follows from the computations that in the case of low VD , the value of v is insignificant and the stable sliding (creep) occurs. For the relatively high values of velocity VDmax (of the order of 1-10 m/s) we obtain the soliton profile v ~ 0.1-1 m/s and the stepwise profile (kink) u(x, t) (see Fig. 18.2). A similar relationship for dynamic characteristics but without time shift of the maxima of VD and v can be obtained by analytical solution of the canonic sine-Gordon equation for a solitary wave in homogeneous fault without friction.

Fig. 18.2 Evolution of velocity VD of wave of activation, displacement u and slip velocity v in the fault

Time interval between the peak values of VD and v depends on the parameters D and J. The moment of time when VD attains the maximum value VDmax always occurs earlier as compared to the calculated time of vmax. Time lags between the transmitting of the solitary wave with the maximum velocity value and displacement umax are stipulated by friction and inhomogeneities in the fault. The possibility of attaining high values of the relative slip gives grounds for calling the wave v(VD) the solitary wave of

246 V.G. Bykov

fault activation. The velocity maximum for the wave of activation, depending on the values of the chosen contact stiffness D in the faults does not exceed 10-100 m/s, that differs noticeably from velocities for the seismic waves, so from those for the deformational ones.

18.5 Evolution of Waves of Fault Activation Velocity amplitude for the wave of activation increases to the value of about 0.9-1.8 m/s with subsequent transition to the stationary regime with the values VDst | 10-4-10-2 m/s (Fig. 18.3), corresponding to the velocities of the deformational waves at inhomogeneity coefficient J = 0.1-0.3 and a decrease of friction parameter D to 0.04. The creep regime is observed at t = 11.0-14.0 s. In the case of J > 0.3, stability is acquired far later and VDst may have the values of the order of 10-6-10-13 m/s. The value of VDst decreases with increase of J, which is a result of the additional friction: the asperities make impediments at sliding more often, and retarding of the wave of activation is enhanced (the sliding is damped). Also, a transition of the system to the “fault is locked” regime is possible when VD o 0.

Fig. 18.3 Evolution of velocity VD of wave of activation at different values of inhomogeneity coefficient J and D= 0.04

The greater the value of parameter J (“cohesion” of the fault surfaces when other parameters are constant), the greater the velocity maximum of the wave of activation and the quicker the process of acquiring the stationary regime of activation. Thus, at the beginning of the stable sliding regime the inhomogeneities contribute to accumulation of greater elastic energy which is determined in dimensionless form by the component (1+J)sinU in Eq. (18.1), and, vice versa, then they contribute to the fastest damping of the sliding. A long period of time is required to obtain VDmax at an increase of D and decrease of J.

18


247

Computation of fault dynamics shows that instability of sliding may be caused by a sharp decrease of the friction parameter which leads to an increase in the velocity of the wave of activation, and, consequently, in the slip velocity for the fault surfaces. Change in the sliding regimes dependent on the fault parameters occurs from 10 s (D = 0.04, J = 0.1) to 45 s (D = 0.01, J = 0.1).

18.6 Effect of Periodical Change of Friction in the Fault Evolution of velocity VD of the wave of activation in the fault depends on the friction parameter D This parameter has a periodically changing component D1 that corresponds to the regime of the cyclic perturbation contribution in some segments of the fault. Then the parameter D in Eq. (18.1) is transformed in D = D0 +D1 sin(W /K), where D0 , D1 , K are some constants. Results of computation of Eq. (18.1) at VW = 0, K = 102, for varying D0 , D1 , and J show (see Fig. 18.4) that the maximum of velocity VD is attained at t = 2-8 s from the perturbation moment, the time interval within which VD corresponds to a slip 1-5 s. In fact, in real faults the sliding time is a value of the order of seconds at large earthquakes (Carlson 1991).

Fig. 18.4 Evolution of velocity VD of wave of activation for different parameters of the state of contact for curves: (1) D0 = 0.02, D1 = 0.09, J = 0.9; (2) D0 = 0.09, D1 = 0.09, J = 0.9; (3) D0 = 0.01, D1 = 0.01, J = 0.9; (4) D0 = 0.01, D1 = 0.01, J = 0.1; (5) D0 = 0.02, D1 = 0, J = 0.9

If the inhomogeneity parameter is constant, J = 0.9, the maximum value of VD is registered at the same time moment, but curves 1, 2 and 3 differ in amplitude: the minimum value of VD corresponds to the maximum friction parameter D0 (Fig. 18.4). Curves 3 and 4, computed at different J and equal to D0, D1, at the time moment t = 30 s are merging and become indiscernible

248 V.G. Bykov

further. It also follows from Fig. 18.4 that with increasing J the maximum value of VD is attained much earlier. At small D0 and D1 (curves 3 and 4) the velocity VD is attenuating gradually to zero. At the higher values of D0 and D1 (curves 1 and 2), VD acquires the periodical regime with velocities close to those of quick deformational waves reaching 1-10 km/day (Nikolaevskiy 1998). Evolution of VD is represented by curve 5 without periodically changing additional friction (D1 = 0). This computation corresponds to a single generation of the solitary wave with transition of the system in the “fault is locked” regime. Figure 18.4 shows that periodical generation of waves of activation with the velocities commensurable with those for the deformational waves is possible only under a certain state of the contacts of fault surfaces, that is, a combination of the friction and inhomogeneity parameters. From this it follows that Eq. (18.1) can be applied for modelling of the seismic process at the appropriate choice of the corresponding parameters. Similar cyclic changes in the slip velocity and displacement in the fault zone were obtained due to periodical variations of stress (Dieterich 1987) and pore pressure (Sleep 1995) in the models of unstable sliding. The increase in amplitude D1 of the periodical friction component leads to a decrease in the maximum velocity value v of the seismic slip in the fault if other parameters of the model are constant. On the contrary, the increase of inhomogeneity parameter J, which characterizes “cohesion” of the fault surfaces, causes the amplitude increase of velocity vmax of the seismic slip.

18.7 Effect of Periodical Change of External Load Seismoactive faults undergo permanent external initiation effects of stress changes due to Earth tides, deformational waves from earthquakes or hydrological factors. Being active, these faults can generate oscillations, thus affecting other faults. Initiation of seismic slip may start because of inhomogeneity of physical properties along the faults due to constant external load. We will simulate initiation of external load on the fault by including in Eq. (18.1) another periodical function VW = V0 sin(:W), where V0 and : are the dimensionless amplitude and frequency of the external load, the friction parameter D being constant. The instable slip being not affected by the external load, following (Sobolev et al. 1995), will be further called a

18


249

natural slip, while that initiated by the additional periodical external load – the initiated one. The profile of velocity VD of a solitary wave (curves 2 and 3) propagating along the fault differs sharply from the profile of velocity in the case with the natural slip (curve 1) (Fig. 18.5a). Within the initial part of velocity curves VD the shape of the curves coincides for all the cases, but it has significant distinctions after the velocity maximum is attained. At higher frequencies (curve 3), VD represents a periodical curve simulated by a descending part of the velocity curve VD, which is computed in the absence of the source of external load (curve 1). The low-frequency (:= 0.1) external load causes smoother changes of VD, and the internal friction in the fault is not capable of compensating to the full extent the influence of the external load (Fig. 18.5a). It follows from Fig. 18.5b that the first initiated slip occurs earlier at any frequency of the external load as compared to the natural one (curve 1). For this version of the computation, the time interval '7 between VDmax and vmax is larger for the natural slip (curve 1) than for the initiated one (curves 2 and 3). This time, the interval increases with increasing frequency of the external load. The maximum velocity values of the wave of activation VD, as well as those of slip velocity vmax , correspond to the minimum frequency of the external sinusoidal load (: = 0.1). The time delay of the initiated dynamic slip decreases with increasing amplitude of the external load (Fig. 18.6). This agrees well with laboratory

Fig. 18.5 Evolution of velocity of wave of activation VD (a), and slip velocity v (b) at natural (1) and initiated (2, 3) slips. Parameters: D = 0.04, J = 0.9; V0 = 0 and : = 0 for curve 1; V0 = 0.01 and : = 0.1 for curve 2, V0 = 0.01 and : = 1.0 for curve 3

250 V.G. Bykov

Fig. 18.6 Change of velocity of initiated slip v at constant frequency of external load : = 1.0 and different amplitudes of load V0. The dot-dash line – natural slip velocity profile. Parameters: D = 0.04, J = 0.9

(Sobolev et al. 1991) and field (Ruzhich et al. 1999) experiments. A number of slips occur instead of one slippage, and the velocity amplitude of the first slip is the maximum one. The slip velocity amplitudes and the time intervals between them are not equal. The values of velocity maxima coincide for almost all these seismic slips. The slip velocities are weakly dependent on the amplitude V0 of the external load (Figs. 18.6 and 18.7). The number of slips is proportional to the amplitude of the load. The number of slips increases with an increase in the frequency of the constant sinusoidal load, while the time interval between the successive slips decreases (Fig. 18.6). This also coincides with the experiments (Ruzhich et al. 1999, Sobolev et al. 1995).

Fig. 18.7 Dependence of slip velocity maximum vmax in the fault on the frequency : (V0 = 0.1) and the amplitude V0 (: = 10) of the external load. Parameters: D = 0.04, J = 0.9

18


251

A decrease in the frequency of the external load : leads to a significant amplitude increase in the slip velocity (Fig. 18.7). This is of particular importance if we take into consideration that the process is starting to be extremely sensitive to the external load at the final stage of earthquake preparation. Thus, we can consider the external load on the fault as an amplification of the wave of activation by the deformational waves with different frequency, radiated by an impact, explosion or earthquake. It follows from the computed characteristics of the slips with different physical and mechanical parameters of the fault that the intensity and amplitude of the velocity of the initiated slip depend on the state of contacts of fault surfaces.

18.8 Conclusions 1. The generalized sine-Gordon equation can be applied for modeling peculiarities of fault dynamics. In fact, contribution of perturbation in the sine-Gordon equation in the form of friction and inhomogeneities leads to the solutions of the solitary-like waves that can be interpreted as the waves of fault activation. 2. The value of velocity for these waves regulates the sliding regime in the fault. The value of vmax of the wave of activation increases with increasing velocity VD of the wave. The slip velocity increases sharply for the wave velocity VD of 1 m/s and higher, and the values of displacement u are compatible with the displacements of the fault surfaces that are observed for earthquakes. 3. At definite values of friction and inhomogeneity parameters, D and J, the solitary wave “acquires” the stationary regime with the values of VD ~ 10-4-10-1 m/s or 10 km per day that correspond to the deformational waves. Earthquakes may be a source for deformational waves. These waves, migrating along the fault, may trigger the subsequent seismic events. 4. Periodical changes in the friction parameter in the generalized sine-Gordon equation (18.1), which models, for example, the weakening of the fault due to cyclic fluid flow, lead to a periodical generation of waves with the velocities characteristic of the observed deformational waves. 5. External periodical loading is the effective mechanism of the initiation of unstable dynamic slip. The external high-frequency load is probable to initiate the fault activation, but it does not provide periodical generation of the deformational waves and manifestation of seismic slips, as in the case with the cyclically changing friction inside the fault.

252 V.G. Bykov

6. It is just the frequency of external loading that influences mainly the intensity of fault initiation, that is, the value of vmax and the time interval between them. The amplitude increase of the sinusoidal external loading leads to a reduction in the time delay of the initiated stick-slip. Acknowledgment. This research was supported by the Russian Basic Research Foundation (Grant 04-05-97001).

References Barabanov VL, Grinevskiy AO, Belikov VM, Ishankuliev GA (1994) Migration of the crustal earthquakes. In: Nikolaev AV (ed) Dynamic processes in the geophysical medium. Nauka, Moscow, pp 149-167 (in Russian) Bazavluk TA, Yudakhin FN (1993) Deformation waves in earth crust of Tien-Shan on seismological data. Dokl Akad Nauk 329: 565-570 (in Russian) Ben-Zion Y, Rice JR (1995) Slip patterns and earthquake populations along different classes of faults in elastic solids. J Geophys Res 100: 12,959-12,983 Bormotov VA, Bykov VG (1999) Seismological monitoring of the deformation process. Geol Pacific Ocean 18: 17-25 Carlson JM (1991) Time intervals between characteristic earthquakes and correlations with smaller events: An analysis based on a mechanical model of a fault. J Geophys Res 96: 4255-4267 Dieterich JH (1987) Nucleation and triggering of earthquake slip: effect of periodic stresses. Tectonophysics 144: 127-139 Forsythe GE, Malcolm MA, Moler CB (1977) Computer methods for mathematical computations. Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New York Garagash IA (1996) Microdeformation of the prestress discrete geophysical media. Dokl Akad Nauk 347: 95-98 (in Russian) Hill DP, Johnston MJS, Langbein JO, Bilham R (1995) Response of Long Valley caldera to the Mw = 7.3 Landers, California, earthquake. J Geophys Res 100: 12,985-13,005 Ishii H, Takagi A, Suzuki S (1979) Characteristic movement of crustal deformation in Northeast Honshu, Japan. Gerlands Beitr Geophys 88: 163-169 Kasahara K (1979) Migration of crustal deformation. Tectonophysics 53: 329-341 Mogi K (1968) Migration of seismic activity. Bull Earth Res Inst Tokyo Univ 46: 53-74 Nersesov IL, Lukk AA, Zhuravlev VI, Galaganov ON (1990) On propagation of strain waves in the crust of South Middle Asia. Fizika Zemli 5: 102-112 (in Russian) Nevskiy MV (1994) Extra long period waves of deformations on the lithosphere plate boundaries. In: Nikolaev AV (ed) Dynamic processes in the geophysical medium. Nauka, Moscow, pp 40-55 (in Russian)

18


253

Nevskiy MV, Morozova LA, Zhurba MN (1987) The effect of propagation of the long-period strain perturbations. Dokl Akad Nauk 296: 1090-1093 (in Russian) Nevskiy MV, Morozova LA, Fuis GS (1989) Long-period strain waves. In: Sadovskiy MA (ed) Discrete properties of the geophysical medium. Nauka, Moscow, pp 18-33 (in Russian) Nikolaevskiy VN (1996) Geomechanics and Fluidodynamics: with Applications to Reservoir Engineering. Kluwer Acad Publish, Dordrecht Boston London Nikolaevskiy VN (1998) Tectonic stress migration as nonlinear wave process along earth crust faults. In: Adachi T, Oka F, Yashima A (eds) Proc of the Fourth Intern. Workshop on Localization and Bifurcation Theory for Soils and Rocks, Gifu, Japan, 28 Sept. - 2 Oct. 1997. AA Balkema, Rotterdam, pp 137-142 Nikolaevskiy VN, Ramazanov TK (1986) Generation and propagation of tectonic waves along deep faults. Fizika Zemli 10: 3-13 (in Russian) Ruzhich VV, Truskov VA, Chernykh EN, Smekalin OP (1999) Recent movements in the fault zones of Pribaikalia and mechanisms of their initiation. Geo Geofiz 40: 360-372 (in Russian) Sleep N (1995) Ductile creep, compaction, and rate and state dependent friction within major fault zones. J Geophys Res 100: 13,065-13,080 Sobolev GA, Koltsov AV, Andreev VO (1991) Effect of oscillation triggering in modelling of earthquake. Dokl Akad Nauk SSSR 319: 337-341(in Russian) Sobolev GA, Ponomarev AV, Koltsov AV (1995) Excitation of vibrations in a model of seismic source. Fizika Zemli 12: 72-78 (in Russian) Solerno M, Soerensen MP, Skovgaard O, Christiansen PL (1983) Perturbation theories for sine – Gordone soliton dynamics. Wave Motion 5: 49-58 Stein RS, Barka AA, Dieterich JH (1997) Progressive failure on the North Anatolian fault since 1939 by earthquake stress triggering. Geophys J Int 128: 594604 Ulomov VI (1993) Seismogeodynamic activization waves and the long-term prediction of earthquakes. Fizika Zemli 4: 43-53 (in Russian)

19 Seismic Rotation Waves: Spin and Twist Solitons Eugeniusz Majewski Institute of Geophysics, Polish Academy of Sciences ul. KsiĊcia Janusza 64, 01-452 Warszawa, Poland e-mail: [email protected]

19.1 Introduction This chapter describes seismic rotation waves that can be excited by rotational motions in earthquake sources. The existence of rotational motions excited by earthquakes was proposed by Teisseyre (1973). He considered theoretical aspects of this phenomenon in the framework of the mechanics of a micromorphic continuum. The micromorphic continuum allows for rotational motions of each microvolume of a continuum, so the behaviour of rocks and granular media during an earthquake can be modelled by this theory. Bouchon and Aki (1982) recorded simulated rotational ground motions in the near-source region. Takeo and Ito (1997) applied the Kondo geometrical theory of defects and derived a general expression for rotational motions of seismic waves as a function of parameters of source defects. The ground rotational motions were observed and recorded by Nigbor (1994), Spudich et al. (1995), Stedman et al. (1995), McLeod et al. (1998), Spillman et al. (1998), Takeo (1998), and Igel et al. (2005). The measurements carried out by Takeo (1998) were recorded in the near-source region of earthquakes. The measurements by Spillman et al. (1998) were carried out far from an earthquake source (200 km and more). Trifunac and Todorovska (2001) estimated the rotational component of seismic waves from linear translations. It is noteworthy that other tectonic, volcanic, mining, and land sliding events can be a source of rotational motions as well. Rotational motions in the earthquake source can excite seismic rotation waves. The seismic rotation waves were recorded by Teisseyre et al. (2003). Rotational effects occurring on the ground surface can be caused by the propagation of seismic rotation waves. These waves may rotate buildings,

256 E. Majewski

towers, memorials, tombstones, bridges, and other objects situated on the Earth’s surface. There is a great deal of observational evidence of this kind of seismic activity on the Earth’s surface. Rotational waves are very dangerous for tall buildings (Zembaty and Boffi 1994). These buildings are very sensitive to angular momentum carried by rotation waves. They are designed according to special building codes that take into account seismic rotational motions. Moreover, incident seismic rotation waves interact with the geological structures (e.g., granular medium) and may lead to their softening, degradation, damage or fracture. Geological media with rotational degrees of freedom (e.g., the so-called “liquid sands”) are extremely sensitive to any rotational motions or vibrations. The aim of this chapter is to investigate the seismic rotation waves. We are particularly interested in seismic rotation waves that have a form of solitons. Thus, we have to consider nonlinear waves. The wave nonlinearity introduces a new possibility that the rotation wave speed may depend on the magnitude of a rotation vector. In such a case, the wave width and amplitude are modulated during the process of propagation (Hanyga 1986). Its profile changes as a function of the magnitude of a rotation vector. We will show that seismic rotation waves may take a form of solitary waves. The solitary waves or solitons are self-trapped packets of energy that propagate without loss of energy and momentum. The solitary wave is a result of the balance of nonlinearity (due to finite deformations and elastic features of the medium) and dispersion (due to the microstructure of the medium).

19.2 Modelling the Rotational Motions Excited in Earthquake Sources We consider here a simple model of an earthquake source composed of two tectonic plates and a large, rounded fragment of rock (shaped as a cylinder) between them. The tectonic plate A moves from right to left, while the tectonic plate B moves from left to right. At the same time, the large, rounded fragment of rock rotates counterclockwise. The rotation of the largest fragment of rock is conveyed to other, smaller rock fragments that rotate as well. Thus, in the earthquake source there are many rotating fragments of rocks that are the sources of seismic rotation waves. Figure 19.1 shows the schematic picture of the mechanism that excites rotational motions in the earthquake source. One can infer spin motions of the solid cylinder and imagine a situation in which both tectonic plates move in opposite directions, oscillating along the fault at the same time. During such

19 Seismic Rotation Waves: Spin and Twist Solitons

257

a process, the tectonic plates vibrate in opposite directions and the cylinder is in a twist motion. We can combine these two simple motions together and obtain a resulting motion of the cylinder with two components: twist and spin motions.

Fig. 19.1 A simple model of rotational motions excited in the earthquake source. Due to the motion of tectonic plates A and B in opposite directions during an earthquake, the largest, round fragment of rock rotates counterclockwise. It also conveys its rotational motion to other, smaller fragments of rocks. As a result, many fragments of rock rotate and become sources of seismic rotation waves

19.3 Seismic Rotation Waves: PR and SR Waves The rotational motions generated in the earthquake source can excite seismic rotation waves that propagate to the Earth’s surface. We distinguish two kinds of seismic rotation waves: (i) longitudinal rotation waves, i.e., PR waves, and (ii) shear rotation waves, i.e., SR waves. The PR wave has a rotation vector parallel to the direction of the wave propagation. In turn, the SR wave has a rotation vector perpendicular to the direction of the wave propagation. These seismic rotation waves are illustrated in Fig. 19.2. It should be added that when one makes measurements of the PR waves on the Earth’s surface, it is easy to see the intimate relations between PR waves and SH waves since both waves involve rock particles

258 E. Majewski

vibrating in the same plane. Similar intimate relations can be seen between the SR waves and SV waves measured on the Earth’s surface.

Fig. 19.2 Illustration of the seismic rotation waves excited in the earthquake source. (a) The seismic PR-wave. Here the direction of the rotation vector IPR is parallel to the direction of wave propagation QPR. The rotations take place in the plane perpendicular to the direction of wave propagation. (b) The seismic SR-wave. Here the rotation vector ISR is perpendicular to the direction of wave propagation QSR. The rotations take place in the plane parallel to the direction of wave propagation

We should also mention another important classification of rotation waves. From the point of view of rotational symmetry, the rotation waves can be divided in two groups: spin waves, and twist waves.

19.4 The Slow Tectonic Rotation Waves Seismic rotation waves propagate faster in solid rocks and much slower in fractured media along tectonic faults. Thus, in solid rocks far away from earthquake faults the seismic rotation waves propagate with velocities roughly comparable with velocities of other seismic waves propagating in the Earth’s interior. The so-called “slow” seismic rotation waves propagate in fractured rock media along earthquake faults with a velocity of about 250-300 km/year (Nikolaevskiy 1996, 1998). They are excited by past earthquakes and can trigger new earthquakes on the fault (cf., Chap. 17 by Aksenov and Chap. 18 by Bykov). Thus, the “slow” seismic rotation waves (called also “deformational waves”) have the form of solitons and can be viewed as a mechanism triggering earthquakes on the faults. Such a slow rotation soliton is usually accompanied by a transverse wave.


259

19.5 Hamilton’s Principle The “action” S is defined by a momentum multiplied by a distance minus an energy multiplied by time

S

px Et ,

(19.1)

where p is the momentum, x is the distance vector, E is an energy and t is time. However, we can also define the “action” S as the volume integral of the kinetic energy density K, minus the potential strain energy density P, minus the potential of external volume forces B, plus the surface integral of surface forces W and Z acting on displacements u and on rotations ITˆ , respectively, and the whole expression integrated over the time interval [t1, t2] t2

S

ª

º

³ «¬ ³³³ K P B dV ³³ Wu ZITˆ dA»¼ dt , t1

(19.2)

wV

V

where K PB

L,

(19.3)

and L is the volume density of the Lagrange function. Bearing in mind that the kinetic and potential energies, as well as other variables are time-dependent, for each different possible path of integration one gets a different result for the “action”. Our aim is to find such a path in space for which the result is the smallest number. Thus, we seek the least action. Hamilton’s Principle can be viewed as a Principle of Least Action on intuitive grounds. We assume that the earthquake processes in the source follow Hamilton’s Principle. Starting from this Principle, we shall derive fundamental equations for seismic rotation waves. Before we proceed, we have to formulate basic constitutive equations for the micropolar elastic rock medium that can describe rotations.

19.6 A Rock Medium Modelled as a Nonlinear Micropolar Elastic Continuum In order to describe seismic rotation solitons, we have to consider a nonlinear rock medium with rotational degrees of freedom, nonlinear deformations, and nonlinear seismic waves. Thus, we have to take into consideration both, the physical and geometrical sources of nonlinearity. First of all, we have to assume finite deformations. In the formulae for measures

260 E. Majewski

of strains, relative distortions and microdistortions as functions of displacements, we have to retain the nonlinear terms 1

Eij

2 1

J kl

2

F ijk

u

i, j

u j ,i uk ,i ul , j ,

u

k ,l

Ikl uk ,i Iil ,

(19.4)

Iij ,k ul ,i Ilj , k ,

where Eij is the Cauchy-Green tensor of elastic strain, Ȗkl is the relative distortion tensor (Nowacki 1970), Ȥijk is the microdistortion gradient, and Iij is the rotation tensor (Nowacki 1977, Eringen 1999). The kinetic energy density can be expressed as follows K (t )

1 2

U (u u + jI I) .

(19.5)

The potential strain energy density is PE PJ ,

(19.6)

>O Ekk Ell ( P N ) Ekl Ekl P Ekl Elk @ ,

(19.7)

P (t ) where PE

1 2

PJ

1 2

DJ kk J ll EJ kl J lk JJ kl J kl .

(19.8)

From Hamilton’s Principle

G L G A 0 ,

(19.9)

one can obtain a set of fundamental Euler equations. Here G A denotes an elementary work produced by external forces during a virtual displacement. These equations are the coupled partial differential equations describing the wave propagation processes. From the variation calculus one can obtain (Samsonov 2001, Erofeyev 2003)

w wL w wL w 2 wL 2 wxn wu j ,n wt wu j wxn wu j , nm

wL wu j

w 2 wL w 3 wL , 3 wxn wt wu j wxn wu j ,knm

(19.10a)


261

w wL w wL w 2 wL 2 wxi wImn , i wt wImn wxi wImn ,ij

wL wImn

w2 wL w 3 wL . 3 wxi wt wImn ,i wxi wImn ,ijk

(19.10b)

19.7 The Nonlinear Field Equations We consider a micropolar elastic continuum that allows rotational deformations. Rotation waves can propagate in such a medium. Micropolar effects are important in the excitation and propagation of seismic rotation waves. In order to reveal these effects, and the new physical properties described beyond and above the seismic P and S waves, here we examine the dispersion of plane seismic waves in an isotropic micropolar elastic Earth. These considerations may be also helpful for experimental observations to determine the micropolar elastic constants for rock media. From Hamilton’s Principle in the form of Eq. (19.2), after some calculations and additional assumptions, one can obtain nonlinear field equations. The field equations of a micropolar elastic solid Earth may be expressed in the vectorial form = N1 , (O 2P N )'u ( P N ) u u u N u I U u

(19.11)

(D E J )'I J u u I N u u 2N I U j I N2

(19.12)

where ' is the Laplacian, is the gradient operator, u is the displacement vector, I is the rotation vector, O and P are Lamé’s constants, N is the Mooney constant, D, E and J are elastic constants of microrotation, U is the material density, j is the inertia vector for the macrovolume, N1 and N2 are the vectors that include nonlinear terms.

19.8 The Linear Seismic Rotation Waves Disregarding the nonlinear terms (N1 = N2 = 0), the field equations (19.11) and (19.12) can be decomposed into scalar and vector wave equations by introducing scalar potentials (F, R) and vector potentials U, ) (Eringen 1999),

262 E. Majewski

u = F + u U , I R + u ) ,

(19.13)

where U 0 and ) ) 0. Equations (19.11) and (19.12) are satisfied if VP2 ' F F 0 , 2 0 , VPR 'R \ 2 R R

VS2 'U

1 2 j\ u ) U 2

(19.14)

0,

1

(VSRu ) 2 ') \ 2 ) \ 2u U )

0,

(VSRl ) 2 ') \ 2 ) \ 2u U )

0,

2 1 2

(19.15)

where

O 2P N , U J (VSRu ) 2 , Uj

VP2

P N , U J 2N (VSRl ) 2 , Uj VS2

2 VPR

\

2

D E J , Uj 2N . Uj

(19.16)

Here VP , VS , VPR , VSRu , VSRl are the magnitudes of phase velocities of the seismic P, S, PR, upper SR, and lower SR waves, respectively, and \ is a constant. We consider here plane harmonic waves, thus we have ( F , R, U, ) )

( g , h, W , Z ) exp[i (k x Z t )] ,

(19.17)

where k is the wave-vector and Z is the angular frequency. The above equation allows us to formulate dispersion relations Z vs. k. After investigations of the dispersion relations we can conclude that there are five different seismic waves propagating with five different phase velocities. – A longitudinal displacement wave propagates with the phase velocity VP. This will be called the seismic P wave (P). – A longitudinal rotation wave propagates with the velocity VPR. This will be called the seismic PR wave (PR). – A vector wave with phase velocity VS. This will be called the seismic shears wave (S).


263

Two vector waves coupled with S wave that propagate with the phase velocities VSRu and VSRl . They will be called the upper and lower seismic shear rotation waves (SR), respectively. Dispersion relations are sketched in Fig. 19.3. Except of the P wave, all waves are dispersive. The asymptotes of PR, SR, and S waves are depicted by broken lines. The asymptote of the PR wave is VPR k , the asymptote of the S wave is VS k and the asymptotes of the upper and lower SR waves –

are VSRu k and VSRl k , respectively.

Fig. 19.3 Dispersion curves of seismic waves near k = 0 in a micropolar elastic Earth. P denotes the seismic P wave, S the seismic S wave, PR the seismic PR wave and SR the seismic SR wave

19.9 The Nonlinear Seismic Rotation Waves In order to formulate a set of field equations of nonlinear micropolar elasticity, we should specify the nonlinear terms N1 and N2 in (19.11) and (19.12). However, they are long and tedious expressions. Due to the space limitations, we confine ourselves to the final results. We can solve this nonlinear problem for particular cases of wave interactions as a collinear propagation of P waves and of PR waves. We can also consider a collinear

264 E. Majewski

propagation of P waves and SR waves. In this way, we will display some interesting physical phenomena that are lost in the linear theory. As a result, we can reduce the nonlinear field equations (19.11) and (19.12) to the following set of equations for coupled normal waves b1 [

(3) 3

1/ 2

b2[

3

(3) 3 xx

b[

i[(3)

(VSRu ) 2 § U j · ¨ ¸ 6 © N ¹

w 2xx

(19.18)

u ª [ 1 [ (2) [ 3 ] (1) ] (2) º , ¬ ¼ (1,2) [(1,2) r VSRl [[ x(1,2) r c1[ xx(1,2) r c2[ xxx

ª[ ¬

1

[

[(1,2) r VP] x(1,2)

2

B

[

3

]

(1)

B

VP2 wx VSR

(19.19)

] (2) º , ¼

VP wx 2

(19.20)

ª [ 1 [ 2 [ 3 6 ] 1 ] 2 2 º «¬ »¼

where b1, b2, b3, c1, and c2 are constants. A similar procedure was developed by Erofeyev (2003) in a context of acoustic waves. We can see that the left side of (19.18) contains a nonlinear Schrödinger (NLS) equation and describes a dispersion branch off the upper seismic SR wave. In addition, the left side of (19.19) contains the Korteveg-de Vries-Burgers (KdVB) equations and describes a dispersion branch off the lower seismic SR wave. These two equations have solitary solutions. In a similar way, by retaining terms with higher order derivatives, we can obtain the doubly dispersive equation DDE as a branch of the lower SR wave. Now we will pay attention to a collinear propagation of seismic P waves and PR waves. To this end, we will focus on the paper by Maugin and Miled (1986) who studied one-dimensional rotation waves. They found solitary waves modelling the motions of ferromagnetic and ferromagnetic domain walls. We will outline their work and apply it to seismology. They considered finite elastic deformations and used a Lagrangian frame-of-reference. Due to the fact that the transverse components of the displacement vector are equal to zero and the axis of rotation is the X axis, we can write (cf., Eringen 1999) x

X U X, t ,

y Y,

z

Z,

(19.21)


F kK

265

ª1 0 0 º «0 cos I sin I » , « » «¬0 sin I cos I »¼

(19.22)

where U is the axial displacement and IX, t is the rotation angle about the X axis. The deformation tensor EKL and Wryness tensor *KL are given by

xk , K F lL

EKL

1

* KL

2

ª wU «1 wX « «0 «0 « ¬

º » » sin I » , cos I » » ¼

0

0

cos I sin I

ª wI « wX « «0 «0 « ¬

KLM F kM , L F kN

º 0» » 0 0» . 0 0» » ¼

(19.23)

0

(19.24)

We specify constitutive equations in the form w< F lL , wCKL

TKl

M Kl

w< F lL , w* LK

(19.25)

where < is the free energy. For isotropic solids, < is a function of the invariants of EKL and *KL. For a second-degree polynomial, it has the form (cf. Eringen 1999)

i(G M )@ .

(36.16)

The amplitude of the wave Uc(x, y, z, t) (Eq. 36.15) was multiplied by the factor Ug(1Uw). This results from the reflection of the wave on the water-glass boundary (factor Ug) and propagation of the wave through airwater boundary (factor 1Uw). In the phase module of Eq. (36.16) there appeared component G resulting from the change of the wave phase caused by reflection of the wave from the lens spherical surface, as well as from double-passing of the wave through the layer of water.

36 High-Resolution Tiltmeter: Observations of Earth Free Oscillations

§

G (r ) 2knw ¨ d ©

r2 · ¸, 2R ¹

503

(36.17)

where nw is the water diffraction factor, r is the distance from the axis of symmetry Z of Cartesian system, d is the distance between the top of the reflecting lens and the water surface. The phase element G describes the difference of phases between the reflected waves U1(x, y, z, t) and U2(x, y, z, t). According to the coherent waves summation law, the function of brightness distribution Z (r) is expressed by the equation: U1U1 U 2U 2 U1U 2 U 2U1 ,

Z (r )

(36.18)

where * denotes the complex conjugate. The function of brightness distribution Z (r) is radial symmetric on account of axial symmetry of the problem. From the property of complex numbers we get

Z (r )

U1U1 U 2U 2 2 Re{U1U 2 }cos(G ) ,

(36.19)

where Re is the real part of the expression {U1U 2 } . Hence, the function of brightness distribution for the thickness d of water layer is given by the equation:

Z (r )

A B cos G (r ) ,

(36.20)

§ r2 · nw k ¨ 2d ¸ . R¹ ©

(36.21)

where the phase element is

G (r )

Constants A and B, describing the level of background brightness and the amplitude of brightness of interference rings are given by the equations:

and

A

U1U1 U 2U 2 ~ Uw2 U g2 (1 Uw )4

B

2 Re {U1U 2 } ~ 2 Uw U g (1 Uw )2 .

We can express the thickness of water layer above the lens in the form: d

nw N O 'd ,

(36.22)

where NO is the multiplicity of light wavelength and 'd is the residuum. After substitution of Eq. (36.22) into (36.21), the equation of phase will take the form:

504 M. Kaczorowski

G (r )

2ʌ N 2ʌ

nw 2 n r 4ʌ w 'd . OR O

(36.23)

The function of brightness distribution will be

Z (r )

A B cos ª¬Cr 2 'F ('d ) º¼ ,

(36.24)

2ʌ nw n . The variable element of phase 'F ('d ) 4ʌ w 'd is a O OR linear function of the water level variations 'd. Therefore, the determination of the phase change 'F('d) enables us to calculate the water level variations 'd from the formula: where C

'd

1 O 'F ('d ) . 4ʌ nw

(36.25)

Substituting the numerical values into the right-hand side of Eq. (36.25) and converting angle 4S into the angular measure we obtain: 1 O 720 nw

0.6608 nm/deg .

Hence, the formula describing the relation between variation of phase 'F('d) of the following interference images and the variation of water level 'd is 'd

0.6608 [nm/deg] 'F ('d ) .

(36.26)

Equation (36.26) was applied in an algorithm to calculate time series of the water level changes on the basis of time series of interference image phase variations.

36.6 Determination of the Function of Plumb Line Variations The initial result of the measurements of the water-tube tiltmeter is the time series of interference images. The time series of images contains information about water level variations in the hydrodynamic system of the instrument. Determination of the time series of water level variations enables us to calculate the final product, i.e., plumb line variation. One of the main problems with processing the long water-tube observations is the necessity of processing 12 million files of interference images in yearly


505

series. The number of images results from the necessity of supporting registration on four channels with a frequency of one photo per ten seconds. Taking into account the quality of registration, the frequency ought to be as high as possible. For the high frequency of registration, cycle-slip effects (Sect. 36.6.4) will never appear. The chosen frequency of registration results from technical limitations of computer such as the number of stored files as well as image-processing abilities. The observations are performed under the control of the MS Windows 2000 system applying the Pentium 4 with 2.7GB clock. The main algorithms applied in data processing programs are presented further on. 36.6.1 Determination of brightness profiles of interference images

The time-consuming element of the observation analysis is the determination of the series { Zn (r, t)} of brightness profiles distribution of interference images, where r is the distance from the center of symmetry of interference image, and t is the parameter denoting the time of image generation. During the registration, the collection of images was divided into few-week long blocks. For each block, the following three parameters were manually chosen: x Locations of the centers of the brightness section independently for each series. x Angle of tilt of brightness section in relation to interference image. x Color of brightness section. Picking up the location of profile, we choose the low-noise area of the image; it should be as long as possible, while the distance of the profile from the center of symmetry of interference images should be small (Fig. 36.6). To obtain high dynamics of the brightness function Zn (r, t), we choose the color of section without exceeding the scale of brightness (range < 0-255 >). Due to the invariability of location of the symmetry axis of the Newtonian rings in epoch of a few weeks as well as to the invariable location of the interference noise on the images, it is enough to select the location of the section of brightness only at the beginning of the analyzed several-week long data block. A possible displacement of the location of the brightness section in relation to the image axis of symmetry causes a shift of the whole few-week series by a constant. However, it does not affect the result of the final analysis.

506 M. Kaczorowski

Fig. 36.6 Profile of brightness Zn (r, t) of interference image

36.6.2 Division of daily series of brightness profiles into similarity classes

Time series of brightness profiles {Zn (r, t)} of interference images are the initial data for calculating – with the help of the least square method – the time series of theoretical brightness profiles {Zn (r, t)} as well as for determining time series {Fn(t)} of the phases of interference images (Sect. 36.6.3). Because the process of determining the phase F of a single interference image is time-consuming, we perform time series of brightness profiles {Zn (r, t)} before the analysis. The applied algorithm is based on the repeatability of the interference images as well as repeatability of their brightness profiles Z ( r ) . The profiles of brightness of interference images are not differentiated when their phases differ by the full angle. Basing on this property, we introduce equivalent relation “to be similar to” into the series of brightness profiles {Zn (r, t)}. The equivalent relation divides series of brightness profiles into disjoined classes. Each class contains the images whose brightness profiles


507

are similar. Next, applying adjustment process, we determine for each class one phase F of brightness profiles of pattern image (Sect. 36.6.3). The number of classes generated by the algorithm in a series of profiles depends on the value of similarity coefficient. When the number of classes is too small, the smoothness of the function of plumb line variations (quantification of values) is violated; when it is too large, the process of further elaboration is significantly prolonged. The experience has shown that the optimum number of brightness profile classes is between 400 and 600 (Fig. 36.7).

Fig. 36.7 Influence of the number of classes on quantification of data

The algorithm automatically chooses the value of similarity coefficient to obtain the appropriate number of classes. Application of the division of daily series of brightness profiles into similarity classes reduces the number of necessary adjustments of the brightness function Z (r) from 34,000 to about 2,000 per day. 36.6.3 Determination of phase F of the interference image on the basis of brightness profiles Z ( r )

Adjustment of the theoretical function Ȧ(r) (Eq. 36.24) of brightness profiles requires that the observed brightness function Z ( r ) be normalized before analysis. The normalization improves the contrast of interference rings, eliminates inhomogeneity of the image brightness as well as decreases the effects of interference noise created in laser optic, the lightseparating plate, and water surface pollutions. The algorithm determines the mean value of brightness and then introduces correction to normalize the level of brightness. To determine phase F of interference images, we compared empirical function Z ( r ) of brightness profile with the theoretical function of brightness profile Ȧ(r). We assume that conformability

508 M. Kaczorowski

between the empirical and theoretical images will be reached when the square function of the difference of empirical Z ( r ) and theoretical Ȧ(r) functions of brightness reaches minimum. The mathematical formula for the condition of the images conformability was expressed by putting the first derivatives of the sum of squares of differences equal to zero. We applied the theoretical function of brightness (Eq. 36.24). A B cos(Cr 2 F ) .

Z (r )

(36.27)

Variable r is the distance from the image axis of symmetry. The amplitude coefficients, A and B, represent the level of background brightness and the amplitude of brightness of interference rings. Constant C is given by the formula: C = 2S nw/OR (Sect. 36. 5). The phase variable F is associated with water level variations above the reflecting lens (Sect. 36.5). The difference of empirical Z ( r ) and theoretical Z (r) functions is given by the formula 'Z ( r )

Z (r ) A B cos(Cr 2 F ) .

(36.28)

Applying the identity B cos(Cr 2 F )

B cos(Cr 2 ) cos( F ) B sin(Cr 2 )sin( F )

and substituting the formulae: V1

B cos( F ) ,

V2

B sin( F ) ,

X1

cos(Cr 2 ) ,

X2

sin(Cr 2 ) ,

we obtained Eq. (36.28) in a new form: 'Z ( r ) Z (r ) A X1V1 X 2V2 .

(36.29)

After squaring and differentiating Eq. (36.29) with respect to A, V1, V2 we obtained three differential equations. To fulfill the requirement of extremum, the differential equations were equated to zero. w'Z ( r ) w$ w'Z ( r ) wV1

w'Z (r ) wV2

2 >Z (r ) A X1V1 X 2V @ (1) 0 ,

2 >Z (r ) A X1V1 X 2V @ ( X1 ) 0 , 2 >Z (r ) A X1V1 X 2V @ ( X 2 ) 0 .

(36.30)


509

For each point of the brightness profile Z ( r ) we defined a system of equations identical to (36.30). Next, we summed up the corresponding components of equation system. The solutions of system (36.30) allowed us to determine variables A, V1, V2. To calculate phase F of theoretical interference image best fitting to the real image, we used the formula: arctg (V2 / V1 )

(36.31)

F.

The algorithm of calculation of the real image phase F gives the phase in angular measure. The resolution of calculation is equal to one degree and variable F is an integer from the interval 0 to 359. 36.6.4 The calculation of time series of progressive phases {Sn(t)} of interference images

After calculation of time series {Fn(t)} of interference image phases, the next step is to calculate the time series of progressive phases {Sn(t)}. This is realized in several iterations. The first is based on the principle of choosing “the shorter step”. We chose the following formulae for calculating the next element of the series of progressive phases {Sn+1(t)}: for

Fn 1 Fn d 180o Sn 1 (t )

for

Sn (t ) Fn 1 Fn ;

(36.32)

Fn 1 Fn ! 180o Sn 1 (t )

Sn (t ) Fn (360o Fn 1 )

when

Fn 1 ! 180o ,

Sn 1 (t )

Sn (t ) Fn 1 (360o Fn )

when

Fn ! 180o .

(36.33)

The greater the reliability of correctness of “the shorter step” choice, the smaller the value of Fn 1 Fn . In the case of tidal phenomena, the rate of the image phase variations never exceeds 100 deg/min. For 10-second period of sampling images (Sect. 36.6) and for tidal periods, we obtain: Fn 1 Fn 10o . For slow variations of image phases Fn 1 Fn 180o there is a real chance that the chosen method of progressive phases determination is correct. Incidentally, due to local as well as some geodynamic effects we observe differences of phases Fn 1 Fn close to 180o or larger (Sect. 36.8). For differences Fn 1 Fn ! 100o the application of “the shorter step” principle becomes controversial. Therefore, in the case of

510 M. Kaczorowski

high-dynamics phenomena, producing large and rapid variability of phases, the process of sticking successive phases is a source of errors (Sect. 36.8). The errors of sticking process resulting from discontinuity of phases {Fn(t)} are called cycle-slip effects. The second iteration of the determination of series of progressive phases {Sn(t)} is the elimination of some discontinuities (jumps) arisen because of errors of sticking process (first iteration). In the case of typical discontinuities, the algorithm automatically detects and eliminates such errors. Other errors can be partially eliminated by comparing signals obtained from opposite ends of the tube or by comparing the signal with tidal ephemerides function. 36.6.5 Determination of series of plumb line variations {Tn(t)} on the basis of series of progressive phases {Sn(t)} measured on one side of the tube

To determine time series of plumb line variations {Tn(t)}, the series {Sn(t)} of progressive phases were multiplied by the coefficient of proportionality K (in mas/deg). The coefficient K was calculated from Eq. (36.26). Both sides of Eq. (36.26) were divided by half lengths of the water-tubes, L / 2 (Eq. 36.11). Next, the radians were converted into millisecond of arc (mas). For the tube in azimuth –121.4o, whose length is 65.24 m, the coefficient is K A1

2.089 u 103 mas/deg .

(36.34)

For the tube in azimuth –31.4o, whose length is 83.51 m, the coefficient is K B1 1.632 u 103 mas/deg .

(36.35)

o

For tube A1 located in azimuth –121.4 , the time series of plumb line variations {Tn(t)} is calculated from the formula {Tn (t )}A1

2.089 u 103 [mas/deg] {Sn (t )}A1 .

(36.36)

For tube B1 located in azimuth –31.4o, the time series of plumb line variations {Tn(t)}, are calculated from the formula {Tn (t )}B1 1.632 u 103 [mas/deg] {Sn (t )}B1 .

(36.37)

Sensitivity of the tiltmeter in azimuth –121.4o (the shorter tube) is 78% of that of the tiltmeter in azimuth 31.4o (the longer tube). Equations (36.36) and (36.37) determined limits of the long water-tube measure-


511

ments. If the accuracy of determination of time series {Sn(t)} is close to several degrees, then we are able to determine plumb line variations with an accuracy better than 10-2mas in single measurement. For comparison, the accuracy of measurements of the quartz horizontal pendulums approaches 0.8 mas in yearly series of observations. 36.6.6 The difference method of plumb line variations measurements

In the previous section we described the method of determination of plumb line variations on the basis of single series of observations of water level variations obtained from one end of the tube. Simultaneous measurements of water changes on both sides of the tube enable us to apply the difference method of measurements. The measurements on both ends of the tube open additional possibilities of signals verification. The signals of plumb line variations consist of local signals as well as large-scale signals of geodynamic origin. The geodynamic phenomena such as direct and indirect tides, meteorological-origin loading effects, and Earth free oscillations, generate large scale signals of plumb line variations. On account of the relation between the length of the tube (tens of meters) and tilt waves associated with large-scale phenomena (thousands of kilometers), the effects of water level variations generated at the ends of the tube are opposite (increasing and decreasing). The water-tube stays all the time on one slope of the tilt wave; never on both slopes. Therefore, the water level changes generated by large-scale phenomena are exactly correlated in opposite phases. Otherwise, local signals originated in the surroundings of the instrument or inside the hydrodynamic system of the instrument produce signals of conformable phases or signals appearing at one end of the tube only. All local signals (noise) were interpreted as a source of errors. On the basis of the series of progressive phases {Sn(t)}A11 and {Sn(t)}A12 obtained on the opposite ends of the tube, we determine the time series of plumb line variations {Tn(t)}A12 , from the formula {Tn (t )}A12

2.089 u 103 [mas/deg]

{Sn (t )}A11 {Sn (t )}A12 . 2

(36.38)

Likewise, for the second tube, on the basis of progressive phases series {Sn(t)}B11 and {Sn(t)}B12, we calculate time series of plumb line variations {Tn(t)}B12 , from the formula {Tn (t )}B12

1.632 u 103 [mas/deg]

{Sn (t )}B11 {Sn (t )}B12 . 2

(36.39)

512 M. Kaczorowski

Simple subtraction of signals from opposite ends of the tube (Eqs. 36.38 and 36.39) causes double amplification of all large scale geodynamic signals and partial reduction of local signals (noise). On the other hand, the summation of series of progressive phases {Sn(t)}A11 and {Sn(t)}A12, as well as the summation of series of progressive phases {Sn(t)}B11 and {Sn(t)}B12, caused elimination of large-scale geodynamic signals and summation errors. These errors originated mainly from the surroundings of the instrument and errors of data processing, such as cycle-slip effects. The time series of errors {Hn(t)}A12 and {Hn(t)}B12 , are given by the formulae: {H n (t )}A12

2.089 u 103 [mas/deg]

{Sn (t )}A11 {Sn (t )}A12 , 2

(36.40)

{H n (t )}B12

1.632 u 103 [mas/deg]

{Sn (t )}B11 {Sn (t )}B12 . 2

(36.41)

Basing on the comparative method we try to separate series of errors {Hn(t)}A12 and {Hn(t)}B12 into two channels, associated with the two ends of the tube. Applying the comparative method we are looking for effects which were registered only in one channel and effects whose plots have conformable shapes and conformable phases. If the process of separating series of errors into two channels is correct, we obtain an opportunity to additionally improve the large-scale geodynamic signals.

36.7 Determination of tidal wave coefficients on the basis of the long water-tube measurements To determine the tidal wave coefficients we made a standard analysis of the 2003 yearly series of plumb line variations. The values of amplitude and phase coefficients were applied in the following section to calculate tidal ephemeredes and to separate plumb line variations of tidal and nontidal origin, while the Earth free oscillations were of 26 December 2004. The tidal analysis of the 2003 yearly series was made with the help of the algorithm of Chojnicki (1977), basing on the least-squares method. The accuracy of tidal wave parameters was obtained from the Fourier analysis of residuum (Chojnicki 1978). For tidal adjustment we applied expansion of tidal potential given by Cartwright and Tayler (1971). The data adjustment was made independently for each of the tubes in their azimuths, –121.4o and 31.4o, calculated from north to west. The interval of observations applied in the adjustment process amounts to 13 months in the years 2003/2004. The tidal waves spectrum was divided into 18 groups, repre-


513

senting main tidal waves. From the tidal analysis we determined the values of amplitude coefficients and phase retardations for 18 tidal waves. We also obtained the mean square errors of all the observations. For both tubes, the results of adjustment showed relatively large values of mean square errors of tilt signals, close to 0.5 mas (Kaczorowski 2004, 2005). We explain the relatively large values of mean square errors (in comparison to sensitivity of measurement system – Sect. 36.6.5) by local effects associated with the phenomenon of air pressure compensation between the outside and the underground. This thesis is well confirmed by a coincidence of windy days and days of increased level of noise in registrations of plumb line variations. Other sources of errors are associated with cycleslip effects in the progressive phases determination.

36.8 Observations of anomalous plumb line variations associated with Earth free oscillations on 26 December 2004 Phenomenon of the Earth free oscillations is generated by extremely strong seismic events. Dozen or so hours after the earthquake of MS equal to 9.1, which took place near the coast of Sumatra-Andaman Islands on 26 December 2004 (Seismological Bulletin 2004), we observed non-tidal plumb line variations. The Earth free oscillations are associated with several effects such as body waves, surface waves, compressions and dilatations of the Earth medium (Pekeris and Jarosch 1958, Alterman et al. 1959). Simultaneously, there are generated gravity and inertial accelerations as well as plumb line variations. Plumb line variations related to the Earth crust consist of tilt effects produced by surface waves and horizontal components of gravity and inertial accelerations. Over two hours after the first seismic signals onset, that is, at 01h 11m UT, we observed strong inertial signals. Horizontal components of inertial signals produced tilts and rotation of water surface in the measurement chamber of instrument (Sect. 36.5). Sequence of the following images showed displacements of the centers of Newtonian rings as well as their deformations from circular into elliptical shape (Fig. 36.8). Duration of inertial impulses amounted to just single seconds, and did not affect the water level in hydrodynamic system of tiltmeter. During the later phase of free oscillations, we did not observe inertial effects. The Sumatra -Andaman earthquake provided an opportunity to verify the hydrodynamic system of tiltmeter (Sect. 36.4). The results of observations show that the low-pass filters considerably reduce the contribution of short-period effects and effectively protect the hydrodynamic system against resonance.

514 M. Kaczorowski

Fig. 36.8 Sequence of the Newtonian rings during the first hour of Earth free oscillations on 26 December 2004, as obtained from the water-tube situated in o azimuth –121.4

This circumstance enables us to register a later phase of free oscillations (Figs. 36.9, 36.10, and 36.11). During the first two hours of the event we observed rapid variations of water level caused by the passing of surface waves (periods from hundred seconds up to tens of minutes) as well as effects of additional gravity and inertial accelerations. Accidentally, variations of water level became too rapid to be firmly registered. The tensecond period of interference image sampling was too long and we obtained a significant number of cycle-slip errors. Two hours later, the cycleslip errors became incidental. In Figs. 36.10 and 36.11, plots of plumb line variations registered by both tubes on 26 December 2004 are shown. Black plots represent the observed plumb line variations – difference of signals from ends of the tubes (Sect. 36.6.6). Dark grey plots describe noise – the sum of signals. Light grey lines present the modeled tide calculated on the basis of ephemerid obtained from the previous observations (Sect. 36.7). Results of subtraction of tidal signals from observations are shown in Figs. 36.12 and 36.13. The upper plots represent non-tidal-origin plumb line variations associated with free oscillations. The maximum amplitude observed reached 5 mas and decreases to 0.5 mas after two and a half hours. The lower plots describe the noise level (Sect. 36.6.6). These plots contain errors of data treatment caused by cycle-slip effects mainly. During the first two hours, amplitudes of errors caused by cycle-slip effects were close to the amplitudes of plumb line variations.


515

Fig. 36.9 Water level variations reduced to milliseconds of arc (mas) of plumb line variations obtained from two ends of the tube (channels 1 and 2) placed in o azimuth –121.4

o

Fig. 36.10 The plumb line variations in azimuth 121.4 on 26 December 2004. Visible anomaly of plumb line variations associated with Earth free oscillations

516 M. Kaczorowski

o

Fig. 36.11 The plumb line variations in azimuth –31.4 on 26 December 2004. Visible anomaly of plumb line variations associated with Earth free oscillations

In a later phase of the event, the level of noise decreased to tenth of mas. On the basis of data obtained from both water-tubes we assembled a plot of plumb line variations in space (Fig. 36.14). On this figure, the tubes are situated exactly on the axis of coordinates. The plumb line variations were shown in azimuths of measurements: azimuths of the tubes –31.4o and –121.4o. The magnified fragment of plot shows large complications of tilts signals affecting the instrument. The presented fragment was chosen from the end of third hour of the event and spread over fifteen minutes. During this interval, the amplitude of non-tidal plumb line variations was close to one mas. Then, the amplitudes of non-tidal tilt waves reduced to several tenth of mas. From Fig. 36.14 we can notice that non-tidal signals slightly affected tidal trends and that tilt waves associated with free oscillations cause only around-tidal variations of plumb line.

36.9 Conclusions Several years of measurements carried out with the long water-tube tiltmeter confirm attractive features of this instrument (Kaczorowski 2004). The long water-tube construction provides us with measuring system whose internal accuracy of measurement is close to several thousandths mas


517

(Sect. 36.6.5). Application of difference method for data processing eliminated the effect of instrumental drift (Sect. 36.6.6). The comparison of results of observations from previous years confirmed the high stability of the measurement system sensitivity. We obtained a perfect correlation between tidal signals observed on 26 December 2004 and modelled tides calculated on the basis of observations from previous years (Figs. 36.10 and 36.11). Discrepancies between plots are associated with non-tidal plumb line variations of the Earth free oscillations. Several years of experience provided information about positive features of new instrument as well as information about some drawbacks of measuring system.

Fig. 36.12 Plots of differences and sum of signals from both ends of the tube in o azimuth 121.4 after subtraction of the tidal signal. Differences of signals (upper plot) represent effect of plumb line variations caused by Earth free oscillations. Sum of signals (lower plot) represents the noise level (Sect. 36.6.6)

518 M. Kaczorowski

Fig. 36.13 Plots of differences and sum of signals from both ends of the tube in o azimuth 31.4 after subtraction of the tidal signal. Differences of signals (upper plot) represent effect of plumb line variations caused by Earth free oscillations. Sum of signals (lower plot) represents the noise level (Sect. 36.6.6)

There are two main problems of measurement: the cycle-slip effects (Sect. 36.6.4) and the pressure gradient appearing along the water-tubes of instrument. The pressure gradient disturbs water free surface through the inverse barometric effect. Gradient of the order of 10-6 hPa/m can be erroneously interpreted as plumb line variations. Both problems can be solved. Cycle-slip effects will be eliminated by changing the method of image registration from regular (every ten seconds) into irregular control by phase variations between the succeeding interference images. Application of a new system of registration will reduce the number of cycle-slip effects as well as the number of stored images. The second problem related to


519

pressure gradient in underground tunnels can be solved by limitating the air exchange between underground and the outside. The phenomenon of air pressure compensation in the underground plays the main role in generating the water free surface disturbances producing signals of the order of 0.5 mas (values of the mean square errors – see Sect. 36.7). For this purpose, we are going to build two partition walls separating tunnels with the instrument from the rest of the underground. Our experiences with the long water-tube tiltmeter confirm particular properties of the new instrument, such as high sensitivity, lack of instrumental drift, constant and well determined sensitivity of measuring system, constant and well known azimuth of measurements as well as effectiveness of damping the system for short-period seismic effects. Simultaneously, differential method of data treatment helps us to reduce the level of errors of instrumental origin (Section 36.6.6). The features of the long water-tube confirmed the usefulness of our instrument for investigation of wide range of long-period geodynamic phenomena such as Earth free oscillations, tidal effects, as nonperiodic loading effects of atmospheric origin as well as tectonic plates motions.

Fig. 36.14 Plumb line variations in space, assembled on the basis of measurements from the two water-tubes

520 M. Kaczorowski

References Alterman Z, Jarosch H, Pekeris CL (1959) Oscillations of the earth. Proc Roy Soc London A 252: 80 Bower DR (1973) A Sensitive water-level tiltmeter. Measurem, Interpretat, Changes of strain in the Earth. Phil Trans Roy Soc A 274: 1239, 223-226 Cartwright DE, Tayler RJ (1971) New computations of the tidal-generating potential. Geophys J Roy astron Soc 23: 45-73 Chojnicki T (1977) Sur l’analyse des observations de marees terrestres. Ann Geophys 33: 157-160 Chojnicki T (1978) Estimation of accuracy of tidal data adjustment results based on a residual spectrum. Publs Inst Geophys Pol Acad Sc F-4: 129, 3-9 Chojnicki T (1991a) Détermination des variations des amplitudes des ondes de marées. Bull Inform Marees Terr, no 109, Obs Royal de Belgique, Bruxelles, 7877-7884 Chojnicki T (1991b) Modulation of some tidal waves of horizontal constituents. Proceed of the XI Intern Symp on Earth Tides, Helsinki '89, E Schw Verlagsb Stuttgart, Germany, 249-255 Kaczorowski M (1989) Seasonal variations of the ocean indirect effects, Proc 11th Intern Symp on Earth Tides, Helsinki, 321-334 Kaczorowski M (1991) The ocean indirect effect model for European tidal stations. Publs Inst Geophys Pol Acad Sc F-17: 237, 103-124 Kaczorowski M (1999a) The long water-tube clinometer in KsiąĪ Geophysical Station. Promotion of the works. Artificial Satellites 33: 2, 77-93 Kaczorowski M (1999b) The results of preliminary tilt measurements by use of the long water-tube clinometer in KsiąĪ Geophysical Station. Artificial Satellites 33: 2, 77-93 Kaczorowski M (2004) Water tube tiltmeter in Low Silesian Geophysical Observatory results of preliminary observations. Artificial Satellites 39: 2, 147-154 Kaczorowski M (2005) Discussion on the results of analyses of yearly observations (2003) of plumb line variations from horizontal pendulums and long water-tube tiltmeters. Acta Geodyn Geomater 2: 3 (139), 1-7 Love AEH (1911) Some problems of geodynamics. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, pp. XXVIII+180 Love AEH (1927) A treatise on the mathematical theory of elasticity. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, pp XVIII+643 Moulton FR (1919) Theory of tides in pipes on a rigid earth. Astroph Journ 50: 346355 Ozawa I (1967) On the tidal observation by means of a recording water-tube tiltmeter. Journ Geod Soc Japan 12: 151-156 Pekeris C, Jarosch H (1958) The free oscillations of the earth. In: Benioff H, Ewing M, Howell BF, Press F (eds) Contributions in Geophysics, Pergamon Press, London, pp 171-192 Seismological Bulletin 2004, Publs Inst Geophys Pol Acad Sc (in print)

37 Fiber Optic Sensors for Seismic Monitoring William B. Spillman Jr.1, Dryver R. Huston2, Junru Wu1 1

Physics Department, University of Vermont, Burlington, VT, USA e-mails: [email protected]; [email protected]

2

Mechanical Engineering, University of Vermont, Burlington, VT, USA e-mail: [email protected]

37.1 Introduction Damage in civil structures due to earthquakes is a serious problem. New approaches in active damping of earthquake induced structural vibrations can mitigate this problem if sufficient warning time is given for an impending earthquake. A number of approaches have been implemented in seismic sensing technology to provide this warning. Seismic sensing is also critical in detecting and characterizing underground nuclear tests. Most approaches employ either a single point sensor or an array of such sensors. In this paper, we explore the possibility of using very long gauge length fiber optic sensing technology to create very high sensitivity seismic sensors that have the ability to focus on particular fault regions or nuclear test sites through the use of particular spatial antenna configurations.

37.2 Seismic Monitoring Detection of seismic waves has been found to be one of most effective ways for the earthquake prediction. Compared with other physical phenomena associated with earthquakes such as heat flow, static displacement, strain and electromagnetic radiation, seismic waves have the following advantages (Aki and Richards 1980): 1. The high resolution and accuracy are attainable as seismic waves have the shortest wavelength of any wave that can be observed after passing through structures inside the earth; 2. Seismic waves undergo the least distortion in waveform and the attenuation in amplitude. Generally speaking, the three types of earthquake waves (P, S and Rayleigh waves) are generated during an earthquake; P waves travel

522 W.B. Spillman Jr. et al.

fastest and are followed by S waves and Rayleigh waves. Thus, P waves are also called the primary waves. Analysis and interpretation of seismograms can help to determine the epicenter and strength of an earthquake. Since the wavelengths of all three waves are usually long, the very long gauge length fiber optical detectors have obvious advantage compared with other detectors. A schematic showing characteristic detected amplitudes from an earthquake are shown in Fig. 37.1. Also shown is a characteristic signature from an underground nuclear test such as have been carried out recently by India and Pakistan. As can be seen, a clear distinction can be made between the natural and artificial events. The conventional method of sensing seismic motions is to use an array of accelerometers that measure the accelerations at a particular point. Seismic accelerations are fairly difficult to measure because of the wide dynamic amplitude ranges that occur between earthquakes and tremors and the sub-Hertz frequencies that have to be measured and the rarity and short duration of strong earthquakes. Nonetheless, these problems have been largely overcome through the use of carefully selected accelerometer proof masses, springs, triggering mechanisms and storage media. Measuring seismic behaviour over an extended region requires using an array of synchronized accelerometers. This is a fairly expensive proposition, but has been accomplished successfully for a few strong earthquakes, such as the El Centro earthquake. An alternative point sensor array technique is to use an array of voice-coil velocimeters known as geophones. Geophone arrays are commonly used in seismic exploration for oil with detonated charges.

Fig. 37.1 Different types of seismic waves

37

Fiber Optic Sensors for Seismic Monitoring

523

37.3 Sensor/Ground Coupling The interaction of a seismic event and a civil structure, such as a building, bridge or dam, is quite complicated due to the traveling of elastic waves through non-homogeneous soil and rock media into a flexible solid structure with its own dynamic stiffness, damping and inertia. Depending on the level of complexity required, several different types of engineering models of soil-structure interaction are used. The simplest model is one where it is assumed that the dynamics of the structure do not appreciably affect the soil motions at the base of the structure. In this case, the ground motions are simply used as an input into the structure, thereby causing an inertial loading in the form of base excitation. The ground motions that occur in an earthquake can vary quite widely from location to location. The variation is attributed to the ability of the localized soil elasticity to amplify the ground motions. Site amplification is particularly bad when there is a soft soil layer over a solid rock base, such as in Mexico City. An additional complication arises if the structure is of sufficient size so that the localized site motions are appreciably different at different parts of the structure. An example would be a long suspension bridge. In this case, the different base motions must be accounted for in the analysis, by methods such as pseudostatic functions. If the stiffness and inertia of the structure appreciably affect ground motion, then a set of coupled field equations between the elasto-dynamics of the soil and structure has to be solved. With the exception of a few simple geometries, the analysis requires numerical simulation.

37.4 Fiber Optic Sensing The field of fiber optic sensing was born in the late 1970’s as an adjunct to fiber optic telecommunications (Miller and Chynoweth 1979). Optical fibers are very small cylinders of glass of arbitrary lengths that are essentially lossless transmission media for optical signals of the appropriate wavelength. In general, optical fibers have an inner glass core region in which light travels more slowly than in a surrounding glass cladding region. The glass fiber is protected from the environment by a non-glass buffer coating. A fiber optic sensor consists of an optical source, optical fiber to carry the light from the optical source to the sensing region, a transducer to couple the parameter of interest to changes in the optical signal, a fiber to take the modulated optical signal to a signal processing location where the optical signal is then converted to a digital electrical signal


and a computer which processes the digital signals to extract the information of interest. If the light is extracted from the fiber by the transducer, modulated and then re-injected into the fiber, the sensor is called an extrinsic fiber optic sensor. If, on the other hand, the light never leaves the fiber, the sensor is called an intrinsic fiber optic sensor. Fiber optic sensors possess a number of advantages including: arbitrary separation between sensing location and signal processing location (lossless transmission), immunity to electromagnetic interference, high sensitivity and large dynamic range, small size and light weight, scalability, non-metallic and electrically passive (secure signal transmission), geometric flexibility, ability to be multiplexed, ability to sense a wide spectrum of different parameters. 37.4.1 Types of fiber optic sensors The light traveling through an optical fiber has a number of characteristics that can be modulated by a transducer to encode information about the parameter of interest. These include the intensity of the light, its polarization state, its wavelength (frequency), its coherence and its speed. It is important to note, however, that in the final analysis what is always detected is the intensity of the light as a function of time. The light may be interfered with a reference signal, passed through a polarizer or reflected off a grating to disperse its different wavelength components into different directions, but in the end, one converts an optical intensity signal into a digital electrical signal that is analyzed appropriately to extract information about some parameter or parameters of interest. Since the inception of the field of fiber optic sensing, a very large number of different transducer mechanisms have been proposed and investigated, too many to list here. However, some of the more significant types of fiber optic sensors that have been demonstrated include: x Mach–Zhender interferometric sensors: these were the first practical fiber optic sensors that were developed. These sensors are now the basis of extremely sensitive hydrophone arrays deployed by the U.S. Navy and others. This type of sensor is based upon a measurement of a difference in travel times between a sensing fiber optic pathway and a reference pathway. The speed in the sensing arm is modulated by stress-

37


525

induced changes in the refractive index and length of the optical fiber. When the signal from the sensing arm is compared with a signal that has passed through the reference arm (interfered), the integrated stress along the sensing fiber can be inferred. Since the basic effect is very small, very long lengths of fiber must be used, although they are generally wrapped around small mandrels, making these sensors essentially sensors which only measure changes at a point. x Sagnac interferometers: these sensors are used to measure rotation rate in a highly accurate manner. This type of sensor is based upon the fact that if a loop of fiber is rotated, one end of the fiber moves away from the optical signal transmission direction and the other end moves towards the optical signal transmission direction. This results in a difference in transit time for signals going clockwise and anti-clockwise. When this difference in transit time is determined (by interfering the two signals), the rotation rate can be inferred. This type of sensor is currently installed and used on a number of different types of aircraft. x Photoelastic sensors: these sensors are based upon the fact that many materials, when stressed, have different speeds of light depending upon whether the direction of electric field of the light is parallel to or perpendicular to the stress direction. Glass, polycarbonate and many other materials exhibit this effect. Sensors of this type have been used as fluid level monitors in large oil containment vessels in China. x Grating based sensors: these types of sensors rely on the properties of gratings to modulate optical signals. The relative motion of two gratings can be used to modulate the intensity of an optical signal. The rotation of a diffraction grating can be used to modulate the wavelength distribution of an optical signal to encode rotary position, while a spatially chirped grating can be used to encode linear displacement. One of the more successful grating based sensors is called the fiber Bragg grating sensor. In this sensor, periodic index of refraction (speed) variations are created in an optical fiber in a very small region. When the period of the grating is one half the wavelength of light in the fiber, constructive interference occurs and a large backscattered signal results. If the grating period is changed due to some parameter of interest, the wavelength of backscattered light changes accordingly, assuming that a broadband (large number of wavelengths) was incident on the grating to begin with. These types of sensors have been used to monitor many different composite and civil structures. x Fabry–Perot sensors: this type of sensor was first developed in the late 1980’s. It is based upon the fact that an optical cavity with partially re-


flecting boundaries will transmit or reflect light in a way that is extremely well characterized and depends only on the reflectivity of the boundaries and the distance across the cavity. If the distance across the cavity is modulated, then this can be detected as either an intensity modulation (for a monochromatic signal) or a wavelength modulation (if a broadband signal is used). This kind of sensor has been utilized in a number of applications and is part of the product lines of a number of commercial enterprises.

Fig. 37.2 Point versus distributed sensor systems

37


527

37.4.2 Point versus long gauge length sensing There are numerous ways in which sensing systems can be configured. These are: single point sensor, multiple single point sensors, point sensors configured into a spatially ordered array, quasi-distributed sensors, spatially integrating distributed sensors and fully distributed sensors. To appreciate the advantages and disadvantages of some of these system types, we consider the use of a number of point sensors configured into a spatially ordered array versus a spatially integrating distributed sensor for the purposes of monitoring a spatially confined source of seismic signals. This situation is shown in Fig. 37.2. As can be seen, both systems are configured so that signals from the seismic source arrive in phase to the sensors. For the case of the point sensor array, however, each individual sensor has its own dedicated transmission path to the signal conditioning and data processing location. The summing of all the sensor signals is done electronically to provide the final output. In the case of the spatially distributed integrating sensor, however, only one transmission path is required and the summing of signals is done directly along that transmission path. This results in a significant reduction in the cost and complexity of the integrated system versus the point sensor array as can be seen. In order for this situation to be effective, however, domain knowledge must exist as to the location and distribution of the potential source of seismic waves of interest. 37.4.3 Simple displacement sensing Some of the earliest seismic monitors involved a proof mass attached to a spring, with a pen attached to the mass that wrote on a long strip of paper that continuously scrolled by. A modern version of this type of monitor could be made using optics as shown in Fig. 37.3. This type of sensor has been demonstrated for the purposes of very high sensitivity underwater acoustic detection (Spillman 1981). The technique, as shown in Fig. 37.3, involves the use of a pair of equivalent optical absorption gratings that are offset by one quarter of a grating period. One grating is free to move (attached to the spring and proof mass) while the other grating is fixed. When the moving grating moves towards alignment with the fixed grating, the optical signal transmitted through the grating pair increases. When the moving grating moves in the opposite direction, the optical signal transmitted through the grating pair decreases. Motions of the proof mass will then modulate the intensity of any optical signal transmitted through the grating pair. The dynamic range of such a system will be equal to displacements of one quarter of a grating period at the maximum end and approximately


Fig. 37.3 Conceptual optical point seismic transducer

a million times smaller than that for minimum displacement detection (assuming a relatively low power shot noise limited source and no other sources of vibration noise). In the acoustic sensor work previously noted, the grating period was of the order of 5 Pm, which gives an indication of how sensitive optical techniques can be when applied in a simple fashion to the problem of the detection of displacements due to seismic disturbances. 37.4.4 Statistical mode (STM) sensing One of the better ways to carry out spatially distributed integrating sensing is to use fiber optic technology. Numerous different types of sensors have been developed which can be configured with very long gauge lengths. We have investigated what is called a statistical mode sensor (STM) for this purpose. In this type of sensor, coherent light is injected into a multimode fiber. Since there are many propagation modes with different propagation constants, the light exiting the fiber exhibits a complex interference pattern. Perturbation of the fiber changes the distribution of optical power within the output cone but not its integrated value. Since the change in pattern is due to relative phase changes, perturbations along the fiber sum and the device output depends upon the integrated perturbation, P. The STM device essentially takes a picture of the output power distribution and

37


529

stores it. It then takes a second picture and sums the absolute values of the differences between all of the small corresponding elements of the two pictures. The first picture is then replaced by the second, a new picture is taken and the process is repeated. It has been shown (Spillman et al. 1989) that the STM output is directly proportional to the absolute value of first time derivative of the integrated perturbation, i.e.

signal = C

dP . dt

(37.1)

A schematic diagram of this kind of sensing is shown in Fig. 37.4

Fig. 37.4 Schematic diagram of STM spatially integrating fiber optic sensor

37.4.5 High order mode excitation (HOME) sensing

Another method of using fiber optics to perform spatially distributed integrating sensing involves the use of modal conversion. In HOME sensing (Herczfeld et al. 1990), light is injected into a multimode fiber so that only the higher order (high angle) modes are excited. In the absence of perturbation, light exiting the fiber forms an annulus when projected on a screen. Perturbation of the fiber converts some of the higher order modes into low order modes, i.e. optical power appears in the what was the un-illuminated center of the annulus. If a large area detector is placed so that it only intercepts the inside of the original annulus, it will produce a signal that is directly proportional to the perturbation integrated along the fiber, i.e.

signal = C P (t ) . A schematic diagram of this kind of sensing is shown in Fig. 37.5

(37.2)


Fig. 37.5 Schematic diagram of HOME spatially integrating fiber optic sensor

37.4.6 Combined large dynamic range STM/HOME sensing

Both the STM and HOME sensors have advantages and disadvantages. The STM sensor, which is basically a multi-path optical interferometer, has extremely high sensitivity up until the point when the effect of the integrated perturbation causes phase shifts greater than 2ʌ between the interfering modes. This point represents the upper limit of the dynamic range of this type of sensor. The HOME sensor, on the other hand, requires rather large physical displacements of the fiber before the mode conversion mechanism becomes significant. It is possible, however, to combine both techniques into a single sensor as shown in Fig. 37.6. In this case high order coherent modes are created in the fiber, resulting in an output annulus having a speckle pattern. If this is projected onto a digital camera and processed in the same fashion as a standard STM sensor, a high sensitivity output will result. When the perturbations become so large as to saturate the STM technique, modal conversion comes into play, with the summed intensity of the previously unilluminated pixels at the center of the annulus providing the equivalent of a HOME sensor output. This type of hybrid

Fig. 37.6 Combined STM/HOME spatially integrating fiber optic sensor

37


531

sensor possesses the advantages of both types of spatially distributed integrating sensor while providing a greatly extended dynamic range (Meissner and Spillman 2004).

37.5 Matched Filtering/Antenna Gain Very long gauge length sensors can be configured so that they serve as matched filters for spatially distributed parameter fields of interest. This has previously been demonstrated for particular mode signal enhancement in simply supported vibrating beams (Spillman and Huston 1995) and for vehicle identification (Spillman and Huston 1996). If one wishes to detect and discriminate for a given parameter field as shown in Fig. 37.7, then both the spatial configuration and sensitivity weighting of the long gauge length sensor must be optimized.

Fig. 37.7 Matched filtering

In order to see this, it will be assumed that the parameter field of interest is given by the parametric function P[xP(s)], where s ranges from 0 to L, and is zero elsewhere. It is also assumed that there is a long gauge length sensor described by the parametric function of sensitivity S[xS(s')], where s' ranges from 0 to L, but the functional dependency, xS(s'), is undetermined. The sensor output will be given by the integration of the value of the parameter field of interest times the sensitivity along the sensor length at those positions where the two functions spatially overlap, i.e. L

L

signal = ³ ds ³ ds' P ª¬ x P s º¼ S ª¬ x s s' º¼ d ª¬ x p s x s s' º¼ . 0

(37.3)

0

The sensor output is clearly maximized when xS(s') = xP(s) or xS(L – s') = xP(s), i.e. the sensor gives the maximum output when it is spatially configured to match the spatial distribution of the parameter field it is trying to detect.


Once the sensor is spatially configured to match the parameter field of interest, one must consider how to optimize the sensitivity distribution to select for P[xP(s)] as opposed to other parameter fields that might be present. If the sensor is spatially matched to the desired parameter field, then L

³ ds P > s @ S > s @ .

signal

(37.4)

0

If P and S are unrelated (uncorrelated), then they can each be replaced by their expectation values and the signal will be (L
<S>). If S is some constant value, S0, then the signal would be [LS0
]. Finally, if S is completely correlated with P (i.e. S = P), then the signal would be [L]. To compare these, consider that both P and S are normalized and uniformly distributed on the interval [0,1]. Their expectation values would then be <S> =
= 0.5. Also assume that S0 = 0.5 (i.e., its expectation value is the same as for the uncorrelated case). Then for both the uncorrelated S and the constant S cases, the signal would be [0.25 L]. For the complete correlated case, the signal would be given by L 2

signal = L P !

L³ dx x2

0.333 L .

(37.5)

0

It is then clear that by making the sensitivity distribution of the long gauge length sensor equal to the parameter distribution sought, the signal output is enhanced by 33% over what would be produced by an uncorrelated parameter distribution in the same spatial configuration. For optimum matched filtering with long gauge length integrating sensors:

Sensor spatial distribution must be matched to desired parameter spatial distribution; Sensor sensitivity distribution must be matched to desired parameter distribution. In order to better understand the matched filtering concept, we modeled a seismic signal from a distant source in two ways, as a circular wave (near field) and as a plane wave (far field). A square tone burst was used as the signal function. In the circular wave case, the wave was modeled so as to have its energy density fall off as a function of r–2 from some point source. The plane wave was assumed to have a uniform energy density. The effect of each type of wave on two different types of spatially distributed integrating sensor configurations was calculated, a circular antenna segment and a linear antenna segment, both of the same length. The effects of both

37


533

rotation and displacement of the antenna segments relative to the incident waves were considered. In Fig. 37.8, a circular wave is shown impinging upon a circular antenna segment. During rotation, the segment is rotated around a point on the midpoint of the segment cord on the x-axis. In Fig. 37.9, a plane wave is shown impinging on a straight line antenna segment. During rotation, the segment is rotated around a point on the midpoint of the segment on the x-axis. For zero rotation, both segments were assumed to intersect the x-axis at the same point. The interactions of a plane wave with a circular antenna segment and a circular wave with a straight line antenna segment were also calculated.

Fig. 37.8 Circular antenna segment in a circular wave field

Fig. 37.9 Straight line antenna segment in a circular wave field

Figure 37.10 shows the effects of rotation of a circular antenna segment centered on a circular wave signal source. Only for 0 degree rotation is the true signal recovered. For other angles, phase cancellation occurs and the signal duration expands as the antenna segment intercepts the wave for longer and longer periods of time. In Fig. 37.11, the same circular wave is intercepted by a straight line antenna. The square tone burst envelope is lost for this configuration and frequency information is only present for low angles of rotation. Similarly, when a plane wave is incident upon a straight line antenna segment (Fig. 37.12), the true signal is recovered for 0 degree rotation, but for other angles. Frequency information is lost along with an accurate measure of the tone burst envelope. When the plane wave is incident on the circular antenna segment (Fig. 37.13), frequency infor-


mation is only present for low angles of rotation and information about the actual tone burst envelope is not lost.

Fig. 37.10 Circular antenna segment response to a circular wave as a function of rotation

Fig. 37.11 Straight line antenna segment response to a circular wave as a function of rotation

37


535

Fig. 37.12 Straight line antenna segment response to a planar wave as a function of rotation

Fig. 37.13 Circular antenna segment response to a planar wave as a function of rotation


When the antenna segments are fixed at 0 degrees rotation and then relatively displaced along the x-axis, a different kind of behaviour is observed. In Fig. 37.14 with a circular wave incident upon a circular antenna segment, signal detection delay as a function of displacement is clearly seen. The true signal is only recovered when the antenna segment lies on a circle whose center is the center of the circular wave disturbance. Otherwise, the signal is largest when nearest the source (r-2 behaviour) and significant dc signal components are present. In Fig. 37.15, where the circular wave intercepts the straight line antenna segment, signal detection delay is also observed, basic signal shape remains the same with its amplitude falling off as r-2. In Fig. 37.16, only signal detection delay is observed since the plane wave has uniform energy density. The true signal is recovered in every case. For a plane wave impinging upon a circular antenna segment, the signal is distorted due to the mismatch between wave shape and antenna shape, signal detection delay is observed and signal shape and amplitude remain constant. As can be seen, only when the antenna shape precisely matches the shape of the parameter field will the actual wave function be recovered (matched filtering)

Fig. 37.14 Circular antenna segment response to a circular wave as a function of displacement

37


537

Fig. 37.15 Straight line antenna segment response to a circular wave as a function of displacement

Fig. 37.16 Straight line antenna segment response to a planar wave as a function of displacement


Fig. 37.17 Circular antenna segment response to a planar wave as a function of displacement

37.6 Physical Simulation Results Using STM An experiment was set-up to physically simulate Rayleigh seismic wave antenna interactions in a subscale fashion. A square wooden tank, 109 x 109 x 5 cm was fabricated and lined with plastic. The tank was then leveled and filled with water to a depth of 1 cm. The integrated sensing length was taped to piece of plastic on the surface of the water in either a linear or circular arc antenna configuration. Waves generated on the surface of the water in the tank perturbed the sensing length in the same way that a Rayleigh earthquake wave would perturb a much larger sensing element. Seismic wavefronts seen at a sensing location depend upon the proximity of the sensor to the event. All Rayleigh waves will consist of circular waves propagating outward from the epicenter. To lowest order, near the epicenter, Rayleigh waves will exhibit significant curvature when measurement lengths of the order of a kilometer are considered. As the distance from the epicenter increases, the amount of curvature over a kilometer length begins to approximate a plane wave. The subscale simulatation was then designed to produce and to detect both circular and linear (plane) transverse waves.

37


539

In order to detect the linear and circular waves produced in the simulation, linear and circular arc antennas were created by taping sensor lengths to the plastic on the surface of the water in the appropriate configurations. The linear length and circular arc length were made the same for the purposes of direct comparison. The antenna was a single strand of 200/240 µm multimode fiber optic cable. The fiber was excited by a multimode laser diode operating at 780 nm and the output speckle pattern was detected and processed using a CCD array (STM sensing configuration). The sensor output was digitized and analyzed using a Macintosh computer. Linear waves were produced with a long aluminum meter stick while circular waves were produced with a 10 cm high x 13 cm diameter plexiglass cylinder having a solid bottom with the exception of a 2 cm centered hole. Linear waves were generated by uniform motion of the meter stick through the water to produce a linear wave propagating normal to the axis of the linear antenna and parallel to the walls of the tank. Circular waves were produced by supporting the plexiglass cylinder at the surface of the water centered over the center of the circle incorporating the circular arc antenna. The cylinder was rapidly forced to the bottom of the tank, which resulted in the creation of the circular wave. Since there was variation in this manual generation of waves, eight sets of measurements were taken for each of the four experimental configurations to permit statistical comparisons. Typical experimental results for the simulated seismic detection with antenna gain are shown in Figs. 37.18–37.21. Figure 37.18 shows a typical output for a circular wave interacting with a circular antenna segment while Fig. 37.19 shows the result of a circular wave interacting with a straight line antenna segment. In Fig. 37.20, the signal resulting from a plane wave incident on a straight line antenna segment is shown. One can see the original signal detection, the detection of the wave reflected from the near tank wall and on the far right side of the plot the second wave reflection (from the far wall). Finally, Fig. 37.21 shows the signal resulting from the interaction of a plane wave with the circular antenna segment. Since the distances of the walls from the antenna were known, this allowed calculation of the wave speed of 33 cm/s. Calculations were done on the 8 runs for each experiment type to determine the mean value of the maximum of the sensor output in each case and the standard deviation. In terms of mean value of maximum ±1V, the calculations yielded: 3316.6±268.4 for linear wave/linear antenna, 2117.9±277.5 for linear wave/circular antenna, 883.7±214.3 for circular wave/linear antenna, and 2055.9±188.5 for circular wave, circular antenna. The ratio of average maxima for linear wave/linear antenna to linear wave/circular an-


tenna was 1.57 and the ratio of maxima for circular wave/circular antenna to circular wave/linear antenna was 2.47.

Fig. 37.18 Typical response from circular wave/circular antenna segment interaction

Fig. 37.19 Typical response from circular wave/straight line antenna segment interaction

37


541

Fig. 37.20 Typical response from planar wave/straight line antenna segment interaction

Fig. 37.21 Typical response from planar wave/circular antenna segment interaction


37.7 Discussion and Summary Both the model results and the subscale experimental simulation results demonstrate the potential for the creation of very long gauge length seismic sensors based using antenna gain. The tone burst model predicted that when an antenna segment intercepted a wave to which it was matched, a signal increase of more than a factor of 2 could be expected over detection of equivalent power waves to which it was not matched. The average enhancement factor from the experiments for the linear antenna segment was 1.57, while for the circular antenna segment it was 2.47. The variance between the model and experimental subscale simulation results could be due to several factors. The assumption in the model based on summing the z direction displacements due to the presence of the wave of all of the antenna segments from their equilibrium points might not be correct. Weighting of different portions of the antenna might be non-uniform, i.e. bending at the antenna ends might contribute more to the output than common displacements (between adjacent segments) toward the middle of the antenna. Another contributing factor could be edge effects in linear wave propagation, creating curvature in the wave, thereby reducing the physical difference between it and a pure circular wave. Nonetheless, antenna gain has clearly been shown. There are numerous ways in which very long gauge length sensing can be carried out, both electrical (TDR) and optical (OTDR, interferometry, polarimetric sensing). Optical techniques are attractive because the gauge lengths that can be used can be arbitrarily long for all practical purposes due to the very low loss nature of optical fiber transmission. The same is not true of electrical techniques in which gauge lengths greater than a few hundred meters are probably not achievable. We shall therefore limit our consideration to fiber optic techniques for fieldable fiber optic seismic sensing systems. Early in the development of fiber optic sensors, it was assumed that the amount of fiber that could be used as sensing element only depended upon the loss characteristics of the fibers used. Predictions were made that fiber optic magnetic field sensors would soon surpass the performance of SQUID devices. In fact the fiber optic device performance never came within more than a few orders of magnitude of the SQUID devices. The reason for this was shown to be statistical fluctuations in the index of refraction of the fiber optic sensing element which increased as the length of the sensing element increased, eventually becoming the dominant noise source (Glenn 1989). When that occurred, increased signal due to increased length was exactly compensated for by increased noise level in the

37


543

same proportion, resulting in a static signal to noise ratio. This effect was minimized in Mach–Zehnder hydrophones due to the fact that the very long gauge length of fiber was confined to a relatively small uniform temperature volume around a mandrel. For seismic sensing, in which the long gauge length will be spatially distributed, the noise due to thermal fluctuations, even within the Earth, will be much more of a problem. In order to optimize sensor design, thermal fluctuation caused changes in the optical path length will have to be considered. Although there are numerous different possible spatially distributed integrating fiber optic seismic sensing techniques, the combined STM/HOME technique offers particular advantages. It exhibits high interferometric sensitivity that could allow the detection of relatively low energy precursor signals while at the same time being able to detect and characterize the large amplitude signals present in the waves from the seismic event itself. In addition, the sensitivity of a combined STM/HOME sensor can be enhanced in two ways. First, the gauge length can be increased up to the point at which thermal noise fluctuations come into play. Secondly, the sensitivity can be increased by optimizing the ground/sensor coupling, i.e. burying the buffer clad sensing fiber in soil whose particle size is selected to optimize that coupling (the particles would have diameters that matched one of the microbending loss periods in the fiber). These types of sensitivity enhancements are shown schematically in Fig. 37.22. In addition to these types of advantages, the combined STM/HOME sensor has the potential to be wireless (Spillman et al. 2004) and very cost effective.

Fig. 37.22 Implementation options for spatially distributed integrating fiber optic seismic sensing


The scaling up of systems from the laboratory to the field will require attention to both issues of scale and practical issues of field deployment. The issues of scale depend largely on those related to sensing the large motions over large distances. A typical measurement may be to detect a 1 Hz seismic signal in a medium with a wave speed of 3.5 km/s (typical for S waves), with a 1 g acceleration. The sensor must then be sensitive to a relative motion on the order of a 0.2 to 0.5 m over a 3.5 km distance. Field installation requires the deployment of a ruggedized, possibly specialized non-communication style, fiber optic cable over an extended range. Using existing communication, utility or transportation structures as a backbone may reduce the cost of the system. Depending on the particular requirements, it may be very useful to design antenna arrays that are particularly sensitive to certain types of waves. The distinction of S and P waves is an important consideration in detecting underground nuclear blasts. The large scale coherence of S waves has implications in structural safety in earthquakes. The measurement of Rayleigh waves can be useful in identifying mechanical properties of surface materials. The P, S and surface waves are all manifested differently on the surface of the Earth. P waves appear as a compressive and extensional motion where relative surface points move closer together and then farther away. S waves appear as a shearing motion where relative points on the surface move sideways and vertically relative to one another. If the antenna array can be configured to be sensitive to either compressive or shear motions, then it can be selectively sensitive to either S or P waves.

References Aki K, Richards PG (1980) Quantitative seismology: theory and methods. WH Freeman and Company, New York Glenn WH (1989) Noise in interferometric optical systems - An optical Nyquist theorem. IEEE J Quantum Elect 25: 1218-1224 Herczfeld PR, Elsherif MA, Kawase LR, Ko FK, Bobb L (1990) An embedded fiber optic sensor utilizing the modal power distribution technique. J Opt Lett 15: 21, 1242-1244 Meissner KE, Spillman Jr WB (2004) Dual-mode optical fiber vibration sensor. Proc Intern Symp on Photonics in Measurement, Frankfurt Miller SE and Chynoweth AG (1979) Optical fiber telecommunications. Academic Press, New York Spillman Jr WB (1981) Multimode fiber optic hydrophone based on a Schlieren technique. Applied Optics 20: 3, 465-467 Spillman Jr WB, Huston DR (1995) Scaling and antenna gain in integrating fiber optic sensors, J Lightwave Technol 13: 7, 1222-1230

37


545

Spillman, Jr WB, Huston DR (1996) Pattern detection through the use of long gauge length spatially weighted fiber optic sensors. Proc. Society of Photooptical Instrumentation Engineers 2838, 178-187 Spillman Jr WB, Kline BR, Maurice LB, Fuhr PL (1989) Statistical mode sensor for fiber optic vibration sensing applications. Applied Optics 28: 15, 31663176 Spillman Jr WB, Mayer M, Bennett J, Gong J, Meissner KE, Davis B, Claus RO, Muelenaer Jr AA, Xu X (2004) A ‘smart’ bed for non-intrusive monitoring of patient physiological factors". J Meas Sci Technol 15: 8, 1614-1620

PART VI ROTATIONS AND ENGINEERING SEISMOLOGY

38 Deriving Seismic Surface Rotations for Engineering Purposes Zbigniew Zembaty Faculty of Civil Engineering, Technical University of Opole ul. Mikoáajczyka 5, 45 233 Opole, Poland; e-mail: [email protected]

38.1 Introduction and Formulation of the Problem In conventional earthquake engineering, seismic loads on structures are formulated only in terms of the three translational components of ground motion. Of these three, the two horizontal actions are usually decisive in structural design because civil engineering structures are much stiffer in the vertical direction than in the horizontal ones. In addition, with only a few exceptions (e.g. the 1995 Northridge earthquake) the vertical component is generally less intensive than any of the two horizontal ones. Nevertheless, each site on the surface of the ground can be subjected to six motions: three translations along x, y and z axes as well as three rotations about these axes. The rotation about vertical axis z will be called here torsion while the rotations about two horizontal axes will be called rockings. In the mid seventies of the past century, Penzien and Watabe (1975) have introduced a system of the so-called principal axes on the surface of the ground (Fig. 38.1) in which horizontal axis x is directed towards epicenter, the second horizontal axis, perpendicular to x, is denoted by y, and z represents vertical axis. Penzien and Watabe have shown that the three components of ground motions, u(t), v(t) and w(t), along the respective x, y and z axes may be regarded as uncorrelated. Furthermore, when analyzing spatial seismic effects at two points, A and B, on the ground surface, the respective coherence matrix transforms as a tensor with changes of the coordinate system (e.g. Zembaty 1997). This convenient system of coordinates shown in Fig. 38.1 will be applied throughout this paper. Only two rotational components, i.e., rocking about the y axis, \, and torsion about the z axis, ĳ, are usually analyzed, as there is a rationale for their existence when considering the respective wave decomposition at the ground surface.

550 Z. Zembaty

Fig. 38.1 Principal axes and two rotations on the ground surface (after Zembaty et al. 1993)

The most natural way to obtain these rotations would be to differentiate the spatial field of strong motion with respect to spatial coordinates. For these purposes, basic formulae of the continuum mechanics can be applied. For example, torsion (about the z axis) is given by the following formula:

M

1 § wv wu · ¨ ¸. 2 ¨© wx wy ¸¹

(38.1)

Since the tangential strains can be assumed zero at the free surface, the surface rocking motion (about the y-axis) can be obtained as simple differentiation of vertical field of motion w(x, y, t) (see e.g. Oliveira and Bolt 1989): \

ww( x, y, t ) . wx

(38.2)

Consider a stiff, massive structure founded on compliant soil, under horizontal excitations (Fig. 38.2). The interaction of structural vibrations with the soil motion (soil-structure interaction) leads to structural rotations even from horizontal excitations only and can particularly be important for structures with small, massive foundations, for which the lowest (fundamental) natural frequency is just the rocking one. The rotation, although important in seismic response analyses, should however be distinguished from the actual rotational excitations analyzed here. This type of rotation during earthquakes was observed very early (e.g. Imamura 1937), but its analysis does not require considering wave propagation. It takes place during kinematic excitations of any structure with substantial moment of inertia resting on compliant soil. This effect is also observed during shaking table tests and is treated as an unwanted, spurious motion to be eliminated by the control software of the shaking table (see e.g. Juhasova et al. 2000, 2002). For in-depth analyses of these effects, one may read the vast literature on soil structure interaction (e.g. a book by Wolf 1985). This situation

38 Deriving Seismic Surface Rotations for Engineering Purposes

551

shows also an evident difficulty in observing rotations or carrying out their eventual measurements.

Fig. 38.2 Rocking of a massive structure on compliant soil as excited only by horizontal ground motion U(t)

The engineering importance of rotational components of seismic strong ground motion was noted during late sixties and early seventies of the 20th century (Newmark and Hall 1969, Newmark and Rosenblueth 1971). In their book Newmark and Rosenblueth (1971) also quote eyewitness accounts even for gravitational waves observed as slowly moving, visible waves on the surface of the ground. Such waves might easily generate rocking motion. Later an interesting contribution in this field was a simulation study of rotational effects in layered media and near-field excitations by Bouchon and Aki (1982). At a distance of a few kilometers from the fault, they estimated torsional displacements at about 3×10-4 rad, torsional velocity at about 1.5×10-4 rad/s and rocking displacements at about 7-8×10-4 rad. Finally, two different approaches emerged in the literature: x Theoretical reasoning based on wave passage effects (Trifunac 1982, Lee and Trifunac 1985, 1987, Rutenberg and Heidebrecht 1985, Castellani and Boffi 1989, Zembaty et al. 1993, Castellani and Zembaty 1996). x Experimental analyses utilizing the measurements from synchronized dense arrays of accelerometers like SMART 1 in Taiwan, leading first to stochastic models of spatial ground motion (e.g. Tamura and Aizawa 1992, Loh 1985) and then to estimations of rotational ground motion (Oliveira and Bolt 1989, Castellani and Zembaty 1994, 1996). This paper presents an approach to modelling the rotational effects in terms of stationary stochastic processes and random fields. More general

552 Z. Zembaty

non-stationary approach is given by Zembaty et al. (1993). The importance of applying these effects to some types of structures will also be briefly shown (Zembaty and Boffi 1994). Due to space limitations only the rocking component will be analyzed. For detailed analyses of the torsional component as excited by the incident SH wave propagation the reader may refer to the paper by Lee and Trifunac (1985), whereas an experimental account for the torsional surface effects may be found in Oliveira and Bolt (1989).

38.2 Spectral Decomposition of Translational Components of Seismic Ground Motion Before proceeding with further analyses of surface rotations, the spectral decomposition of random processes representing translational accelerations of ground motion is introduced. Consider the stationary (steady) ground vibrations in the form of accelerations along the principal axes of (t ) (Fig. 38.1). The classic specseismic ground motion u(t ) , v(t ) and w tral representations of the above three components of seismic motion, treated as stationary stochastic processes take the following form: f

u(t )

³

e iZ t duˆ(Z ) , v(t )

f

f

³

ˆ (t ) e iZ t dv(Z ) , w

f

f

³e

iZ t

ˆ(Z ) dw

(38.3)

f

in which dashed symbols are random processes in the frequency domain with orthogonal increments. This means that e.g. for u(t ) we have: duˆ(Z1 ) duˆ(Z2 )

2 ˆ ° du(Z ) ® °¯

S u (Z )dZ

for Z1 Z2

Z

0

for Z1 z Z 2

,

(38.4)

where the symbol < > denotes mathematical expectation, an asterisk denotes complex conjugate, S u (Z ) represents power spectral density of the acceleration process u(t ) and Ȧ is the angular frequency (in rad/s). (t ) , formula (38.4) takes the For two different processes, e.g. u(t ) and w form: ˆ* (Z 2 ) duˆ(Z1 )dw

° duˆ(Z )dw ˆ* (Z ) ® °¯

S uw (Z )dZ for Z1 Z2 0

for Z1 z Z 2

Z

(38.5)


553

in which S uw (Z ) is the co-spectral density. If the Penzien and Watabe (1975) assumption of the lack of correlation of motions among the principal axes holds, then the co-spectra S uv (Z ) , S uw (Z ) , S wv (Z ) vanish.

38.3 Rocking from Body Waves Decomposition Consider now body waves in the vertical plane containing the focus (Fig. 38.3). The in plane motions are given by two harmonic components

e iZW duˆ(Z ),

ˆ(Z ) e iZW dw

(38.6)

in the frequency band interval (Ȧ, Ȧ+dȦ). The motion corresponding to this band interval can be written as the sum of P and SV wave contributions: du duP duS , dw P dw S . dw

(38.7)

Fig. 38.3 Body waves incident on the ground surface (after Zembaty et al. 1993)

one obtains Substituting the spectral representations (38.3) for u and w ˆ (Z ) U e iZW dĭ ˆ (Z ), e iZW duˆ(Z ) U P e iZW dĭ P S S ˆ (Z ) W e iZW dĭ ˆ (Z ), ˆ(Z ) WP e iZW dĭ e iZW dw P S S

(38.8)

ˆ (Z ) , ĭ ˆ (Z ) are the random functions with orthogonal increwhere ĭ P S ments (Eqs. 38.4 and 38.5), and UP, US, WP, WS are the coefficients given by the following formulae (Fig. 38.3):

554 Z. Zembaty

UP Wp

(1 PP ) sin Ĭ PS cos ĬPS , ( PP 1) cos Ĭ Ps sin ĬPS ,

US WS

(1 S S ) cos Ĭ S P sin ĬSP , (1 S S ) sin Ĭ S P cos ĬSP .

(38.9)

PP, PS, SP, SS are the coefficients of body wave reflections at the free surface. They can be found in monographs on wave propagation (e.g. Achenbach 1973 or Aki and Richards 1980) 2

PP

· § 1 cos Ĭ cos ĬPS ¨¨ 2 2 p 2 ¸¸ 4 p 2 cP cS ¹ © cS 2 · § 1 cos Ĭ cos ĬPS ¨ 2 2 p2 ¸ 4 p2 ¸ ¨c cP cS ¹ © S 4

PS

2

§ 1 2· 2 cos Ĭ cos ĬPS ¨ 2 2p ¸ 4p cP cS © cS ¹

4 SP

cS cos Ĭ § 1 2· p ¨ 2 2p ¸ cS cP © cS ¹

· c P cos Ĭ § 1 ¨ 2 2 p2 ¸ p ¸ ¨ cP cS © cS ¹ 2

§ 1 · cos ĬSP cos Ĭ ¨ 2 2 p2 ¸ 4 p2 ¨c ¸ cP cS © S ¹

(38.10a)

(38.10b)

(38.10c)

2

SS

§ 1 · cos ĬSP cos Ĭ ¨ 2 2 p2 ¸ 4 p2 ¨c ¸ cP cS © S ¹ . 2 § 1 2· 2 cos ĬSP cos Ĭ ¨ 2 2p ¸ 4p ¨c ¸ cP cS © S ¹

(38.10d)

The angle of incidence Ĭ has been assumed here for simplicity to be the same for P and SV waves, and it holds only for homogeneous half space. Eventual generalization for layered media is straightforward (see e.g. papers by Haskell from fifties and sixties of the past century). The angles ĬPS and ĬSP are the angles of the reflected S and P waves, respectively:


sin Ĭ / sin ĬPS sin Ĭ / sin ĬSP

c P / cS

S,

cS / c P ,

555

(38.11) (38.12)

and p = sinĬ/cP stands for the horizontal slowness of incident P waves for Eqs. (38.10a,b), while for Eqs. (38.10c,d) p = sinĬ/cS represents the horizontal slowness of incident SV waves, whereas cP and cS are the propagation velocities of P and S waves, respectively. The coefficients UP, US represent the horizontal component of motion driven by P and SV waves, respectively, and WP, WS correspond to vertical motion. Solving the system of equations (38.8) for the P and SV waves contributions one obtains the inverse of Eqs. (38.8): WS iZ t ˆ U ˆ ˆ (Z ) , eiZ t d)P (Z ) e du(Z ) S eiZ t dw D D U P iZ t ˆ WP iZ t ˆ ˆ iZ t (Z ) e d)S (Z ) e dw e du(Z ) , D D

(38.13)

where D = UPWS WPUS. Hence, the incremental vertical motion can be presented as the sum of two wave terms propagating in the x direction with different velocities ª § x sin Ĭ ·º ˆ (t , Z , x) WP exp «iZ ¨ t ¸» dĭP (Z ) dw ¨ c P ¸¹¼» ¬« © ª § x sin Ĭ ·º ˆ ¸» dĭS (Z ) . WS exp «iZ ¨¨ t cS ¸¹»¼ «¬ ©

(38.14)

The incremental rocking acceleration becomes: d\(t , Z , x)

w (t , Z , x) x 0 , dw wx

ª § x sin Ĭ ·º ˆ § sin Ĭ · (Z ) ¸¸ exp «iZ ¨¨ t ¸¸» dĭ d\(t , Z , x) WP ¨¨ iZ P c c «¬ © P P ¹ © ¹¼» ª § x sin Ĭ ·º ˆ § sin Ĭ · (Z ) . ¸¸ exp «iZ ¨¨ t ¸» dĭ WS ¨¨ iZ S cS ¸¹»¼ cS ¹ «¬ © © Substituting x = 0 and taking into account Eq. (38.13) one obtains

(38.15)

(38.16)

556 Z. Zembaty

§ sin Ĭ · iZ t WS ˆ ¸e d\(t , Z ) WP ¨¨ iZ du (Z ) c P ¸¹ D © § sin Ĭ · iZ t U S ˆ ¸e WP ¨¨ iZ dw(Z ) c P ¸¹ D © § sin Ĭ · iZ t U P ˆ WS ¨ iZ dw(Z ) ¸e cS ¹ D © § sin Ĭ · iZ t WP ˆ ¸e WS ¨¨ iZ du (Z ) . cS ¸¹ D ©

(38.17)

Introducing new coefficients

WPWS D U PWS D

Wx Wz

sin Ĭ WPWS cP D sin Ĭ WPU S cS D

sin Ĭ , cS sin Ĭ , cP

(38.18)

results in ˆ(Z ) . d\(t , Z ) W x (iZ ) e iZ t duˆ(Z ) Wz (iZ ) e iZ t dw

(38.19)

Finally, after integrating in the whole frequency domain one obtains the spectral decomposition of the rocking component f

\(t )

³

f

ˆ(Z ) , W x (iZ ) e iZ t duˆ(Z ) W z (iZ ) e iZ t dw

³

f

(38.20)

f

which can easily be applied to obtain any stochastic characteristic of ȥ, e.g. correlation function, power spectral density etc. For example, the mean square rocking acceleration is given by f

V \2

³

f

f

2

Wx Z 2 S u (Z )dZ 2 ³ WxWz*Z 2 Suw (Z ) dZ f

f

(38.21) 2

2

³ Wz Z S w (Z ) dZ . f

The integrand in the above equation is the power spectral density of the rocking component: S\ (Z )

2

2

Wx Z 2 S u (Z ) 2WxWz S uw (Z ) Wz Z 2 S w (Z ) .

(38.22)


557

It can be seen from the derived formulae that the rotational spectrum is a function of the first time derivatives of the vertical and horizontal accelerations (the Ȧ2 multiplier), i.e., the function of the third derivative of respective displacements as Su (Z ) Z 6 S u (Z ) . It should also be noted that if one follows the Penzien and Watabe (1975) assumption, the second term of Eq. (38.22) vanishes, as there is no correlation between vertical and horizontal components. In this case, Eq. (38.22) can further be simplified when assuming the same spectral density for both horizontal and vertical ground motions differing only by intensity factor Ș, i.e., S w (Z ) K 2 S u (Z ) .

(38.23)

This leads to S\ (Z )

W

2

x

K Wz

2

Z S (Z ) . 2

u

(38.24)

The value of Ș can be estimated from the statistical analysis of earthquake records. For example, following Trifunac and Brady (1975) it can be taken as approximately 0.5. On the other hand, in the near field the vertical component can be as intensive as the horizontal one (e.g. the 1995 Northridge earthquake). In any case the contribution to the total rocking of vertical vs. horizontal components is controlled by the values of the coefficients Wx and Wz . In Fig. 38.4a and b the moduli of these two coefficients are presented as functions of the incidence angle Ĭ of body waves (both P and SV). The plots include three sets of data given in detail in Table 38.1 Table 38.1 Data to numerical calculations (according to Zembaty et al. 1993) cS [m/s] S = cP/cS Poisson modulus, Ȟ Ĭcr [deg]

cp = 6800 m/s 3000 2.27 0.38 26.14

cp = 5200 m/s 3000 1.73 0.25 35.26

cp = 4500 m/s 3000 1.50 0.10 41.81

For Ĭ < Ĭcr coefficient Wx is real and negative while Wz is also real but positive, although in any case the signs are lost when formulating the spectral density. It can be seen from Fig. 38.4a, b that Wx and Wz increase for an overcritical angle with considerable variation with respect to the values of Poisson’s ratio Ȟ for Wx and with little variation for Wz . In Fig. 38.4c the coefficient of formula (38.24), i.e., | Wx |2 K | Wz |2 is shown for three values of Ȟ vs. incidence angle Ĭ. To investigate the contribution of possible cross-correlation of horizontal and vertical components one may as-

558 Z. Zembaty

sume (although it is unlikely) an extreme case of full (100%) correlation. In this case, formula (38.22) takes the following form: S\ (Z ) (| Wx |2 2KWxWz K 2 | Wz |2 ) Z 2 S w (Z ) .

(38.25)

The multiplier of the last equation, i.e., | Wx |2 2KWxWz K 2 | Wz |2 is plotted in Fig. 38.4d. It can be seen that Poisson’s ratio influences the rocking response substantially.

Fig. 38.4 Modulus of Wx (a) and Wz (b) and the coefficients of rocking spectral densities with zero translational correlation (c) and with full correlation (d). All data shown for three values of Poisson coefficient Ȟ: curve (1) for 0.38, curve (2) for 0.25 and curve (3) for 0.10 (according to Zembaty et al. 1993)

Particularly, the difference for Ȟ = 0.38 and Ȟ = 0.25 is substantial. It can also be seen that cross-correlation between vertical and horizontal components may increase the rocking ground motion by about 30%. All plots in


559

Fig. 38.4 show dramatic increase in the rocking component for greater incidence angles. On the other hand, it should be noted that when the layered media are analyzed the refracted P and SV waves at the surface would appear at smaller angles. However, the wave energy carried by surface waves would continue to be associated with large incidence angles.

38.4 Rocking from Surface Waves A quantitative estimation of the contribution of surface waves to the total ground motion is not an easy task. Identification of the wave types for the strong events at a particular site becomes possible via dispersion analysis, when large scale measurements of ground motion are carried out as in the spatial measurements of the SMART-1 network in Lotung, Taiwan. A rough and simple idea has been proposed by Sugito et al. (1984). Analyzing some Japanese strong motion records they proposed to separate surface waves from the total ground motion by using the criterion of first arrival time tS and band limit ȦS. Following their approach, the motion due to surface waves should be subtracted from the total motion and treated separately (Fig. 38.5).

Fig. 38.5 Body and surface waves separation (from Zembaty et al. 1993)

When considering the rocking component we restrict our example to Rayleigh waves. In analogy to the earlier treatment, the acceleration due to surface waves in the frequency range (Ȧ, Ȧ+dȦ) can be taken as a result of a wave propagating in the horizontal direction with the velocity of Rayleigh waves cR as follows:

R dw

ª § x exp «iZ ¨¨ t «¬ © c R

·º ˆ (Z ) . ¸¸» dw ¹»¼

(38.26)

560 Z. Zembaty

From the above equation the incremental surface rocking can be written as d\R

w R (t , Z , x) x dw wx

0

§ iZ · iZt ˆ (Z ) . ¨¨ ¸¸e dw © cR ¹

(38.27)

Since the first arrival time of Rayleigh waves is tS , in the stationary analysis one should consider the validity of this approach only in the respective time windows. Taking into account the above criterion of wave separation leads to d\R

§ iZ · iZt ˆ (Z ) for Z S Z Z S and t ! t S , ¨¨ ¸¸e dw © cR ¹ ZS

\R

³W Z

R ( i

ˆ(Z ) for t ! t S , Z ) e iZt dw

(38.28)

(38.29)

S

where WR = 1/cR. From this equation and Eqs. (38.4) and (38.5) one may write the equation for spectral density of the rocking acceleration contributed by the surface waves S\ (t , Z ) WR2Z 2 S w (t , Z ) for Z S Z Z S and t ! t S .

(38.30)

This formula shows only roughly the dependence between vertical and rotational spectral density on Rayleigh waves propagation. The analysis of joint effects of body and surface waves should be done in both time and frequency domain. Such a general approach, including the non-stationary, evolutionary description of stochastic processes is presented in detail by Zembaty et al. (1993).

38.5 Rocking from Spatial Field of Ground Motion To derive the rocking component on a surface point it suffices to consider a random field with respect to time and only one spatial coordinate x (directed towards the epicenter – as in Fig. 38.1). Assuming for simplicity the stationarity with respect to time and spatial coordinates, the vertical acceleration of this point can be presented in the form of spectral representation (38.3) with an additional spatial variable x: f

(t , x) w

³e

f

iZ t

ˆ(Z , x) , dw

(38.31)


561

ˆ (Z , x) is a random function with orthogonal increments defined where w both in time and spatial domain as follows: ° SWAWB (Z , x A xB ) ° ° ° ®SW (Z ) ° ° ° °¯ 0

ˆ(Z1 , x A ) w ˆ (Z 2 , xB ) w

Z Z 2 Z for ® 1 ¯ x A z xB °Z Z 2 Z for ® 1 °¯ x A xB for

(38.32)

Z1 z Z 2

where SWA WB (Z , x) is a complex co-spectrum, SW (Z ) is the respective point spectrum (for xA = xB) which does not depend on the position along the x axis. Following Eqs. (38.31) and (38.32) one may derive a formula for the correlation function of the vertical random field:

K w (t , t c, x A , xB )

(t , x A ) w * (t c, x B ) w f

³

f

ˆ(Z , x A ) e Z2t c dw ˆ* (Z , x B ) e iZ1t dw

³

f

f

(38.33)

f

³e

iZ ( t t c )

SWA WB (Z , x A x B )dZ .

f

Introducing new variables Ĳ = t tc and xAB = xA xB one obtains f

K w (W , x AB )

(Z , x AB )e iZW dZ .

³S

WA WB

(38.34)

f

For Ĳ = 0 one has the following space correlation function f

K w ( x AB )

³S

WA WB

(Z , x AB )dZ ,

(38.35)

f

while for both Ĳ = 0 and xAB = 0 the mean square value is given by f

V w2

³S

Z ) dZ .

( W

(38.36)

f

From the time-space stationarity it follows that the point spectra are the same at points A and B, i.e., SWA (Z ) SWB (Z ) SW (Z , x AB 0) . Introducing then the coherence function

562 Z. Zembaty

J w (Z , x AB )

SWAWB (Z , x AB )

SW (Z , x AB )

SWA (Z ) SWB (Z )

SW (Z )

(38.37)

one obtains f

K w ( x AB )

³J

w

(Z, x AB ) SW (Z ) dZ ,

(38.38)

f

where SW (Z , x AB ) denotes complex co-spectrum, while SW (Z ) stands for real valued point spectrum. Separating modulus and phase of the coherence function gives

J w (Z , x AB ) e iI (Z , x AB ) .

J w (Z , x AB )

(38.39)

Now, using the notation introduced above one may consider the rocking acceleration component as the respective spatial derivative ( x, y ) (Eq. 38.2). Substituting Eq. (38.39) into (38.33) and then \ w / wx w Ĳ = t tc as well as xAB = xA xB, after some algebra one obtains for Ĳ = 0: K\ ( x AB )

w2 K w (W 2 wx AB

f

0, x AB )

³

f

w2 SW (Z , x AB ) dZ . 2 wx AB

(38.40)

For xAB = 0 the integrand in this formula can be interpreted as a spectral density function of the rocking acceleration: S\ (Z )

w2 SW (Z , x AB 2 wx AB

0) S w (Z )

w2 J w (Z , x AB 2 wx AB

0) .

(38.41)

It is interesting to note that SW (Z , x AB ) , although generally complex, is real for xAB = 0 as we require for SW (Z ) . It can be seen from Eq. (38.41) that for rocking spectrum one needs a spatial spectrum of the vertical surface motion. Such spectra are available from SMART-1 array measurements (e.g. Abrahamson et al. 1987). Unfortunately, most of the researchers indicate substantial reduction of accuracy of experiments at short distances. Thus, direct differentiation at xAB = 0 should be avoided. Instead, the finite difference method seems more reasonable in this case. Applying, e.g. the second central finite difference one obtains: S\ (Z ) |

'2 S (Z , x 0) 'x 2 W


1 >S (Z, 'x) 2SW (Z ,0) SW (Z , 'x)@ . 'x 2 W

563

(38.42)

Taking into account that SW (Z , x) is a Hermitian complex function in both frequency and space domains one can write that SW (Z , 'x) SW (Z , 'x) and consequently S\ (Z ) |

1 >2 Re SW (Z, 'x) 2SW (Z ,0)@ . ('x) 2

(38.43)

Substituting SW (Z , x) J W (Z , x) SW (Z ) , one finally obtains the following approximation for the spectral density of rocking component: S\ (Z ) |

2SW (Z ) ( 'x) 2

>1 Re J w (Z , 'x)@ .

(38.44)

The information required to calculate rocking spectral density from the spatial random field of seismic motion is the actual acceleration spectral density function of vertical accelerations as well as respective spatial coherency function. The simplifications made in deriving Eq. (38.44) are as follows: a) the stationarity with respect to time, b) the stationarity with respect to space distance, c) the arbitrariness of the assumption of finite difference parameter ¨x. The first simplification seems very crude but in fact one may say that the proportion between vertical and rocking motion may be the same whether the stationarity assumption is relaxed or not. The second and third simplifications are more serious. Particularly the third assumption seems arbitrary, but the distance parameter should be treated as a space scale parameter assumed equal to the shortest structural foundation dimension which would yield greater rotation effect.

38.6 Code Proposals and Approximate Formulae In the modern civil engineering seismic codes, the calculation of seismic forces is usually based on the response spectrum which is a plot of maximum quantity of interest vs. natural period of a single degree of freedom (SDOF) system. In a draft version of Eurocode 8 part II (bridges) two formulae were proposed for rotational response spectra:

564 Z. Zembaty

for the rocking response spectrum R\

r\ R (T ) ,

r\

1 .7 ʌ , cS T

(38.45)

rM

2.0 ʌ , cS T

(38.46)

for the torsional response spectrum RM

rM R (T ) ,

where cS is the shear wave velocity, T is the natural period of an oscillator, R(T) is the pseudo-acceleration response spectrum defined for translations. As can be seen, the main parameter influencing the rotational excitations is the shear wave velocity. Unfortunately, as is usually the case for engineering codes, no explanation is given regarding the scientific justification of these formulae. On the other hand, one may propose another approximate formula for rocking component based on the derived formula (38.44). Assuming that the ratio of rotational to vertical motion remains approximately the same for the root mean square response as for respective response spectra (Castellani and Zembaty 1996) one obtains the following approximate formula in the form of a rotational coefficient: r\

1.4 1 Re J W (Z , 'x) , 'x

(38.47)

which depends directly on the foundation separation distance ǻx (as in Eq. 38.44). Formula (38.47) may be used as a multiplier for vertical response spectra, but its validity should still be verified, possibly with recorded rotations.

38.7 Application Example: A Slender Tower Under Horizontal-Rocking Excitations Consider now the seismic response of a slender tower, a tall industrial chimney or TV-tower. Following standard structural dynamic methods (e.g. Clough and Penzien 1993) the discrete equation of motion of this structure under seismic horizontal u(t ) and rocking \(t ) excitations (Fig. 38.6) takes the following form: Cx Kx Bx

(t ) Bh\(t ) Blu

p eff (t ) ,

(38.48)


565

where upper and lower case bold letters denote matrices and vectors respectively, x is the vector of relative response of the structure, 1 is a unit vector, h is the vector containing heights above ground of discretized masses, B, C, K are the matrices of inertia, damping and stiffness, respectively.

x x(t )

ª x1 (t ) º « x (t ) » « 2 », « " » « » ¬ " ¼

l

ª1º «1» « », «"» « » ¬"¼

h

ª h1 º «h » « 2» . «"» « » ¬"¼

(38.49)

The solution of Eq. (38.48) was obtained by generalized response spectrum method. Details are given in the paper by Zembaty and Boffi (1994). To assess the contribution of the rocking component in the overall structural response, a 160 m reinforced concrete industrial chimney has been chosen. The data of the chimney were taken from the book by Ciesielski et al. (1968). The chimney has the external radius of 4 m at the top and 5.92 m at the bottom. The foundation has a radius of 10 m. Some realistic data on soil compliance are in turn taken from Eurocode 8 (soil profile C): cS is 200 m/s, density of soil is 1800 kg/m3, Poisson’s ratio Ȟ is 0.25.

Fig. 38.6 A discrete dynamic model of a slender tower on compliant soil (Zembaty and Boffi 1994)

566 Z. Zembaty

Discrete dynamic model of the structure is presented in Fig. 38.6 in which mi denotes discrete mass at height hi, kȥ and kh denote rocking and horizontal soil stiffness, EJ stands for bending stiffness of the chimney and u(t) and ȥ(t) represent horizontal and rocking excitation components, respectively. Five percent structural damping ratio has been applied. The most critical response parameter describing the seismic response of a slender tower it is the bending moment appearing in the respective horizontal cross-sections of the structure. In Fig. 38.7, this bending moment is plotted vs. the height above the ground. In the computations, Eurocode 8 design response spectrum has been applied together with formula (38.45) (solid line) as well as approximation (38.47) (dashed line). It can be seen from Fig. 38.7 that the contribution of rocking excitations is quite substantial, reaching almost 50% of the total response. The bending moment as calculated by applying Eurocode 8 is slightly higher than the approximation (38.47).

Fig. 38.7 Bending moment vs. height for a 160 m slender tower. Total value and contribution of rocking component: Eq. (38.45) – solid line, Eq. (38.47) – dashed line (Zembaty and Boffi 1994)

38.8 Summary and Conclusions Two engineering approaches for the analyses of the rotational component of surface seismic ground motion have been presented. Rocking component of ground motion about the horizontal axis was studied in detail. The first method is based on the decomposition of the ground motion into


567

respective wave components and then differentiation with respect to horizontal, spatial coordinate. The resulting rocking component appeared to be a direct function the wave parameters and time derivative of translational accelerations (third derivative of displacement translations). The second method utilizes the vertical random field of ground motion from spatial arrays of the SMART-1 type. The resulting rocking component is then a function of spatial coherency of the measured vertical accelerations at a selected spatial distance. Subsequent approximate analysis of the seismic response of a slender tower shows that rotational excitations may, in some cases, be as important as the horizontal ones applied in conventional seismic engineering. Acknowledgements. This paper has been written in the EU sponsored Center of Structural Integrity (CESTI) at the Technical University of Opole. The support of the Commission of the European Communities under FP5, contract No. G1MA-CT-2002-04058 is gratefully acknowledged. The author wishes to thank to professor Avigdor Rutenberg from the TechnionIsrael Institute of Technology, for valuable comments on the paper. Figures 38.1, 38.3, 38.4, 38.5, 38.6 and Table 38.1 are reprinted from Zembaty et al. (1993) with permission from Elsevier.

References Abrahamson NA, Bolt BA, Darragh RB, Penzien J, Tsai YB (1987) The Smart 1 accelerograph array (1980-1987): A review. Earthquake Spectra 3: 263-287 Achenbach JD (1973) Wave propagation in elastic solids. North-Holland, Amsterdam Aki K, Richards PG (1980) Quantitative seismology. W.H. Freeman, San Francisco Bouchon M, Aki K (1982) Strain, tilt, and rotation associated with strong ground motion in the vicinity of earthquake faults. Bull Seism Soc Am 72: 1717-1738 Castellani A, Boffi G (1989) Rotational components of seismic motion. Earth Eng Struc 18: 785-797 Castellani A, Zembaty Z (1994), Stochastic modeling of seismic surface rotations. J Nat Hazards 10: 181-191 Castellani A, Zembaty Z (1996) Comparison between earthquake rotation spectra obtained through different experimental sources. Eng Struc 18: 597-603 Ciesielski R (1968) Concrete structures, vol XIII (in Polish), Arkady, Warszawa Clough RW, Penzien J (1993) Dynamics of structures, 2nd edn. McGraw-Hill, New York Imamura A (1937) Theoretical and applied seismology. Maruzen Co., Tokyo

568 Z. Zembaty Juhasowa E, Zembaty Z, Kowalski M (2000) Experimental investigations of dynamic effects on brick masonry buildings and their strengthening. Arch Civil Eng 46: 83-106 Juhasova E, Hurak M, Zembaty Z (2002) Assessment of seismic resistance of masonry structures including boundary conditions. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 22: 1193-1197 Lee VW, Trifunac MD (1985) Torsional accelerograms. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 4: 132-139. Lee VW, Trifunac MD (1987) Rocking strong earthquake accelerations. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 6: 75-89. Loh CH (1985) Analysis of the spatial variation of seismic ground movements from SMART-1 array data. Earthquake Eng Struc 13: 561-577 Newmark NM, Hall WJ (1969) Seismic design criteria for nuclear reactor facilities. Proc. Fourth World Conf Earthq Engrg. Santiago, Chile 2: 37-50 Newmark NM, Rosenblueth E (1971) Fundamentals of earthquake engineering. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs Oliveira CS, Bolt BA (1989) Rotational components of surface strong ground motion. Earthquake Eng Struc 18: 517-526 Penzien J, Watabe M (1975) Characteristics of 3-dimensional earthquake ground motion. Earthquake Eng Struc 3: 365-373 Rutenberg A, Heidebrecht AC (1985) Response spectra for torsion, rocking and rigid foundations. Earthquake Eng Struc 13: 543-557 Sugito M, Goto H, Aikawa F (1984), Simplified separation technique of body and surface waves in strong motion accelerograms. Structural Engineering/Earthquake Engineering, Proc Japan Soc Civil Eng 1: 71-76 Tamura K, Aizawa K (1992) Differential ground motion estimation using a time-space stochastic process model. Structural Engineering/Earthquake Engineering, Proc Japan Soc Civil Eng 8: 217-223 Trifunac MD (1982) A note on rotational components of earthquake motions for incident body waves. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 1: 11-19 Trifunac MD, Brady AG (1975) On the correlation of seismic intensity scales with the peaks of recorded strong ground motion. Bull Seism Soc Am 65: 139-162 Wolf J (1985) Dynamic soil-structure interaction. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs Zembaty Z (1997) Vibrations of bridge structure under kinematic wave excitations. J Struct Eng-ASCE 123: 479-488 Zembaty Z, Boffi G (1994) Effect of rotational seismic ground motion on dynamic response of slender towers. Eur Earthq Eng J 8: 3-11 Zembaty Z, Castellani A, Boffi G (1993) Spectral analysis of the rotational component of earthquake motion. Probabilistic Engineering Mechanics 8: 5-14

39 Effects of Torsional and Rocking Excitations on the Response of Structures Mihailo D. Trifunac Department of Civil Engineering, University of Southern California Los Angeles, CA 90089-2531; e-mail: [email protected]

39.1 Introduction In traditional earthquake engineering, structures are designed to resist only simplified representation of strong earthquake ground motion, in terms of the horizontal translational components of acceleration. Occasionally, in the design of important structures with long spans, the vertical component of excitation is also considered. Rotational excitation by the torsional and rocking components of strong ground motion is almost never considered. The significance of the rotational components of strong motion for the overall response of structures can be evaluated using analytical solutions of the soil-structure interaction problems, by means of numerical modeling, or with probabilistic representations of response. At present, there are only a few isolated recordings of the rotational components of strong ground motion, and it is therefore possible only to work with their simulations. This chapter presents the methods for construction of artificial torsional and rocking strong motion accelerations, using the theory of linear wave propagation in a layered half space. These synthetic rotational motions, along with the corresponding translational components of motion, can be used to evaluate the response of typical structures. The significance of the rotational components of excitation can be evaluated by comparing the responses computed with and without participation of rotational components in the general forcing functions. The generation of seismic waves can be viewed from two different levels. The first is the classical macroscopic view, which starts with kinematic representation of faulting (Haskell 1969) and then follows the radiated elastic waves using the first-order linear theory of elasticity. If nonlinear phenomena occur along the wave path, and if those are investigated, the

570 M.D. Trifunac

analysis is usually restricted to the response of soft soil deposits near ground surface. The second level involves the microphysics of fracture in rocks and includes the irreversible deformations from dislocations, disclinations and micro cracks (Teisseyre and Majewski 2002). In the following review of the effects of rotational strong ground motion on the response of man-made structures, only the first, or macroscopic representation will be considered. Rotational ground motions, accompanying seismic waves and their effects on simple objects (obelisks, grave stones) and buildings are mentioned in many older texts, which by describing the consequences of strong shaking aim to decipher its physical nature (Hobbs 1907, Davison 1927, Gutenberg 1927, Richter 1958, Imamura 1937). Deployment of strong motion accelerographs in many seismic areas of the world during the past seventy years has produced data on translational components of motion during many strong earthquakes. This data describes strong motion in three orthogonal directions (two horizontal and one vertical), but because the spacing of the recording sites is much larger than the wavelengths of the recorded motions, little is known today about the accompanying differential and rotational motions. The effects of differential motions on man-made structures include strains (Lee 1990), curvatures (Trifunac 1990), torsion (Newmark 1969, Luco 1976, Scanlan 1976, Lee and Trifunac 1985) and rocking excitation (Lee and Trifunac 1987) of foundations, which, for flexible, extended, multiple and separate foundations (e.g. bridges) can lead to large pseudostatic shears and moments (Trifunac and Todorovska 1997a). Many structural failures and much of the damage caused by earthquakes have been linked to differential and rotational ground motions. Hart et al. (1975) showed that large torsional responses of tall buildings in Los Angeles, during the San Fernando, California, earthquake in 1971, could be ascribed to torsional excitation, while longitudinal differential motions may have caused the collapse of bridges during San Fernando 1971, Miyagi-ken-Oki 1978 (Bycroft 1980) and Northridge 1994 (Trifunac et al. 1996) earthquakes. Earthquake damage to pipelines that is not associated with faulting or landslides but is due to large differential motions and strains in the soil reflects the consequences of traveling seismic waves and of the associated large rotations and twisting of soil blocks caused by lateral spreads and early stages of liquefaction (Ariman and Muleski 1981, Trifunac and Todorovska 1997b, 1998, 1999, Trifunac 1997, 2003). Studies of the rotational components of strong motion and of their effects on man-made structures are relatively young. Much can be anticipated and studied theoretically, but our understanding of these motions will gain sound and realistic basis only when a large number of recorded

39

Effects of Torsional and Rocking Excitations on Structure Response

571

rotational accelerograms becomes available. This may take several decades and will require deployment of a large number of new strong motion instruments, which will record all six components of motion (three translations and three rotations; Trifunac and Todorovska 2001a, b).

39.2 Rotational Strong Ground Motion Rotational components of strong ground motion accompany the displacements induced by seismic waves. In linear elastic media, rotations are expressed by space derivatives of the displacements. Other contributions to rotational motion result from the internal structure of the medium, nonsymmetric processes of fracture, and friction (Teisseyre et al. 2003). However, once generated, these additional rotational motions are believed to attenuate quickly, and so, to be studied experimentally, they have to be recorded in the near field (Teisseyre 2002, Teisseyre and BoratyĔski 2002). During the past thirty years, the inversion of recorded strong ground motion (Trifunac 1974, Trifunac and Udwadia 1974) has been developed to such a degree that it now can describe spatial and temporal variations of slip on the fault surface. Many inverse studies of the source mechanism have shown that the distribution of slip can be very irregular (Jordanovski and Todorovska 2002). Along the edges of fault planes and near abrupt changes of fault slip, tensile fractures can contribute to radiation of rotational waves (Takeo and Ito 1997). A comparison of computed and recorded rotational velocity during an earthquake swarm, in March 1997, off the shore of Izu peninsula in Japan, Takeo (1998) showed that the recorded rotations were several times larger than the simulated rotations computed from linear displacements excited by dislocations on the fault (Bouchon and Aki 1982). He showed that agreement between recorded and simulated rotations can be improved if “direct excitation of rotational motions due to spatial variations of slip velocity and due to rotational strains” is added to the rotations excited by dislocations alone. Translational and rotational components of strong motion radiated from an earthquake source are modified along the propagation path through interference, focusing, scattering, and diffraction. For example, reflection of plane P and SV waves from half space can lead to large displacement amplitudes for incident angles between 30q and 43q, but the associated rotations (rocking for P and SV waves, and torsion for SH waves) change monotonically and do not lead to large amplifications (Trifunac 1982, Lin et al. 2001). Scattering and diffraction of plane waves from topographic

572 M.D. Trifunac

features can lead to focusing and to amplification for both displacements and rotations (Sanchez-Sesma et al. 2002). Beyond the results of linear theory, in the near field the non-linear response of soil and ultimately soil failure and liquefaction can lead to large transient and permanent rotations. Four types of ground failure can follow liquefaction: lateral spreading, ground oscillations, flow failure, and loss of bearing strength. Lateral spreads involve displacements of surface blocks of sediment facilitated by liquefaction in a subsurface layer. This type of failure may occur on slopes up to 3q and is particularly destructive to pipelines, bridge piers, and other long and shallow structures situated in flood plain areas adjacent to rivers. Ground oscillations occur when the slopes are too small to result in lateral spreads following liquefaction at depth. The overlying surface blocks break one from another and then oscillate on liquefied substrate. Flow failures are a more catastrophic form of material transport and usually occur on slopes greater than 3q. The flow consists of liquefied soil and blocks of intact material riding on and with liquefied substrate, on land or under the sea (e.g., at Seward and Valdez during the 1964 Alaska earthquake; Trifunac and Todorovska 2003). Loss of bearing strength can occur when the soil liquefies under a structure. The buildings can settle, tip, or float upward, if the structure is buoyant. The accompanying motions can lead to large transient and permanent rotations, which so far have been neither evaluated through simulation nor recorded by strong motion instruments.

39.3 Recording Rotational Strong Motion Direct instrumental data on rotational components of earthquake ground motion (Farrell 1969, Shibata et al. 1976, Teisseyre et al. 2003, Takeo 1998) and of the motions in the vicinity of large explosions (Nigbor 1994) are rare. This can be attributed to two things. First, in traditional seismology recorded motions are small because of the large epicentral distances, and thus the recording of the associated rotations has received little attention. Second, relative to the design of transducers for measurement of translational motions, it is more difficult to design transducers to measure rotations (Graizer 1989). Following the development of strong motion accelerographs since the 1930s, which was influenced by experience with the design of seismological transducers, it is now becoming clear that for complete characterization of strong motion — and in particular for computation of permanent displacements following earthquakes — in the near-

39


573

field, all three translational and three rotational motions must be recorded (Trifunac and Todorovska 2001b). Stedman et al. (1995) observed, using a ring laser gyro, torsional ground motion excited by a magnitude 6.3 earthquake in New Zealand, at an epicentral distance of 200 km. Other ring laser interferometers (gyroscopes with zero inertial moment) for recording angular motion are described in Takeo and Ito (1997), Jaroszewicz et al. (2001) and Cochard et al. (2003). Takeo (1998) described and analyzed three translational and three rotational components of ground velocity recorded during two earthquakes offshore of Ito on Izu peninsula, Japan, in 1997. He measured rotational motions with Systron Donner triaxial gyro sensors, with a full-scale output capacity of 8.7 u 10-1 rad/s and with flat frequency response from 0 to 75 Hz. A rotational seismograph consisting of two penduli with opposite orientations and with identical mechanical properties (Graizer 1989, Moriya and Marumo 1998) in Ojców Observatory, Poland, recorded a small Silesian earthquake event, magnitude 1.5, at an epicentral distance of about 60 km, on 11 July 2001 (Teisseyre et al. 2003). So far, nobody has succeeded in recording strong rotational motion in the near field of large earthquakes. Average “rotational motions” can be approximated from the differences in the recordings of at least two translational records, from an array of stations on the ground (Huang 2003, Castellani and Boffi 1986, 1989, Oliveira and Bolt 1989, Nathan and MacKenzie 1975, Droste and Teisseyre 1976) and in structures (Moslem and Trifunac 1986, Trifunac and Todorovska 2001c, Trifunac and Ivanovic 2003). Such estimates can at best approximate the average rotations over the distance separating the two translational records, and in principle they will approximate the rotations at a point only for the wave-lengths that are much longer than this separation distance. This is a limitation for the studies of rotational strong motion in the ground and in the flexible foundations of structures (Trifunac et al. 1999, Trifunac and Todorovska 2001c), but the method is a suitable and desirable form of describing relative rotations in engineering analyses of the responses of buildings in terms of inter-story drifts (Trifunac and Ivanovic 2003).

39.4 Generation of Synthetic Rotational Motions In the following it is assumed that the x1-axis coincides with the radial coordinate, in the plane containing the earthquake source and the recording station. The x3-axis is perpendicular to this plane and coincides with the transverse direction relative to the earthquake source. The vertical coordi-

574 M.D. Trifunac

nate, x2, is perpendicular to the surface of the half space. Then, in elastic isotropic, layered half space, P, SV, and Rayleigh waves will produce only horizontal x1, vertical x2, and rocking M x 3 (about the x3 axis) motions, while SH and Love waves will produce only transverse x3 and torsional M x (about the x2 axis) motions. An early engineering suggestion, that torsional ground motion occurs during strong earthquake ground motion, may have been made by Rosenblueth (1957). The first proposal on how this torsional excitation could be estimated was made by Newmark (1969), who assumed that apparent velocities of strong motion can be approximated by one equivalent velocity, c, for all frequencies of transverse motion. Newmark’s idea was adopted and further explored in the studies of Nathan and MacKenzie (1975), Morgan et al. (1983), Awad and Humar (1984), and Rutenberg and Heidebrecht (1985). Through spectral analyses of the responses of tall buildings during the 1971 San Fernando earthquake in California, Hart et al. (1975) showed that torsional motions can indeed contribute significantly to the overall response. Their study was limited by the fact that there was only one strong motion accelerograph on the roof of each building, which prevented them from quantitatively separating out the torsional contributions to total response. With the introduction in the mid-1970s of central recording systems that employ distributed one-channel recorders throughout the buildings, this limitation was partly eliminated, so that the recordings made since the late 1970s (e.g., Kojic et al. 1984, Trifunac and Ivanovic 2003) could be used to separate the contributions to the response of translation and the torsion of structures. Analyses showing that the rocking response of structures is caused not only by the compliance of soil during soil-structure interaction but also by the rocking of foundations caused by the passage of P, SV, and Rayleigh waves started to appear in the earthquake engineering literature in the mid1980s (Castellani and Bofi 1986, 1989, Lee and Trifunac 1987). Many analytical studies showed the significance of those rocking excitations for continuous (e.g., Todorovska and Trifunac 1990a, b, 1991, 1992a, b) and for the base isolated structures (Todorovska and Trifunac, 1993), but during the past 20 years the studies of rocking excitation have been outnumbered by the studies of torsional excitation and response. Proper separation of the effects of rocking excitation and the rocking associated with soilstructure interaction are essential for interpretation of the observed interstory drifts in full-scale structures. However, with the current instrumentation in tall buildings, which typically consists only of translational transducers, this separation cannot be carried out even approximately (Trifunac et al. 2001a, b, c, Trifunac and Ivanovic 2003). For buildings with large 2

39


575

floor plans, warping and deformation of the foundation (Trifunac et al. 1999, Hayir et al. 2001, Todorovska et al. 2001), differential translational, and rocking seismic waves further complicate both analysis and recording of the response of full-scale structures. Further work needs to be done in this area before the role of rocking excitation can be understood and then included in engineering design. In the absence of recorded rotational components of strong motion, it is important for engineering studies of response to have at least preliminary and physically realistic simulations of such motions. At present, the method of Lee and Trifunac (1985, 1987) meets most of these requirements, and it is outlined below. The method of Lee and Trifunac for generation of artificial torsional and rocking accelerograms is an exact analytical method if it is accepted that (1) the motion occurs in linear elastic, layered half space and (2) that synthetic ground motion can be constructed by superposition of body P and SV and surface Rayleigh waves for rocking (Lee and Trifunac 1987), and by body SH and surface Love waves for torsion (Lee and Trifunac 1985). This method has been extended to predict the associated strains (Lee 1990) and curvatures near the surface over time (Trifunac 1990), during passage of seismic waves. Synthesis of translational motions is based on the procedure proposed by Trifunac (1971) and later refined by Wong and Trifunac (1979). This procedure generates random, transient time series data, with arrival times determined by the empirical travel times of P and S waves in the area and by computed arrivals of surface waves determined from phase and group velocities in the given layered structure. After random time series have been created, their amplitudes are scaled to produce correct (desired) Fourier (or response) spectrum amplitudes, based on empirical scaling laws for such spectra in terms of earthquake magnitude, distance, and local soil and geologic site conditions (e.g., Lee 2002a). At the end, the frequencydependent duration of each random time series is modified to agree with empirical estimates of the duration of strong motion in terms of selected empirical scaling equations for duration of strong motion (e.g., Lee 2002b). Because in this process of generating translational accelerograms all characteristics of incident body and surface waves are known, those can be used for the computation of rotations, strains, and curvograms (Lee 2002c).

576 M.D. Trifunac

39.5 Response of Structures Computation of the dynamic response of structures to earthquake shaking requires selection of the forcing functions and of the mathematical models of structures. How close the result will be to the actual response can be determined only by full scale experiments, preferably through a comparison with recorded response during earthquake shaking. In traditional earthquake engineering only one or two translational horizontal components of strong motion acceleration are used as forcing functions. Vertical accelerations are usually neglected, because the methods of solution are formulated assuming small deflections. Combined effects of vertical, rocking, and torsional accelerations cannot be neglected in the computation of response of bridge structures (e.g., Werner et al. 1979). Thus, most earthquake engineering calculations of response do not consider the effects of gravity and vertical accelerations, and by adopting these simplifying assumptions ignore the consequences of dynamic instability (Lee 1979). Because both are significant during the collapsing stage of response, it is seen that for typical selection of forcing functions, meaningful prediction of response is possible only for relatively small response amplitudes. Excitation by rotational components of strong motion (torsion and rocking) is also usually ignored. Some analytical studies do include torsional excitation (Luco 1976, Todorovska et al. 1988), but explicit consideration of rocking excitation is very rare. An elementary representation of simple structural systems is often based on a model with a rigid foundation slab supporting a one-dimensional set of lumped masses interconnected by massless springs, and with dashpots to simulate local dissipation of vibrational energy. Such models have been used to analyze elementary consequences of soil-structure interaction and are common in many studies and applications of the Response Spectrum Method (Biot 1942, Trifunac 2002, Gupta and Trifunac 1987a, 1990a). These models have also been studied and used in some detail to evaluate the significance of the effects of torsional excitation (Gupta and Trifunac 1987b, 1989, 1990c) and of rocking excitation (Gupta and Trifunac 1988a, 1990b, 1991). By using the order statistics of the peaks in earthquake response (Gupta and Trifunac 1988b) the contribution of torsional and rocking excitation has been characterized in terms of tens of the largest peaks of response, not just the largest peak, which forms the basis for the Response Spectrum Method. These studies have shown how significant torsional and rocking excitations can be and for what combinations of structural and soil properties. It has been shown, for example, that rocking excitation becomes important for tall structures supported by soft soil de-

39


577

posits, while torsional excitations can dominate in the response of long and stiff structures supported by soft soils. Observations of the response of buildings during earthquake shaking lead to similar findings. For a seven-story, symmetric, reinforced concrete structure, for example, which was damaged in 1971 by the San Fernando Earthquake and again in 1994 by the Northridge earthquake, torsional response contributed up to 40 percent of motion at the roof (Trifunac and Ivanovic 2003). Coupled with the non-linear response of soils and large excentricities in soil-structure interaction, torsional and rocking excitations of ground motion contributed to significant damage to this building (Trifunac et al. 2001b, c). In another well-studied building (Hollywood Storage building) in Los Angeles, asymmetry of the foundation and strong torsional excitation by surface waves propagating essentially along the longitudinal axis of the building resulted in large torsional response (Trifunac et al. 2001a). Recording, analysis, and interpretation of the contributions of torsional and rocking excitations to the total inter-story drifts in structures are also essential for future development of earthquake-resistant design codes. Without proper consideration of these contributions, the observed drifts may be erroneously assumed to result completely from relative displacement of structures, and this can lead to false confidence that the current design methods are “conservative” (Trifunac and Ivanovic 2003).

References Ariman T, Muleski GE (1981) A review of the response of buried pipelines under seismic excitation. Earthquake Eng Struct Dyn 9: 133-151 Awad AM, Humar JL (1984) Dynamic response of buildings to ground rotational motion. Canadian J of Civil Eng 2: 48-56. Biot MA (1942) Analytical and Experimental Methods in Engineering Seismology. ASCE Transactions 108: 365-408. Bouchon M, Aki K (1982) Strain and rotation associated with strong ground motion in the vicinity of earthquake faults. Bull Seism Soc Am 72: 1717-1738 Bycroft GN (1980) Soil-foundation interaction and differential ground motions. Earthquake Eng Struct Dyn 8: 397-404 Castellani A, Boffi G, (1986) Rotational components of the surface ground motion during an earthquake. Earthquake Eng Struct Dyn 14: 751-767 Castellani A, Boffi G (1989) On the rotational components of seismic motion. Earthquake Eng Struct Dyn 18: 785-797 Cochard A, Flaws A, Schreiber U, Igel H (2003) Observations and simulations of rotational motions. Geophys Res Abstr 5, 13160

578 M.D. Trifunac Davison C (1927) The Founders of Seismology. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge 240 Droste Z, Teisseyre R (1976) Rotational and displacement components of ground motion as deduced from data of the azimuth system of seismographs. Publs Inst Geophys Pol Acad Sci 97: 157-167 Farrell WE (1969) A gyroscopic seismometer: Measurements during the Borrego earthquake. Bull Seism Soc Am 59: 1239-1245 Graizer VM (1989) Ob izmerenii naklona zemnoi poverkhnosti vblizi epitsentra vzriva. Dokladi Akademii Nauk SSSR, Geofizika 305: 2, 314-318 Gupta ID, Trifunac MD (1987a) Statistical analysis of response spectra method in earthquake engineering. Dept Civil Eng, Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report 87-03 Gupta ID, Trifunac MD (1987b) A note on contribution of torsional excitation to earthquake response of simple symmetric buildings. Earthq Eng Eng Vib 7: 3, 27-46 Gupta ID, Trifunac MD (1988a) A note on computing the contribution of rocking excitation to earthquake response of simple buildings. Bull Indian Soc Earthq Tech 25: 2, 73-89 Gupta ID, Trifunac MD (1988b) Order statistics of peaks in earthquake response. J Eng Mech (ASCE) 114: 10, 1605-1627 Gupta VK, Trifunac MD (1989) Investigation of building response to translational and rotational earthquake excitations. Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report 89-02 Gupta ID, Trifunac MD (1990a) Probabilistic spectrum superposition for response analysis including the effects of soil-structure interaction. J Probabilistic Eng Mech 5: 9-18 Gupta VK, Trifunac MD (1990b) Response of multistoried buildings to ground translation and rocking during earthquakes. J Probabilistic Eng Mech 5: 138145 Gupta VK, Trifunac MD (1990c) Response of multistoried buildings to ground translation and torsion during earthquakes. European Earthq Eng IV, 1, 34-42 Gupta VK, Trifunac MD (1991) Effects of ground rocking on dynamic response of multistoried buildings during earthquakes. Struct Eng/Earthq Eng (JSCE) 8: 2, 43-50 Gutenberg B (1927) Grundlagen der Erdbebenkunde. Univ Frankfurt a/M 189 Hart GC, DiJulio M, Lew M (1975) Torsional response of high-rise buildings. J Struct Div-ASCE. 101: 397-414 Haskell NA (1969) Elastic displacements in the near field of a propagating fault. Bull Seism Soc Am 59: 865-908 Hayir A, Todorovska MI, Trifunac MD (2001) Antiplane response of a dyke with flexible soil-structure interface to incident SH-waves. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 21: 7, 603-613 Hobbs WH (1907) Earthquakes. An Introduction to Seismic Geology. Appleton and Co., New York pp 336

39


579

Huang BS (2003) Ground rotational motions of the 1999 Chi-Chi, Taiwan earthquake as inferred from dense array observations. Geophys Res Letters 30: 6, Art. No. 1307, 40-1, 40-4. Imamura A (1937) Theoretical and applied seismology. Maruzen Co., Tokyo 358 Jaroszewicz LR, Krajewski Z, Swillo R (2001) Application of fiber-optic Sagnac interferometer for detection of rotational seismic events. Mol Quantum Acoust 22: 133-144 Jordanovski LR, Todorovska MI (2002) Inverse studies of the earthquake source mechanism from near-field strong motion records. Indian Soc Earthq Technol J 39: 1-2, 73-91 Kojic S, MD Trifunac, Anderson JC (1984) A post earthquake response analysis of the imperial county services building. Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report CE 84-02 Lee VW (1979) Investigation of three-dimensional soil-structure interaction. Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report 79-11 Lee VW (1990) Surface strains associated with strong earthquake shaking. Proc Japan Soc Civil Eng 422n: 1-14, 187-194 Lee VW (2002a) Empirical scaling of strong earthquake ground motion-part I: Attenuation and scaling of response spectrum. Indian Soc Earthq Technol J 39: 4, 219-254 Lee VW (2002b) Empirical scaling of strong earthquake ground motion - part II: Duration of strong motion. Indian Soc Earthq Technol J 39: 4, 255-272 Lee VW (2002c) Empirical scaling of strong earthquake ground motion - part III: Synthetic strong motion. Indian Soc Earthqe Technol J 39: 4, 273-310 Lee VW, Trifunac MD (1985) Torsional accelerograms. Int J Soil Dynam & Earthq Eng 4: 3, 132-139 Lee VW, Trifunac MD (1987) Rocking strong earthquake accelerations. Int J Soil Dynam & Earthq Eng 6: 2, 75-89 Lin CH, Lee VW, Trifunac MD (2001) Effects of boundary drainage on the reflection of elastic waves in a poroelastic half space saturated with non-viscous fluid. Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report No. CE 01-04 Luco JE (1976) Torsional response of structures to obliquely incident seismic SH waves. Earthquake Eng Struc 4, 207-219 Morgan JR, Hall WJ, Newmark NM (1983) Seismic response arising from traveling waves. J Struct Div-ASCE 109: 4, 1010-1027 Moriya T, Marumo R (1998) Design for rotation seismometers and their calibration. Geophys Bull Hokkaido Univ 61: 99-106 Moslem K, Trifunac MD (1986) Effects of soil-structure interaction on the response of buildings during strong earthquake ground motion. Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report No. CE 86-04 Nathan ND, MacKenzie JR (1975) Rotational components of earthquake motion. Can J Civil Eng 2: 430-436 Newmark NM (1969) Torsion in symmetrical buildings. Proc Fourth World Conference on Earthquake Eng II, A3/19 - A3/32

580 M.D. Trifunac Nigbor RL (1994) Six-degree-of-freedom ground-motion measurement. Bull Seism Soc Am 84: 1665-1669 Oliveira CS, Bolt BA (1989) Rotational components of surface strong ground motion. Earthquake Eng Struct 18: 517-526 Richter CF (1958) Elementary seismology. Freeman and Co., San Francisco CA Rosenblueth E (1957) Comments on torsion. Procs Convention Struct Eng Assoc Southern California 36-38 Rutenberg A, Heidebrecht AC (1985) Rotational ground motion and seismic codes. Can J Civil Eng 12: 3, 583-592 Sanchez-Sesma FJ, Palencia VJ, Luzon F (2002) Estimation of local site effects during earthquakes: An overview. Indian Soc Earthq Technol J 39: 3, 167-194 Scanlan RH (1976) Seismic wave effects on soil-structure interaction. Earthquake Eng Struct 4: 379-388 Shibata H, Shigeta T, Sone A (1976) A note on some results of observation of torsional ground motions and their response analysis. Bull Earthquake Resistant Struct Research Center 10: 43-47 Stedman GE, Li Z, Bilger HR (1995) Sideband analysis and seismic detection in a large ring laser. App Optics 34: 5375-5385 Takeo M (1998) Ground rotational motions recorded in near-source region. Geophys Res Lett 25: 6, 789-792 Takeo M, Ito HM (1997) What can be learned from rotational motions excited by earthquakes? Geophys J Int 129: 319-329 Teisseyre R (2002) Continuum with defect and self rotation fields. Acta Geophys Pol 50: 51-68 Teisseyre R, BoratyĔski W (2002) Continuum with self-rotational nuclei: Evolution of defect fields and equations of motion. Acta Geophys Pol 50: 223-230 Teisseyre R, Majewski E (2002) Physics of earthquakes. In: Lee WHM et al. (eds) International Handbook of Earthquake and Engineering Seismology, part A. Academic Press, Amsterdam, pp 229-235 Teisseyre R, Suchcicki J, Teisseyre K, Wiszniowski J, Palangio P (2003) Seismic rotation waves: Basic elements of theory and recording. Ann Geophys 46: 4, 671-685 Todorovska MI, Trifunac MD (1990a) Analytical model for in plane incident building foundation soil interaction: Incident P, SV, and Rayleigh waves, Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report 90-01 Todorovska MI, Trifunac MD (1990b) A note on the propagation of earthquake waves in buildings with soft first floor. J Eng Mech-ASCE 116: 4, 892-900 Todorovska MI, Trifunac MD (1992a) The system damping, the system frequency and the system response peak amplitudes during in-plane building-soil interaction. Earthquake Eng Struct 21: 2, 127-144 Todorovska MI, Trifunac MD (1992b) Effect of the base input base rocking on the relative response of long buildings on embedded foundations. Europ Earthq Eng VI: 1, 36-46 Todorovska MI, Trifunac MD (1993) The effects of wave passage on the response of base-isolated buildings on rigid embedded foundations. Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report CE 93-10

39


581

Todorovska MI, Trifunac MD, Lee VW (1988) Investigation of earthquake response of long buildings. Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report No. CE 88-02 Todorovska MI, Hayir A, Trifunac MD (2001) Antiplane response of a dike on flexible embedded foundation to incident SH-waves. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 21: 7, 593-601 Trifunac MD (1971) A method for synthesizing realistic strong ground motion. Bull Seism Soc Am 61: 1755-1770 Trifunac MD (1974) A three-dimensional dislocation model for the San Fernando, California earthquake of February 9, 1971. Bull Seism Soc Am 64: 149-172 Trifunac MD (1982) A note on rotational components of earthquake motions for incident body waves. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 1: 1, 11-19 Trifunac MD (1990) Curvograms of strong ground motion. J Eng Mech-ASCE 116: 6, 1426-1432 Trifunac MD (1997) Differential earthquake motion of building foundations. J Struct Eng-ASCE 4, 414-422 Trifunac MD (2002) 70th anniversary of Biot spectrum. Indian Soc Earthq Technol J 40: 1, 19-50 Trifunac MD (2003) Non-linear soil response as a natural passive isolation mechanism, Paper II – the 1933 Long Beach, California earthquake. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 23: 7, 549-562 Trifunac MD, Ivanovic SS (2003) Analysis of drifts in a seven-story reinforced concrete structure. Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report No. CE 03-01 Trifunac MD, Todorovska MI (1997a) Response spectra and differential motion of columns. Earthquake Eng Struct 26: 2, 251-268 Trifunac MD, Todorovska MI (1997b) Northridge, California, earthquake of 17 January 1994: Density of pipe breaks and surface strains. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 16: 3, 193-207 Trifunac MD, Todorovska MI (1998) Non-linear soil response as a natural passive isolation mechanism – the 1994 Northridge, California Earthquake. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 17: 1, 41-51 Trifunac MD, Todorovska MI (1999) Reduction of structural damage by nonlinear soil response. J Struct Eng-ASCE 125: 89-97 Trifunac MD, Todorovska MI (2001a) Evolution of accelerographs, data processing, strong motion arrays and amplitude and spatial resolution in recording strong earthquake motion. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 21: 6, 537-555 Trifunac MD, Todorovska MI (2001b) A note on useable dynamic range in accelerographs recording translation. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 21: 4, 275-286 Trifunac MD, Todorovska MI (2001c) Recording and interpreting earthquake response of full scale structures. In: Erdik M et al. (eds.) Proc NATO Advanced Research Workshop on Strong Motion Instrumentation for Civil Eng Structures, Istanbul, Turkey, June 2-5 1999, Kluwer Acad Publ, Dordrecht, pp 131155 Trifunac MD, Todorovska MI (2003) Tsunami source parameters of submarine earthquakes and slides. In: Locat J and Mienert J (ed.) Proc First Intern Symp

582 M.D. Trifunac on Submarine mass movements and their consequences, EGS-AGU-EUG Joint Meeting, Nice, France, April 7-11, Kluwer Academic Publ, Dordrecht, pp 121-128 Trifunac MD, Udwadia FE (1974) Parkfield, California earthquake of June 27, 1966: A three-dimensional moving dislocation. Bull Seism Soc Am 64: 511533 Trifunac MD, Todorovska MI, Ivanovic SS (1996) Peak velocities, and peak surface strains during Northridge, California earthquake of 17 January 1994. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 15: 5, 301-310 Trifunac MD, Ivanovic SS, Todorovska MI, Novikova EI, Gladkov A(1999) Experimental evidence for flexibility of a building foundation supported by concrete friction piles. Soil Dyn Earthq Eng 18: 3, 169-187 Trifunac MD, Hao TY, Todorovska MI (2001a) Response of a 14 story reinforced concrete structure to excitation by nine earthquakes: 61 years of observation in the Hollywood storage building, Dept Civil Eng Univ Southern California, Los Angeles CA, Report CE 01-02 Trifunac MD, Ivanovic SS, Todorovska MI (2001b) Apparent periods of a building, Part I: Fourier analysis. J Struct Eng-ASCE 127: 5, 517-526 Trifunac MD, Ivanovic SS, Todorovska MI (2001c) Apparent periods of a building, part II: Time-frequency analysis. J Struct Eng-ASCE 127: 5, 527-537 Werner SD, Lee LC, Wong HL, Trifunac MD (1979) Structural response to traveling seismic waves, J of Struct Div-ASCE 105, ST12, 2547-2564 Wong HL, Trifunac MD (1979) Generation of artificial strong motion accelerograms. Int J Earthq Eng Struct Dynamics 7: 509-527

Earthquake source asymmetry, structural media and rotation effects

Earthquake engineering for structural design

Earthquake Engineering for Structural Design

Earthquake Engineering for Structural Design

Quaternions and rotation sequences

Quaternions and rotation sequences

Earthquake

Earthquake!

Stellar rotation

Historical Eclipses and Earth's Rotation

Rotation and Accretion Powered Pulsars

Rotation and Accretion Powered Pulsars

Media Effects and Beyond: Culture, Socialization and Lifestyles

Army Stationing and Rotation Policy

The Unitary and Rotation Groups

Asymmetry and Aggregation in the EU

Earthquake and Volcano Deformation

Earthquake Protection

Earthquake Games

Earthquake Engineering

Stellar Rotation (Cambridge Astrophysics)

Asymmetry: The Foundation of Information

WIND and EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT BUILDINGS: STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN (Civil and Environmental Engineering)

Stellar Rotation (Cambridge Astrophysics)

earthquake games

Earthquake seismology

Stellar Rotation (Cambridge Astrophysics)

Earthquake protection

China and Vietnam: The Politics of Asymmetry

The 1755 Lisbon Earthquake: Revisited (Geotechnical, Geological, and Earthquake Engineering)

Media in the Ubiquitous Era: Ambient, Social and Gaming Media (Premier Reference Source)

Earthquake source asymmetry, structural media and rotation effects

Earthquake engineering for structural design

Earthquake Engineering for Structural Design

Earthquake Engineering for Structural Design

Quaternions and rotation sequences

Quaternions and rotation sequences

Earthquake

Earthquake!

Stellar rotation

Historical Eclipses and Earth's Rotation

Rotation and Accretion Powered Pulsars

Rotation and Accretion Powered Pulsars

Media Effects and Beyond: Culture, Socialization and Lifestyles

Army Stationing and Rotation Policy

The Unitary and Rotation Groups

Asymmetry and Aggregation in the EU

Earthquake and Volcano Deformation

Earthquake Protection

Earthquake Games

Earthquake Engineering

Stellar Rotation (Cambridge Astrophysics)

Asymmetry: The Foundation of Information

WIND and EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT BUILDINGS: STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN (Civil and Environmental Engineering)

Stellar Rotation (Cambridge Astrophysics)

earthquake games

Earthquake seismology

Stellar Rotation (Cambridge Astrophysics)

Earthquake protection

China and Vietnam: The Politics of Asymmetry

The 1755 Lisbon Earthquake: Revisited (Geotechnical, Geological, and Earthquake Engineering)

Media in the Ubiquitous Era: Ambient, Social and Gaming Media (Premier Reference Source)

Recommend Documents